Professional Documents
Culture Documents
ShellGallery 55
ShellGallery 55
for
°
Scientific WorkPlace
R
and
°
Scientific Word
R
Version 5
A Gallery of Document Shells
for
°
Scientific WorkPlace
R
and
°
Scientific Word
R
Version 5
Susan Bagby
George Pearson
MacKichan Software, Inc.
c
°2003 by MacKichan Software, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this book may be repro-
duced, stored in a retrieval system, or transcribed, in any form or by any means—electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise—without the prior written permission of the
publisher, MacKichan Software, Inc., Poulsbo, Washington. Information in this document is sub-
ject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of the publisher.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. It is against the law to copy the
software on any medium except as specifically allowed in the agreement.
Printed in the United States of America
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Trademarks
Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, Scientific Notebook, and EasyMath are registered
trademarks of MacKichan Software, Inc. EasyMath is the sophisticated parsing and translating
system included in Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook that al-
lows the user to work in standard mathematical notation, request computations from the under-
lying computational system (MuPAD in this version) based on the implied commands embedded
in the mathematical syntax or via menu, and receive the response in typeset standard notation or
graphic form in the current document. MuPAD is a registered trademark of SciFace GmbH. Acro-
bat is the registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Inc. TEX is a trademark of the American Math-
ematical Society. TrueTEX is a registered trademark of Richard J. Kinch. PDFTEX is the copyright
of Hàn Thế Thành and is available under the GNU public license. Windows is a registered trade-
mark of Microsoft Corporation. MathType is a trademark of Design Science, Inc. ImageStream
Graphics Filters and ImageStream are registered trademarks of Inso Kansas City Corporation:
ImageStream Graphic Filters
Copyright 1991-1999
Inso Kansas City Corporation
All Rights Reserved
All other brand and product names are trademarks of their respective companies. The spelling
portion of this product utilizes the Proximity Linguistic Technology. Words are checked against
one or more of the following Proximity Linguibase° R
products:
Number Proximity
Linguibase Name Publisher of Words Copyright
American English Merriam-Webster, Inc. 144,000 1997
British English William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 80,000 1997
Catalan Lluis de Yzaguirre i Maura 484,000 1993
Danish IDE a.s 169,000 1990
Dutch Van Dale Lexicografie bv 223,000 1996
Finnish IDE a.s 191,000 1991
French Hachette 288,909 1997
French Canadian Hachette 288,909 1997
German Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag 500,000 1999
German (Swiss) Bertelsmann Lexikon Verlag 500,000 1999
Italian William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 185,000 1997
Norwegian (Bokmal) IDE a.s 150,000 1990
Norwegian (Nynorsk) IDE a.s 145,000 1992
Polish MorphoLogic, Inc. 1997
Portuguese (Brazilian) William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 210,000 1990
Portuguese (Continental) William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 218,000 1990
Russian Russicon 1997
Spanish William Collins Sons & Co. Ltd. 215,000 1997
Swedish IDE a.s 900,000 1990
Typesetting Basics xx
Producing Documents with Typesetting xx
Producing Documents without Typesetting xxi
Understanding the Differences in the Final Product xxi
2 Article Shells 11
A Simple MIT Press Article 12
AASTeX Journal 14
An Astronomy-Astrophysics Journal 28
Annals of Statistics-Draft 30
ASAE Transactions 32
ASME Meeting 34
Balkema 37
DECUS Proceedings 39
Elsevier Preprint 49
Geophysics Journal 51
IEICE Transactions 57
Kluwer Journal 72
REVTeX 4 84
Science Magazine 86
SIAM Journal 88
SIAM-ACM Preprint 92
Similar to AIP 94
TU Wien 125
SW Exam #2 194
SW Exam #3 195
Syllabus 196
Book #1 302
xii Contents
Exam #1 306
Fax #1 310
Letter #1 315
Letter #2 316
Letter #3 317
Letter #4 318
Memo #1 319
Play 320
Report #1 325
Resume #1 328
Slides A 330
Slides B 332
Slides C 334
Slides D 336
Thesis #1 352
aaai-named.bst 420
aabbrv.bst 422
aalpha.bst 423
abbrv.bst 424
achemso.bst 425
achemsol.bst 426
acm.bst 427
address.bst 428
address-html.bst 431
adfathesis.bst 433
agsm.bst 434
alpha.bst 435
alphahtml.bst 436
alphahtmldate.bst 438
alphahtmldater.bst 439
amsalpha.bst 440
amsplain.bst 441
annotate.bst 442
annotation.bst 443
anotit.bst 444
apa.bst 445
apacite.bst 446
apalike.bst 447
apalike2.bst 448
aplain.bst 449
Contents xv
apsr.bst 450
asaetr.bst 451
astron.bst 452
aunsnot.bst 453
aunsrt.bst 454
authordate1.bst 455
authordate2.bst 456
authordate3.bst 457
authordate4.bst 458
bbs.bst 459
bibtoref.bst 460
birthday.bst 461
cbe.bst 463
cea.bst 464
cell.bst 466
chicago.bst 468
dtk.bst 469
econometrica.bst 470
email.bst 471
email-html.bst 473
finplain.bst 475
gerabbrv.bst 476
geralpha.bst 477
gerapali.bst 478
gerplain.bst 479
xvi Contents
gerunsrt.bst 480
humanbio.bst 481
humannat.bst 482
ieee.bst 483
ieeepes.bst 484
ieeetr.bst 485
imac.bst 486
inlinebib.bst 487
is-abbrv.bst 489
is-alpha.bst 490
is-plain.bst 491
is-unsrt.bst 492
jas99.bst 493
jbact.bst 494
jcc.bst 495
jkthesis.bst 496
jmb.bst 497
jmr.bst 499
jpc.bst 500
jphysicsB.bst 501
jtb.bst 502
jthcarsu.bst 503
jurabib.bst 504
jureco.bst 505
kluwer.bst 506
Contents xvii
letter.bst 507
mbplain.bst 509
mslapa.bst 510
named.bst 511
nar.bst 512
nature.bst 513
nederlands.bst 514
newapa.bst 515
oxford-en.bst 516
oxford-in.bst 518
oxford-se.bst 520
pccp.bst 522
phaip.bst 523
phapalik.bst 524
phcpc.bst 525
phiaea.bst 526
phjcp.bst 527
phnf.bst 528
phnflet.bst 529
phone.bst 530
phpf.bst 532
phppcf.bst 533
phreport.bst 534
phrmp.bst 535
plabbrv.bst 536
xviii Contents
plain.bst 537
plainhtml.bst 538
plainhtmldate.bst 540
plainhtmldater.bst 541
plalpha.bst 542
plplain.bst 543
plunsrt.bst 544
revcompchem.bst 545
siam.bst 546
siamproc.bst 547
smfalpha.bst 548
smfplain.bst 549
sweabbrv.bst 550
swealpha.bst 551
sweplain.bst 552
thesnumb.bst 553
unsrt.bst 554
Index 555
What’s New
A Gallery of Document Shells adds to the suite of manuals for MacKichan Software
products. Along with Typesetting Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific
Word, this online manual is a response to the many users who have requested more
information about LATEX typesetting in Scientific WorkPlace (SWP) and Scientific
Word (SW).
The manual includes information about TEX and LATEX, document classes, LATEX
packages, typesetting options, BibTEX bibliography styles, and document shells. While
a good understanding of TEX, LATEX , and BibTEX will help you better understand how
these often complex elements interact, a thorough discussion of those programs is be-
yond our scope here. If you need additional information, we suggest you refer to these
excellent sources: The TEXbook by Donald E. Knuth; LATEX, A Document Preparation
System by Leslie Lamport; The LATEX Companion by Michel Goossens, Frank Mittel-
bach, and Alexander Samarin; and A Guide to LATEX: Document Preparation for Begin-
ners and Advanced Users by Helmut Kopka and Patrick W. Daly.
Typesetting Basics
Even if you have a basic understanding of the program, it’s important to review how
typesetting works and why the appearance of your printed document is so noticeably
different when you typeset and when you don’t. You can find basic information in
more detail in the online Help and in Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace
and Scientific Word. Version 5 adds the capability to produce typeset PDF files.
If you typeset, the program uses LATEX or PDFLATEX to compile the document and
generate any specified automatic elements such as front matter items (tables of con-
tents or lists of figures and tables), cross-references, footnotes and margin notes, auto-
matically numbered equations, indexes, and bibliographies. LATEX and PDF LATEX also
provide hyphenation, kerning, ligatures, sophisticated paragraph and line breaking, and
other automatic formatting features.
If you don’t typeset, the program produces the document using many of the same
routines it uses to display the document in the document window. No document elements
are automatically generated, and the printed results are similar to what you see as you
work on the document.
Getting Help
In addition to the information available in the manuals supplied with your software,
you can get information about the program from the online Help system, the library of
reference materials about mathematics and science, and, if you have an Internet connec-
tion, the MacKichan Software website. If these resources don’t contain the information
you need, technical support is available. We also regularly make additional information
available on our unmoderated discussion forum and email list. You can find an errata
sheet for this book, as well as all other manuals published by MacKichan Software, Inc.,
at this URL:
http://www.mackichan.com/techtalk/errata.html
Online Help
Without leaving the program, you can search the online Help system to find basic and
advanced information about all available commands and operations, including those re-
lated to numeric, symbolic, and graphic computations. In particular, you can find ad-
ditional material regarding TEX, LATEX, LATEX packages, and other related topics. If
you save copies of the Help documents in SWP, you can interact with the mathematics
they contain, experimenting with or reworking the included examples. In addition, two
programs—the Style Editor and the Document Manager—have their own online Help
systems.
Additional Information
You can learn more on our website, which we update regularly to provide the latest
technical information about the program. The site also houses links to other TEX and
LATEX resources. We maintain an unmoderated discussion forum and an unmoderated
email list so our users can share information, discuss common problems, and contribute
technical tips and solutions. You can link to these valuable resources from our home
page at http://www.mackichan.com.
Using Document Shells
Every SWP and SW document is created from a template called a document shell. Each
shell carries several sets of specifications that determine its fundamental structure and
appearance. Those specifications, and the structure and appearance they define, extend
to each new document you create with a given shell.
The program includes over 150 document shells that you can use to create books,
exams, articles, reports, letters, theses, faxes, and other documents. The shells have the
extension .shl and are in the Shells directory of your program installation.
Although many are similar, no two shells are exactly alike. Each is designed with a
structure and components common to a certain kind of document, such as a book, report,
article, or thesis. From shell to shell, the structure and components differ, depending on
the purpose and anticipated content of the document and, in many cases, the typeset-
ting requirements of the publisher. Choosing a shell carefully is an important step in
developing your documents.
For much more information about working with document shells, refer to Typesetting
Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word and Creating Documents with
Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word.
Note Before Version 3.5, we held to convention, using the word style to refer to the
typesetting specifications. However, convention has changed. In newer versions of
LATEX, the document style has been renamed the document class. We now use the word
style to refer to the .cst file and not to the typesetting specifications.
When you open a new document, you select a document shell. The program opens
a new document and copies the shell into it, along with the shell’s typesetting specifi-
cations, style, page setup, and print options. Until you change it in some way, the new
document is identical to the shell. It has the same class and structure, uses the same
LATEX packages, and produces the same appearance, with and without typesetting.
These class option defaults are in effect for document shells created with arti-
cle.cls, book.cls, and report.cls, unless otherwise noted in the shell:
Class Option Defaults for Shells Created with Article.cls
Category Default Options
Body text point size 10 pt 11 pt, 12 pt
Paper size 8.5x11 a4, a5, b5, Legal size, Executive size
Orientation Portrait Landscape
Print side One side Both sides
Quality Final Draft
Title page Title area on page 1 Title page
Columns One Two
Equation numbering On right On left
Displayed equations Centered Flush left
Bibliography style Closed Open
Babel language English U.S. See package documentation.
LATEX Packages
The document class options establish a basic set of LATEX typesetting instructions. LATEX
packages—sets of additional typesetting instructions—extend typesetting instructions
by enabling some specific LATEX behavior or customizing some aspect of the document
appearance or production, such as the creation of an index, the special formatting of
footnotes, the content and design of headers and footers, the style of numbered lists,
or the generation of a list of symbols. Just as document classes have options, many
packages have options with which you can customize document behavior still further.
The options differ from package to package.
When you install the program, you automatically install those LATEX packages that
are included with the standard LATEX distribution. The packages are installed in the
base, required, and AMS subdirectories of the TCITeX\TeX\LaTeX directory.
Also, the TCITeX\TeX\LaTeX\contrib directory of your installation includes a
collection of packages that are particularly useful with SWP and SW. Most packages
have an .sty file extension. Typesetting Documents in Scientific WorkPlace and Scien-
tific Word describes the packages available with the program, and you can find links to
additional and often extensive information about the packages in the online Help system.
You can add packages to your document in addition to those packages that have been
specified for the shell. Documents created with most document shells—that is, docu-
ments in most document classes—can accept additional packages. The order in which
the packages are specified can, on occasion, affect LATEX behavior. The documentation
notes when package order is significant.
Make sure the shell you choose produces the type of document you want to create.
Don’t attempt to write a book using a letter shell or an article using a report shell. Make
sure that the shell contains the tags appropriate for your work. If you need theorem
environments, for example, choose a shell that has theorem and theorem-like item tags.
If you are unsure of your typesetting requirements, we urge you to choose the standard
LATEX shell for the type of document you need. Standard LATEX shells provide the greatest
flexibility and portability. You can achieve almost any typesetting effect by beginning
with a standard shell and adding LATEX packages as necessary.
Important We strongly recommend that you begin all new documents using one of
the standard LATEX shells, unless you have a compelling reason (such as publisher’s
instructions) to do otherwise.
In the following chapters, we provide information about the shells included with the
program. For each shell, we note the document class and any packages used by the
shell. We indicate whether the class and packages use option defaults or other settings.
We also note when no class or package options are available from within the program.
We include special information and brief instructions necessary for working with the
shell, as well as cautions where necessary. You may find additional information in the
document shell itself. Finally, we include pictures of representative pages from a typeset
document created with the shell. (Note that a given sample document may not be the
same as the document you see when you open the shell.)
We have excluded one category of documents from the manual—those created with
SNB shells. Because the SNB shells are designed for printing without typesetting, we
don’t describe them here, nor do we provide illustrations of typeset sample documents
for those shells. Documents created with SNB shells are similar in the document win-
dow and in print. Typesetting SNB documents may produce unexpected results because
LATEX or PDFLATEX may number sections and equations automatically, insert front mat-
ter, change the spacing, and otherwise attempt to change the formatting of the document.
If you want to take advantage of typesetting for your SWP or SW document, choose a
shell designed for typesetting instead of an SNB shell.
We encourage you to examine the shell samples in this manual carefully and take
note of the features they illustrate. Notice details such as the absence or presence of
headers and footers, the placement of page numbers and footnotes, the size of the mar-
gins, the appearance and placement of the headings, the extent of the front matter, the
use of single or double columns, and the use of single or double spacing.
When you find a shell that looks appropriate, open and print a new document with
the shell to see if it meets your requirements. The closer the shell fits your requirements,
the easier your typesetting tasks will be.
1. On the Standard toolbar, click the New button or, from the File menu, choose
New to open the New dialog box.
2. From the Shell Directories list in the New dialog box, choose the kind of document
you want.
3. From the Shell Files list, select the shell you want and choose OK.
Article Shells
Most article shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in the base document
class article.cls, although some customized article shells use other .cls files.
Generally, most article shells have front matter consisting of title and author information,
a date, and an abstract. Some include tables of contents. Most shells include tags for up
to five heading levels in the body of the article. Chapter headings are reserved for book
and report shells. Some but not all articles contain tags for theorem environments. The
back matter for most article shells includes appendices and bibliographies. Indices are
reserved for books and reports.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and page 4 for page
layout diagrams for the base document classes.
12 Chapter 2 Article Shells
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Dr. Author Jones R¯
At this Address 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can app ear in section heads. Note that mathematics in
section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running
headers or table of contents entries.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and O ther Theorem-like
Abstract
Environments
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article,
but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula A numb er of theorem-like environments is available. T he follow ing
(∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asym ptotic expansions
of analytic functions.
1 Sample M athematics and Text
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the
This short sample docum ent illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line representation µ ¶
and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of a1 1
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞ a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equa-
tion Pro of. Change z for 1=z. T hen Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} b e a circle with
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of
radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
H , T a nonexpansive P self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0
∞ +
for eachPk, and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C,
Z Z
(¸ − z0 ) m d¸
X1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
A nx = k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
∞ k
2 = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z) 2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z) 2
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The m=0
spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above
where for the remainder R(z) we have
or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
x2 + y 2 = z 2 ¸∈C H (z) ¸∈C H (z)
1 2
A Simple MIT Press Article 13
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy ∗ Third level bullet item.
theorem (4) implies · Fourth and final level bullet item.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by
dz the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. text of the lead-in.
2 Section Headings Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four
additional heading levels are available, as described below. 4 About the B ibliography
2.1 Subsection Heading Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This
sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows
This text app ears under a subsection heading. sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
This text app ears under a subsubsection heading. References
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John W iley
section heading.
and Sons, New York, 1963.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a sub- [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
subsubsubsection heading. in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3 Lists [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under sup ercritical
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
which can extend four levels deep, look like this: [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory
of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
1. Numbered list item 1. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular ther-
modynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
2. Numbered list item 2.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop erties of
Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, M cGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from
the screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses
A An App endix
parentheses around the level indicator. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. than integral to the main text , many styles use a different numb ering
system for equations that appear in the appendices.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
√
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. − b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
• Bullet item 1.
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how
• Bullet item 2. equations are numbered in the appendix.
— Second level bullet item.
3 4
14 Chapter 2 Article Shells
AASTeX Journal
—2—
Not to appear in Nonlearned J., 45. 1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
The Title of an Article The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
1;2;3 1
S. Djorgovski and Ivan R. King ai (1)
i=1
Astronomy Department, University of California, Berkeley, CA 94720
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
C. D. Biemesderfer 4;5
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non-
National Optical Astronomy Observatories, Tucson, AZ 85719 expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P∞ + P∞ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to
aastex-help@aas.org
a fixed point of T (1).
and
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and
R. J. Hanisch5 below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
the following examples.
Space Telescope Science Institute, Baltimore, MD 21218
A short line above:
ABSTRACT x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not
A long line above may depend on your margins
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇×F )·k = z +1 in this abstract.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
Subject headings: globular clusters: general – globular clusters: individual(NGC
6397, NGC 6624, NGC 7078, Terzan 8) as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins.
1
Visiting Astronomer, Cerro Tololo Inter-American Observatory. CTIO is operated by AURA, Inc. under
contract to the National Science Foundation. 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
2 Society of Fellows, Harvard University.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
3
present address: Center for Astrophysics, 60 Garden Street, Cambridge, MA 02138 known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
4
Visiting Programmer, Space Telescope Science Institute
5 1 A
Patron, Alonso’s Bar and Grill LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
AASTeX Journal 15
—3— —4—
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1 This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It 3. Lists
follows from (3) that
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X extend four levels deep, look like this:
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
1. Numbered list item 1.
where for the remainder R(z) we have
2. Numbered list item 2.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
|z| + r 1 + sin " The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
2. Section Headings
— Second level bullet item.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional ∗ Third level bullet item.
heading levels are available, as described below. · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
2.1. Subsection Heading the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
This text appears under a subsection heading. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
—5—
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
phy has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as (4), (5)
and (6). You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: (2; 3; 4).
REFERENCES
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in
the appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
numbered in the appendix.
This preprint was prepared with the AAS LATEX macros v5.2.
16 Chapter 2 Article Shells
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) • k = z + 1 in this abstract.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a
Key Words: keywords: text should be lower case except as necessary for well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
meaning. Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function i n C + . If f (z) admits the repre-
Insert header for classifications: Use only if your journal has a subject classi- sentation µ ¶
fication requirement a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
bibliography and an appendix.
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Z X
1 Z m
∞
X 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
ai (1) 2 = am 2 + R (z), (4)
i=1
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. where for the remainder R(z) we have
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r− 1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
P∞ P∞ ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z)
+ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k= 0 a n;k T x |z| + r 1 + sin "
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 3 The spacing
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
or long, as shown in the following examples. implies
1
First author thanks. d
2
Example of two authors at the same location. f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
3L
AT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
E
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
1 2
Academic Press Journals 17
Use the Section tag f or ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
tional heading levels are available, as described below. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
2.1. Subsection Heading is an example: [2, 3, 4].
This text appears under a subsection heading. APPENDIX A: TITLE OF THE APPENDIX
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading The appendix should not contain material that is essential to the main text, but
rather it should contain text that is helpful to a reader seeking further clarification.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
It can also contain explanations and elaborations that are too long for footnotes.
The appendix or appendices should not be a depository for odds and ends that the
Subsubsubsection Headi ng This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
author was unable to work into the body of his text.
ing.
Equations are sometimes numbered differently in an appendix, but his may not
always be true. √
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub- −b ± b2 − 4ac
section heading. (5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to see how equations are num-
3. LISTS bered in the appendix.
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
can extend four levels deep, look like this: REFERENCES
1. Numbered list item 1. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
2. Numbered list item 2.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen 3537-3550
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
level indicator.
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item. and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
• Bullet item 1. for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
• Bullet item 2. [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
3 4
18 Chapter 2 Article Shells
where for the remainder R(z) we have · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in
The Title of an Article |R(z)| ≤ r− 1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z) followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
|z| + r 1 + sin " enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Dr. Author Jones∗, Dr. Author Second† and Dr. Author Third∗ = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
r sin "
∗ Uni versity A, Department A, Remainder of Address , † University B, Department B, Remainder of Address
E-mail: firstauthor@univa.edu, secondauthor@univb.edu, thirdauthor@univa.edu Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the 4. ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY
Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Following the text of this article is a short manual bib-
Version: Today’s date
d liography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics ar- as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus- dz to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
as (4), (5) and (6). You can also have multiple citations
ticle, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
appear together. Here is an example: (2, 3, 4).
formula (∇ × F ) • k = z + 1 in this abstract. the margins.
2. SECTION HEADINGS APPENDIX A: TITLE OF THE APPENDIX
Key Words: keywords: text should be lower case ex- R¯
cept as necessary for meaning. 1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Use the Section tag for maj or sections, such as the one
Insert header for classifications: Use only if your jour- The appendix should not contain material that is es-
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that just above. Four additional heading levels are available, as
sential to the main text, but rather it should contain text
nal has a subject classification requirement mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in described below.
that is helpful to a reader seeking further clarification. It
typesetting styles with running headers or table of con- can also contain explanations and elaborations that are too
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT tents entries. 2.1. Subsection Heading long for fo otnotes. The appendix or appendices should not
This text appears under a subsection heading. be a depository for odds and ends that the author was un-
This short sample document illustrates the typeset ap-
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other able to work into the body of his text.
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu-
Theorem-like Environments 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading Equations are sometimes numbered differently in an
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and
appendix, but his may not always be true.
three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries A number of theorem-like environments is available. This text appears under a subsubsection heading. √
for a manual bibliography and an appendix. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentia- −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
tion of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a 2a
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics subsubsubsection heading. The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to see
P∞ Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If
i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while
The expression how equations are numbered in the appendix.
f (z) admits the representation
the numbered equation Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears
µ ¶ under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
∞
X a1 1 REFERENCES
ai (1) f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
i=1 3. LISTS (1) N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then (2) Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop
available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. like this: behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) sures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-
P∞ + 1. Numbered list item 1.
°n = P k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, 2. Numbered list item 2. 3550
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" =
A n x = k=0 a n;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of
∞
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and (a) A numbered list item under a list item. (3) Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under
T (1). The typeset appearance for this level is often supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical dis-
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3) different from the screen appearance. The type- in print
plays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends set appearance often uses parentheses around
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a the level indicator. (4) Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molec-
shown in the following examples. circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that (b) Another numbered list item under a list item. ular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
A short line above: i. Third level numbered list item under a list Sons, Inc., 1964
Z
x2 + y 2 = z2 1 f (¸) d¸ item. (5) Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo,
= A. Fourth and final level of numbered list
2¼ i C H(z) (¸ − z)
2
E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilib-
and a short line below. items allowed.
Z rium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
A long line above may depend on your margins 1 • Bullet item 1.
am 2
+ R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z) • Bullet item 2. (6) Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E.,
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 m=0
— Second level bullet item. The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition,
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. ∗ Third level bullet item. McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
1 2
Academic Press Journals - Modified 19
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
The Title of an Article Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
Dr. Author Jones∗, Dr. Author Second† and Dr. Author Third∗ contents entries.
∗ University A, Department A, Remainder of Address , † University B,
Department B, Remainder of Address 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
E-mail: firstauthor@univa.edu, secondauthor@univb.edu, thirdauthor@univa.edu
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Version: Today’s date
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function i n C + . If f (z) admits the repre-
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain sentation µ ¶
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) • k = z + 1 in this abstract.
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Key Words: keywords: text should be lower case except as necessary for for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
meaning.
Insert header for classifications: Use only if your journal has a subject classi- a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
fication requirement
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
bibliography and an appendix. Z Z
(¸ − z0 ) m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2
= am 2
+ R (z), (4)
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)
P
The expression ∞ i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation where for the remainder R(z) we have
∞
X
ai (1) |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r− 1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z)
i=1
|z| + r 1 + sin "
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k= 0 a n;k T x
implies
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
d
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short dz
or long, as shown in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2 2. SECTION HEADINGS
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins Use the Section tag f or ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
tional heading levels are available, as described below.
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2.1. Subsection Heading
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. This text appears under a subsection heading.
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to see how equations are num-
bered in the appendix.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
REFERENCES
Subsubsubsection Headi ng This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
ing. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub-
section heading. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3. LISTS 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
can extend four levels deep, look like this:
1. Numbered list item 1. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
2. Numbered list item 2. and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
level indicator.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
is an example: [2, 3, 4].
The appendix should not contain material that is essential to the main text, but
rather it should contain text that is helpful to a reader seeking further clarification.
It can also contain explanations and elaborations that are too long for footnotes.
The appendix or appendices should not be a depository for odds and ends that the
author was unable to work into the body of his text.
Equations are sometimes numbered differently in an appendix, but his may not
always be true. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
3 4
20 Chapter 2 Article Shells
The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
converges weakly to a fixed point of T .1 |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
short or long, as shown in the following examples. r sin "
A short line above: Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
x2 + y 2 = z 2 implies
and a short line below.
d
1L
AT f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
1 2
American Chemical Society 21
3 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
can extend four levels deep, look like this:
1. Numbered list item 1.
2. Numbered list item 2.
3 4
References
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equa-
tions are numbered in the appendix.
5
22 Chapter 2 Article Shells
2 DR. AUTHOR JO NE S
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. M athematics can appear in sec-
tion heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type-
setting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A num-
DR. AUTHOR JONES ber of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Dedicated to the memory of S. Bach.
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but
we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
in this abstract.The Full z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
(1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
1. Sample Mathematics and Text
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- (1.3) f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
bibliography and an appendix. r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
P∞ Z Z
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i= 1 a i is in-line (¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
mathematics, while the numbered equation (1.4) = am + R(z),
2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)2 m= 0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
∞
X
(1.1) ai where for the remainder R (z) we have
i=1
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a |z| + r 1 + sin "
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
P∞ P∞ r sin "
°n = k
k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T x
+
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above implies
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
as shown in the following examples. d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
A short line above: dz
x2 + y 2 = z2 that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ¤
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins 2. Section Headings
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
tional heading levels are available, as described below.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
1991 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 05C38, 15A15; Secondary 05A15, 15A18.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Key words and phrases. Keyword one, keyword two, keyword three.
Thanks to Mother. Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication anywhere. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. ing.
E
1
AMS Journal Article 25
3. Lists over afterwards, it occurred to her that she ought to have wondered
at this, but at the time it all seemed quite natural); but when
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
the Rabbit actually took a watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and
can extend four levels deep, look like this:
looked at it, and then hurried on, Alice started to her feet, for it
(1) Numbered list item 1. flashed across her mind that she had never before seen a rabbit with
(2) Numbered list item 2. either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and burning
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. with curiosity, she ran across the field after it, and fortunately was
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen just in time to see it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge.
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around In another moment down went Alice after it, never once consid-
the level indicator. ering how in the world she was to get out again.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. 5. About the Bibliography
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
• Bullet item 1. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
• Bullet item 2. such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
— Second level bullet item. is an example: [2, 3, 4].
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item. References
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
lead-in.
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
4. Tags Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Small Caps, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, Appendix A. An Appendix
CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge . √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations of more than one paragraph. (A.1)
Following is the beginning of Alice’s Adventures in W onderland by Lewis Carroll: 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
Alice was beginning to get very tired of sitting by her sister on the
are numbered in the appendix.
bank, and of having nothing to do: once or twice she had peeped
into the book her sister was reading, but it had no pictures or At this Address
conversations in it, ’and what is the use of a book,’ thought Alice E-mail address: ajones@oneuniv.edu
URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
’without pictures or conversation?’
So she was considering in her own mind (as well as she could,
for the hot day made her feel very sleepy and stupid), whether the
pleasure of making a daisy-chain would be worth the trouble of
getting up and picking the daisies, when suddenly a White Rabbit
with pink eyes ran close by her.
There was nothing so very remarkable in that; nor did Alice
think it so very much out of the way to hear the Rabbit say to
itself, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when she thought it
26 Chapter 2 Article Shells
2 DR. AUTHOR JO NE S
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in
section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A
The Title of an Article number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Dr. Author Jones
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre-
sentation µ ¶
Dedicated to the memory of S. Bach. a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1
in this abstract. (1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
(1.3) f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
1. Sample Mathematics and Text
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
(1.4) = am + R(z),
bibliography and an appendix. 2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)2 m= 0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
P∞
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i=1 a i is in- where for the remainder R (z) we have
line mathematics, while the numbered equation
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
X∞ ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
(1.1) ai |z| + r 1 + sin "
i=1 = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
implies
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T x d
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ¤
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short
or long, as shown in the following examples. 2. Section Headings
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
tional heading levels are available, as described below.
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
2
sin µ + cos µ = 1
2 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
ing.
1991 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 05C38, 15A15; Secondary 05A15, 15A18. Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
Key words and phrases. Keyword one, keyword two, keyword three.
Thanks to Mother.
ing.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication anywhere. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
E ing.
1
AMS Proceedings Article 27
3. Lists over afterwards, it occurred to her that she ought to have wondered
at this, but at the time it all seemed quite natural); but when
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
the Rabbit actually took a watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and
can extend four levels deep, look like this:
looked at it, and then hurried on, Alice started to her feet, for it
(1) Numbered list item 1. flashed across her mind that she had never before seen a rabbit with
(2) Numbered list item 2. either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and burning
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. with curiosity, she ran across the field after it, and fortunately was
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen just in time to see it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge.
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around In another moment down went Alice after it, never once con-
the level indicator. sidering how in the world she was to get out again.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. 5. About the Bibliography
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
• Bullet item 1. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
• Bullet item 2. such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
— Second level bullet item. is an example: [2, 3, 4].
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item. References
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
lead-in.
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
4. Tags Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Small Caps, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, Appendix A. An Appendix
CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge . √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations of more than one paragraph. (A.1)
Following is the beginning of Alice’s Adventures in W onderland by Lewis Carroll: 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
Alice was beginning to get very tired of sitting by her sister on the
are numbered in the appendix.
bank, and of having nothing to do: once or twice she had peeped
into the book her sister was reading, but it had no pictures or At this Address
conversations in it, ’and what is the use of a book,’ thought Alice E-mail address: ajones@nowhere.edu
URL: http://www.nowhere.edu
’without pictures or conversation?’
So she was considering in her own mind (as well as she could,
for the hot day made her feel very sleepy and stupid), whether the
pleasure of making a daisy-chain would be worth the trouble of
getting up and picking the daisies, when suddenly a White Rabbit
with pink eyes ran close by her.
There was nothing so very remarkable in that; nor did Alice
think it so very much out of the way to hear the Rabbit say to
itself, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when she thought it
28 Chapter 2 Article Shells
An Astronomy-Astrophysics Journal
Dr. Author Jones Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
At this Address below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
x2 + y2 = z 2
Abstract
and a short line below.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain
A long line above may depend on your margins
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
1 2
An Astronomy-Astrophysics Journal 29
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
ing.
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
3 4
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography
has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as (4), (5) and
(6). You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: (2, 3, 4).
REFERENCES
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the
main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are
5
30 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Annals of Statistics-Draft
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and
an appendix.
P∞
(Running Title: A Simple Article) The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
X
∞
by ai (1)
i=1
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. as shown in the following examples.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
and a short line below.
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three
A long line above may depend on your margins
Key Words and Phrases: Key, Words
AMS 1991 Subject Classifications. Primary: 123; Secondary: 456.
* sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
Supported by NSF grant # 123456
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
Annals of Statistics-Draft 31
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math- Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
ematical displays, regardless of the margins. |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
Z 1
X Z m
R¯ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ln tdt 2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
® 2¼i Cr (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i Cr (z) (¸ − z)
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads where for the remainder R(z) we have
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈Cr (z) ¸∈Cr (z)
entries.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
heading levels are available, as described below.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
2.1 Subsection Heading
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
This text appears under a subsection heading.
3 4
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, CALLIGRAPHIC, drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied 3537-3550
5 About the Bibliography Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such A An Appendix
as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
example: [2, 3, 4].
to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that
7 8
32 Chapter 2 Article Shells
ASAE Transactions
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2, and hence by the A. Fourth and final level of numbered list
Cauchy theorem (4) implies items allowed.
T
his short sample document illustrates the typeset ap-
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in doc-
uments. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
Mathematics in section heads
M
®
athematics can appear in section heads. Note that
mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties
in typesetting styles with running headers or table U
se the Section tag for major sections, such as the
one just above. Four additional heading levels are
available, as described below.
Y You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Ital-
ics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
Typewriter.
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags
of contents entries.
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. BLACKBOARD BOLD, CALLI GRAP HI C, and fraktur.
Subsection Heading Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other This text appears under a subsection heading. when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
In-line and Displayed Mathematics Theorem-like Environments
P∞ You can apply the size tags tiny, scr ipt size, footnotesize, small,
i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while
T
he expression number of theorem-like environments is available. Subsubsection Heading
LARGE , huge and
the numbered equation
X∞
ai
i=1
(1)
A
tions.
The following lemma is a well-known fact on differ-
entiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Subsubsubsection Heading.
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
normalsize,
Huge .
large, Large,
A short line above: I did not have sexual relations with that woman,
f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3) Miss Lewinsky. Bill Clinton
2. Numbered list item 2.
x2 + y2 = z2 Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r} be a They misunderestimated me. George W. Bush
and a short line below. circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
Z X Z
(¸ − z 0)m d¸
1
∗ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 The typeset appearance for this level is often differ- The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations of more
Written for presentation as the 1992 International Winter- = am +R(z ), than one paragraph. Following is the beginning of Alice’s
Meeting of ASAE. 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 ent from the screen appearance. The typeset ap-
m=0
† Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll:
Anomous employee of MacKichan Software, Inc. (4) pearance often uses parentheses around the level
‡ USDA Fellow, Department of Agricultural Engineering, Pur-
where for the remainder R(z) we have indicator.
due University. Formerly, Graduate Assistant—Research, De- Alice was beginning to get very tired of sitting
partment of Agricultural Engineering, Texas A&M University. |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
by her sister on the bank, and of having nothing
(unknown@tamu.edu). ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
1A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the sur- |z| + r 1 + sin " i. Third level numbered list item under a list to do: once or twice she had peeped into the book
rounding line lengths. = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z |) . item. her sister was reading, but it had no pictures or
r sin "
1 2
ASAE Transactions 33
conversations in it, ’and what is the use of a book,’ Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop be-
thought Alice ’without pictures or conversation?’ havior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”,
So she was considering in her own mind (as well Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
as she could, for the hot day made her feel very Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under su-
sleepy and stupid), whether the pleasure of making percritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in
a daisy-chain would be worth the trouble of getting print
up and picking the daisies, when suddenly a White
Rabbit with pink eyes ran close by her. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular
Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
There was nothing so very remarkable in that;
1964
nor did Alice think it so very much out of the way to
hear the Rabbit say to itself, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I Lamport, L.,LaTeX: A Document Preparation System,
shall be late!’ (when she thought it over afterwards, Addison—Wesley Pub. Co., 1986
it occurred to her that she ought to have wondered Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecu-
at this, but at the time it all seemed quite natural); lar thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
but when the Rabbit actually took a watch out of its -Hall, Inc., 1986
waistcoat-pocket, and looked at it, and then hurried
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop-
on, Alice started to her feet, for it flashed across her
erties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw- Hill
mind that she had never before seen a rabbit with
Book Company, 1987
either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of
it, and burning with curiosity, she ran across the
field after it, and fortunately was just in time to see An Appendix
it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge. Because appendices may contain material that is supplemen-
In another moment down went Alice after it, tary rather than integral to the main text , many styles use a
never once considering how in the world she was different numbering system for equations that appear in the
to get out again. appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
About the Bibliography The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to
ollowing the text of this article is a short manual bib- demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
References
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Funct ional Analysis, v. 2, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
3
34 Chapter 2 Article Shells
ASME Meeting
1 Jones 2 Jones
ASME Meeting 35
· Fourth and final level bullet item. Because appendices may contain material that is
supplementary rather than integral to the main text ,
many styles use a different numbering system for equa-
Description List Each description list item has a
tions that appear in the appendices.
lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
√
lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the −b ± b2 − 4ac
lead-in. (5)
2a
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal leg- The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to
ends. demonstrate how equations are numbered in the ap-
pendix.
References
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis,
v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
3 Jones
36 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Astronomy & Astrophysics manuscript no. swp0007 July 22, 2004 2 Running author, or delete: Running title, or delete
(DOI: will be inserted by hand later)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and The typeset appearance for this level is often dif-
ferent from the screen appearance. The typeset ap-
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) pearance often uses parentheses around the level
indicator.
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
The Title of an Article i. Third level numbered list item under a list
Z item.
1 f (¸) d¸
Article subtitle 2 = A. Fourth and final level of numbered list
2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z) items allowed.
1
X Z m
Dr. Author Jones1 and Ann Other2; ? 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
am 2 + R(z), (4) — Bullet item 1.
m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) — Bullet item 2.
1
Institute for Astronomy (IfA), University of Vienna, Türkenschanzstrasse 17, A-1180 Vienna — Second level bullet item.
e-mail: wuchterl@amok.ast.univie.ac.at
where for the remainder R(z) we have
2
• Third level bullet item.
University of Alexandria, Department of Geography, ...
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) · Fourth and final level bullet item.
e-mail: c.ptolemy@hipparch.uheaven.space ?? ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " Description List Each description list item has a lead-in
Received September 15, 1996; accepted March 16, 1997 = · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z|) . followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
r sin "
enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Key words. giant planet formation — · -mechanism — stability of gas spheres 4. About the Bibliography
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , Following the text of this article is a short manual bibli-
dz ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to
1. Sample Mathematics and Text A short line above:
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as
2 2 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset ap- x +y =z 4, 5 and 6. You can also have multiple citations appear
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu- and a short line below. together. Here is an example: 2, 3, 4.
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and 2. Section Headings
A long line above may depend on your margins
three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one References
sin µ + cos2 µ = 1
2
for a manual bibliography and an appendix. just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illus- N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John
as described below. Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
trate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics the margins.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behav-
P∞ ior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the 2.1. Subsection Heading
Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
numbered equation R¯ Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under super-
∞
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J This text appears under a subsection heading.
X critical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
ai (1) Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that math- Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Mol ecular
i=1 ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type- 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
setting styles with running headers or table of contents 1964
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. This text appears under a subsubsection heading. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded entries.
thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. Hall, Inc., 1986
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a sub-
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties
P∞ + subsubsection heading.
of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
°n = P k=0 (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Environments (Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection
∞ k Company, 1987
An x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point Heading
of T 1. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The
following lem ma is a well-known fact on differentiation of This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical ing. Appendix A: An Appendix
displays.1 The spacing above and below a display depends asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If mentary rather than integral to the main text , many
shown in the following examples. f (z) admits the representation 3. Lists
µ ¶ styles use a different numbering system for equations that
a1 1 Bullet, numbered and description list environments are appear in the appendices.
Send offprint requests to: G. Wuchterl f (z) = a0 + +o , √
?
Just to show the usage of the elements in the author field z z available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
−b ± b2 − 4ac
?? like this: (A.1)
The university of heaven temporarily does not accept e- for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = 2a
mails {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the 1. Numbered list item 1. The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to
surrounding line lengths. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) 2. Numbered list item 2. demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
Balkema 37
Balkema
The Title of an Article Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} 2. Numbered list item 2.
be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows
Dr. Author Jones from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
At this Address
The typeset appearance for this level is
Z often different from the screen appear-
1 f (¸) d¸
2 = ance. The typeset appearance often uses
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) parentheses around the level indicator.
Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
X 1
1 (b) Another numbered list item under a list
am + R(z), (4) item.
m=0
2¼i CH(z ) (¸ − z)2
i. Third level numbered list item un-
where for the remainder R(z) we have der a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of num-
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) bered list items allowed.
¸∈CH (z )
1 2
38 Chapter 2 Article Shells
I did not have sexual relations with that 4 About the Bibliography
woman, Miss Lewinsky. Bill Clinton
They misunderestimated me. George Following the text of this article is a short man-
W. Bush ual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no
relationship to the previous text, but it shows sam-
ple citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also
The Long Quotation tag is used for quotations
of more than one paragraph. Following is the be- have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
example: [2, 3, 4].
ginning of Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland by
Lewis Carroll:
REFERENCES
Alice was beginning to get very tired
of sitting by her sister on the bank, and N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis,
of having nothing to do: once or twice v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
she had peeped into the book her sis- Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxy-
ter was reading, but it had no pictures gen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
or conversations in it, ‘and what is the chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
use of a book,’ thought Alice ‘without 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
pictures or conversation?’ Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number un-
So she was considering in her own der supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass
mind (as well as she could, for the hot Transfer, in print
day made her feel very sleepy and stupid), Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B.,
whether the pleasure of making a daisy- Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
chain would be worth the trouble of get- Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
ting up and picking the daisies, when Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E.,
suddenly a White Rabbit with pink eyes Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equi-
ran close by her. librium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
There was nothing so very remark- Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E.,
able in that; nor did Alice think it so The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edi-
very much out of the way to hear the tion, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Rabbit say to itself, ‘Oh dear! Oh dear!
I shall be late!’ (when she thought it
over afterwards, it occurred to her that A An Appendix
she ought to have wondered at this, but
at the time it all seemed quite natural); Because appendices may contain material that is
but when the Rabbit actually took a supplementary rather than integral to the main
watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and text , many styles use a different numbering sys-
looked at it, and then hurried on, Alice tem for equations that appear in the appendices.
started to her feet, for it flashed across √
her mind that she had never before seen −b ± b2 − 4ac
a rabbit with either a waistcoat-pocket, (5)
2a
or a watch to take out of it, and burn-
ing with curiosity, she ran across the The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used
field after it, and fortunately was just in to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the
time to see it pop down a large rabbit- appendix.
hole under the hedge.
In another moment down went Alice
after it, never once considering how in
the world she was to get out again.
3
DECUS Proceedings 39
DECUS Proceedings
1 2
40 Chapter 2 Article Shells
she had never before seen a rabbit with either a About the Bibliography
waistcoat-pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and
burning with curiosity, she ran across the field af- Following the text of this article is a short manual bib-
ter it, and fortunately was just in time to see it liography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
pop down a large rabbit-hole under the hedge. to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
In another moment down went Alice after it, as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
never once considering how in the world she was appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
to get out again.
References
Use the Verbatim tag when you want LaTEX to pre-
serve spacing, perhaps when including a fragment from a [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v.
program such as: 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
#include <iostream> [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop
void main(void behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
{ sures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-
cout << "Hello World."; 3550
}
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under
supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
Excerpt From Original DECUS Do cumentation
in print
The DECUS Proceedings, like the conference proceedings [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molec-
of many other organizations, is rushed to publication as ular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
quickly as possible so that the material will reach the con- Sons, Inc., 1964
ference participants and other interested readers before its
value is diminished by time. Reproducing author-prepared [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E.,
copy eliminates the considerable bother and expense of Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
typesetting, proofreading and corrections. The published Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
document should be compact, uniform in appearance, and
readable, regardless of the kind or quality of printing de- [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The
vice available to the author. For these reasons, instruc- Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-
tions to authors have heretofore assumed that nothing Hill Book Company, 1987
more elaborate is available than an ordinary typewriter
or dot matrix printer. An Appendix
To enforce uniformity, the author is provided with
“model paper”, on which are printed (in non-reproducing Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
ink) column and page borders, alignment marks, and in- mentary rather than integral to the main text , many styles
structions for placement of title, author, and the other use a different numbering system for equations that appear
parts of a proceedings article. The dimensions of the model in the appendices.
paper are almost always larger than those of the published √
Proceedings – this permits more text to be packed onto −b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(5)
each page, and also improves its appearance or “quality” 2a
when photographically reduced, smoothing out the rough The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to
edges of letters and symbols generated by a typewriter, demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
dot-matrix printer or other “low-resolution” device.
Within the past few years, advances in laser-printer
technology have made good-quality output accessible to a
growing number of users, through a widening selection of
low-cost output systems based on print engines with 300
dot-per-inch resolution and (relatively) easy-to-use inter-
faces. Such devices have been attached to most kinds of
DEC computers, and drivers now exist to print the out-
put from such programs as Scribe, TEX and Troff. Most
low-end laser printers cannot use paper wider than 8 1=200 ,
however, so even if both a good composition program and
output printer had been available, until now an author
would have been discouraged from using them for mechan-
ical reasons.
3
Elbert Walker’s Article 41
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
The Title of an Article
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math-
Dr. Author Jones ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
At this Address R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J
The Date
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
Abstract entries.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do
not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ-
abstract. ments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
1 Sample Mathematics and Text known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three µ ¶
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
an appendix. z z
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) • Bullet item 1.
implies
• Bullet item 2.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , — Second level bullet item.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
2 Section Headings Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
heading levels are available, as described below. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
3 4
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that
appear in the appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations
are numbered in the appendix.
5
Elsevier CRC One-column 43
1 2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
The Title of an Article
displays, regardless of the margins.
Dr. Author Jonesa ∗ , R. de Maasa† , X.-Y. Wangb and A. Sheffielda‡ R
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®¯ ln tdt
a
Mathematics and Computer Science Division, Elsevier Science Publishers B.V., Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
P.O. Box 103, 1000 AC Amsterdam, The Netherlands cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
b 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
Economics Department, University of Winchester,
2 Finch Road, Winchester, Hampshire P3L T19, United Kingdom A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
1. Sample Mathematics and Text a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an
appendix. a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
1.1. In-line and P
Displayed Mathematics Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
The expression ∞ i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
ai (1)
i=1 Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
It follows from (3) that
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non- Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
expansive
P∞ P∞→ 0 fork each k, and ° n = 2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
+
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A nx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.4 The spacing above and where for the remainder R(z) we have
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
in the following examples. ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
A short line above: |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
x2 + y2 = z2 r sin "
∗
Footnotes should appear on the first page only to indicate your present address (if different from your Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
normal address), research grant, sponsoring agency, etc. These are obtained with the \thanks command.
†
For following authors with the same address use the \addressmark command.
‡To reuse an addressmark later on, label the address with an optional argument to the \address d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
command, e.g. \address[MCSD], and repeat the label as the optional argument to the \addressmark dz
command, e.g. \addressmark[MCSD].
4 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
44 Chapter 2 Article Shells
3 4
2. Numbered list item 2. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. in the appendices.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap- √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level (5)
2a
indicator.
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
numbered in the appendix.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
1
2
REFERENCES
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional
Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid
oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis num-
ber under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R.
B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de
Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc.,
1986
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B.
E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that
is supplementary rather than integral to the main
text , many styles use a different numbering sys-
tem for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is
used to demonstrate how equations are numbered
in the appendix.
Elsevier IFAC Proceedings 47
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like 2.1.1. Subsu bsection Heading This text appears
Environments under a subsubsection heading.
Elsevier Preprint
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain R¯
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
Key words: Elsevier LaTeX sample document Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
of contents entries.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic
manual bibliography and an appendix. functions.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. PROOF. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a f (1=z) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3)
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P + P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T x
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. lengths.
where for the remainder R(z) we have (1) Numbered list item 1.
(2) Numbered list item 2.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r−1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . around the level indicator.
r sin "
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
(4) implies (A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
d • Bullet item 2.
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz · Second level bullet item.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. Third level bullet item.
Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
2 Section Headings
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
tional heading levels are available, as described below.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
This text appears under a subsection heading.
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2—4].
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
3 4
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
5
Geophysics Journal 51
Geophysics Journal
abstract.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math-
R¯
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and dis- Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
and an appendix.
entries.
1 2
52 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation Subsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , This text appears under a subsection heading.
z z
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2) This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = tion heading.
where for the remainder R(z) we have extend four levels deep, look like this:
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) 1. Numbered list item 1.
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " 2. Numbered list item 2.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
implies The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, level indicator.
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
3 4
• Bullet item 2. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
— Second level bullet item.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
∗ Third level bullet item.
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
AN APPENDIX
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in. Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than inte-
gral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
that appear in the appendices.
ABOUT THE BIBLIOGRAPHY √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
are numbered in the appendix.
such as (4), (5) and (6). You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
is an example: (2; 3; 4).
REFERENCES
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5 6
Harold O. Fried’s Article 53
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed math-
Abstract
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain ematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
x2 + y 2 = z 2
1
54 Chapter 2 Article Shells
A long line above may depend on your margins where for the remainder R(z) we have
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
displays, regardless of the margins.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
d
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
follows from (3) that Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
Z 1
X Z m ing.
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2 3
References Appendix A
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
A An Appendix
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550 Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, appendices.
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964 √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid- (1)
2a
phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, The quadratic equation shown as equation 1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
numbered in the appendix.
6 7
IEEE Transactions for Conferences 55
1 2
IEICE Transactions
IEICE TRANS. COMMUN., VOL.E83 —B, NO.4 JANUARY 19 99 IEICE T RANS. COMMUN., VOL.E83—B, NO.4 JANUARY 1999
1 2
PAPER Special Issue on LATEX 2 Class File of IEICE Transactions where for the remainder R (z) we have A. Fourth and final level of numbered
The Title of an Article∗∗ |R(z)| ≤ r− 1 max o (|z|)
list items allowed.
¸∈C H (z) • Bullet item 1.
= r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r ) • Bullet item 2.
¸∈C H (z)
— Second level bullet item.
|z| + r
First NAME† , = · O (|z| + r)
Second NAME††, Members, r ∗ Third level bullet item.
1 + sin "
Third NAME† , = · O (|z|) . · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Fourth NAME†††∗ , Nonmembers, sin "
Fifth NAME† , Student Membe r, and Sixth NAME† , Associate Membe r Description List Each description list item has a
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-
the Cauchy theorem (4) implies in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal leg-
SUMMARY A summary of this article. A long line above may depend on your margins
key words: LATEX 2 class file d ends.
sin2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
1. Sample Mathematics and Text 4. About the Bibliography
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to that im plies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regard-
This short sample document illustrates the typeset ap- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibli-
less of the margins. 2. Section Headings
pearance of in-line and displayed mathem atics in docu- ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings R¯ to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. just above. Four additional heading levels are available, appear together. Here is an example: [2]—[4].
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that as described below.
mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics References
typesetting styles with running headers or table of con- 2.1 Subsection Heading
P ∞ tents entries. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
the numbered equation This text appears under a subsection heading.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop be-
∞ Environments havior in flui d hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int.
X 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
ai (1)
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under super-
i=1 A number of theorem-like environments is available.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. critical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
The following lemma is a well-known fact on differenti- [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. ation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. (1) Subsubsubsection Heading Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded 1964
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C. Lemma 1: Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molec-
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and If f (z) admits the representation ular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
P∞ + µ ¶ ((1).1) Subsubsubsubsection Heading -Hall, Inc., 1986
° n = k= 0P (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in a1 1
C, A n x =
∞ k f (z) = a0 + +o [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop-
k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed
, This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
z z erties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
point of T [1]. ing. Company, 1987
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathemati- for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
cal displays.∗∗∗ The spacing above and below a display {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 3. Lists
depends on whether the lines above or below are short Appendix A: An Appendix
or long, as shown in the following examples. a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
A short line above: Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look Because appendices may contain material that is sup-
{z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and like this: plementary rather than integral to the main text , m any
x2 + y 2 = z 2 styles use a different numbering system for equations
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) 1. Numbered list item 1. that appear in the appendices.
and a short line below. 2. Numbered list item 2. √
Manuscript received November 25, 1999. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be −b ± b2 − 4ac
a. A numbered list item under a list item. (A· 1)
Manuscript revised April 28, 2000. a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) 2a
† The typeset appearance for this level is of-
The authors are with the Faculty ... that
†† ten different from the screen appearance. The The quadratic equation shown as equation A· 1 is used
The author is with the Faculty ... Z
†††
The author is with the Faculty ... 1 f (¸) d¸ typeset appearance often uses parentheses to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the ap-
∗ = around the level indicator.
Presently, author is with ???. 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 pendix.
∗∗ b. Another numbered list item under a list item.
This document was created using Scientific Word/Scientific Z
X1 m
WorkPlace by MacKichan Software, Inc. 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
∗∗∗ A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on am + R(z), (4) i. Third level numbered list item under a
m=0
2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z)2
the surrounding line lengths. list item.
58 Chapter 2 Article Shells
1 3
International Journal of Forecasting - Draft 59
1 Sam ple Mathem atics and Text Pro of. C hange z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and
This short sample document illustrates the types et appearance of in-line and displayed f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (3)
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius r =
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and
|z| s in " =2. It follows from (3) that
an appendix.
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z ), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z ) m=0
2¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z)
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathem atics
where for the remainder R(z) we have
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H (z) ¸ ∈CH (z )
ai (1)
i=1 |z| + r 1 + s in "
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the C auchy theorem (4)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
implies
nonexpans ive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞
a n;kT k x con-
+
°n = k=0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" =2 ,
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. dz
and below a display depends on whether the lines ab ove or below are s hort or long,
2 Section Headings
as show n in the following examples.
A short line ab ove: Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
4 6
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. Refere nces
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed. New York , 1963.
• Bullet item 1. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxy gen drop behav ior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat M ass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
• Bullet item 2.
3537-3550
— Second level bullet item.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
∗ Third level bullet item.
Int. J. Heat M ass Transfer, in print
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F . and Bird, R. B., Molecular T heory of Gases
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
P rausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E ., Molecular thermodynamics
Bunyip M ythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. for fluid-phase equilibrium, P rentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
4 Ab out the Bibliogr aphy Reid, R . C., P rausnitz, J. M. and P olling, B. E ., The Properties of Gases and
ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such A A n App endix
as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
example: [2, 3, 4].
to the main text , many sty les use a different numbering system for equations that
8 9
60 Chapter 2 Article Shells
∗L
AT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the sur-
rounding line lengths.
1 2
Japanese Journal of Applied Physics 61
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one
just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as described below.
3. Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments
are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
look like this:
(1) Numbered list item 1.
(2) Numbered list item 2.
a. A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often dif-
ferent from the screen appearance. The type-
set appearance often uses parentheses around the
level indicator.
b. Another numbered list item under a list item.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items
allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-
in followed by the item. D ouble-click the lead-in box
to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal leg-
ends.
3 4
References
1) N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John
Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
2) Harstad, K.and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3) Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under super-
critical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4) Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular
Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5) Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecu-
lar thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall,
Inc., 1986
6) Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Prop-
erties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 1987
Appendix: Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is sup-
plementary rather than integral to the main text , many
styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used
to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the ap-
pendix.
5
62 Chapter 2 Article Shells
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. Proof. C hange z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
Let H be a Hilb ert space, C b e a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 forPeach k , and f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
P∞ + ∞ k
°n = k=0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A nx = k=0 a n;k T x 1 A
LT EX aut oma tically selects the spacin g dep end in g on th e su rround ing lin e lengths.
converges weak ly to a fixed point of T [1].
1
JEEP - A General Purpose Vehicle 63
• Bullet item 2.
2. Section H eadings
— Second level bullet item.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
heading levels are available, as described below. ∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
2.1. Subsection Heading
D escription List Each descr iption list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
This text appears under a subsection heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid ox ygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at ro cket chamber pressures”, Int. J. H eat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular T heory of Gase s
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
A. A n App endix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than inte-
gral t o the main text , many styles use a different numbering sy stem for equations
that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation show n as eq uation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations
are numb ered in the appendix.
64 Chapter 2 Article Shells
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numb ered eq uation
D r. A uthor Jones
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
At this Ad dress
Let H be a Hilb ert space, C b e a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
July 22, 2004 nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and
P∞ P∞
°n = k=0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) + → 0. Then for each x in C , A nx = k=0 an;k T k x
This article illustrates many features of a ma thematics article, but w e T wo sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing
do not expla in the sp urious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 above and below a display dep ends on whether the lines above or below are short
This short sample document illustrates the typeset app earance of in-line and dis-
and a short line below.
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings 1 A
LT EX aut oma tically selects the spacin g dep end in g on th e su rround ing lin e lengths.
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bib-
1 2
JEEP - Double-spaced Except for Quotes 65
A long line ab ove may depend on your margins for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
as w ill a long line b elow. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for Proof. C hange z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} b e a circle with radius
contents entries. Z Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ X1
1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
= am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼ i CH (z ) (¸ − z ) 2 m=0
2¼ i CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2
1.3. Theor em s, Lem mata, and Other Theor em -like Envir onments
Lem ma 1. Let f (z ) be an analy tic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the represen- |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z |) .
r s in "
tation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o , Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
z z
implies
3 4
T he Quotation tag is used for quot ations of more than one paragraph. Fol- [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid ox ygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
lowing is the beginning of Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll: drogen at ro cket chamber pressures”, Int. J. H eat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
There was nothing so very remarkable in that; nor did Alice think it
so very much out of the way to hear the Rabbit say to itself, ’Oh dear! [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when she thought it over afterwards, it
occurred to her that she ought to have wondered at this, but at the tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
time it all seemed q uite natural); but when the R abbit actually took
a watch out of its waistcoat-pocket, and looked at it, and then hurried
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular T heory of Gase s
on, Alice started to her feet, for it flashed across her mind that she had
never before seen a rabbit with either a waistcoat-pocket, or a watch
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
to take out of it, and burning with curiosity, she ran across the field
after it, and fortunately was just in time to see it pop down a large
rabbit-hole under the hedge. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R . and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample Liq uids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here A. A n App endix
gral t o the main text , many styles use a different numbering sy stem for equations
References
that appear in the appendices.
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
New York, 1963. (A.1)
2a
7 8
66 Chapter 2 Article Shells
This article illu strates many features of a m athe matic s artic le , but we do not ex plain or lon g, as shown in the f ollowing exam p les.
the spurious appearanc e of the form ula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in thi s a bstract. A sh ort line ab ove:
J E L c l a s si fi c a t io n : F 3; F4
an d a short line b elow .
Th is short sample docu ment illust rat es the typ eset ap p ea rance o f in -line an d sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
displayed math em atics in d ocuments. It also illus trates five levels of section h ead -
as w ill a lon g lin e b elow . T his line is long enoug h to illu strate the spa cing for
in gs and three kin ds of lists. Finally, the document includes entr ies for a m anual
m athem atical d isp lays, regardless of the mar gins.
bibliography an d an ap p en dix.
R¯
1 .2. M athema tics in section h eads ®
ln tdt
1 .1. In-line and Dis play ed M ath em atics
P∞ Mathematics can ap p ear in section heads. Not e that ma thema tics in s ect ion
Th e expres sion i=1 a i is in-lin e mathematics, wh ile the nu mbered equation
hea ds may cause difficulties in typ esettin g styles with run ning h ead er s or t ab le of
∞
X
ai (1) content s entr ies.
i=1
1 .3. T heorems , Lemm ata, and Other Theorem -like En vironm ents
is d isp layed and automat ically numb er ed as equa tion 1.
Let H be a Hilb ert sp ace, C b e a closed b ou nd ed convex su bset of H , T a A numb er o f theo rem- like envir on m ents is availab le. T he follow ing lem ma is a
nonexpans ive self map of C . Sup p ose t hat as n → ∞ , a n;k → 0 for each k, an d well- know n fact o n d iff erentiation of asym pt otic exp an sion s of an alytic fun ction s.
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k = 0 (a n ;k +1 − a n ;k ) → 0. T hen for each x in C , A n x = k =0 a n ;k T x
Lem ma 1 Let f ( z) be an analytic functio n in C + . If f (z ) ad mits t he repres en-
converges w eakly to a fi xed point o f T 1.
tation
∗
At t his A ddress µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Journal of International Economics North-Holland 67
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 2. Sectio n H eadi ng s
Use t he S ection tag for major sections , such as th e one just ab ove. Fo ur
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ " . (2)
ad dition al h ead in g levels are available, as d es crib ed b elow.
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r} b e a circle with radius 2.1.1. Subsubsect io n Head ing
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that Th is text ap pea rs un der a sub sub section heading.
Z Z
( ¸ − z0 ) m d ¸
1
X
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
= am + R(z ), (4) Su bsu bsu bsectio n H ead ing T his text app ears un der a sub sub sub section head-
2 ¼i CH(z) (¸ − z ) 2 2¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z )2
m= 0
in g.
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " 3. Lists
T he typ eset app ear an ce for this level is often different from th e screen References
app earan ce. Th e typ eset app earance oft en us es parentheses aro un d
N. Du nfo rd a nd J. S chwartz, Funct ional Analy sis, v. 2, Joh n W iley an d So ns, New
th e level ind icator.
York, 1963.
(b) An oth er nu mb ered lis t item u nder a lis t item .
Har stad, K. an d B ellan , J., “Isolat ed flu id oxyg en dro p b ehavior in fl uid hydr ogen
i. T hird level nu mb ered lis t item u nd er a list item. at rocket ch amb er pr es sur es ”, Int. J. Heat M ass Trans fer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
A. Fou rth a nd fin al level of num b er ed list items a llow ed . Har stad, K. and Bellan , J., “Th e Lew is numb er un der s up ercritical con dition s”,
— S econd level b ullet item. Prausn it z, J., L ichtenthaler, R . and de Azevedo, E., M olecular th erm odyn am ics
for flu id -p hase equ ilibrium, Pr entice -Hall, Inc., 1986
∗ T hird level b ullet item .
R eid , R . C., Prausn itz, J. M . and Polling , B. E., T he Prop erties of Gases an d
· Fou rth a nd fin al level bullet item .
Liquids, 4th Ed ition, McG raw -Hill Book C om p any, 19 87
Des cr ipti on List Each d escription list item has a lead- in followed by t he it em .
A An App endix
D oub le- click the lea d-in b ox to enter or customize th e text of the lead- in .
B unyip M ythical beast of A ustralian Ab original legen ds. Because app end ices may contain material that is sup plemen tar y rather than
int egra l to the main text , m any styles us e a d ifferent nu mbering sys tem for equa-
4. Ab ou t th e B ib liogr ap hy tion s th at app ear in the app end ices .
√
Following the text of th is article is a s hort manu al bibliography. Th is s amp le −b ± b 2 − 4a c
(5)
2a
bibliography has n o relationsh ip to th e p revious text, but it sh ow s s amp le citatio ns
such as 4 , 5 a nd 6. You can also h ave multip le citat ions app ear togeth er. Here is Th e qu ad ratic equa tion s how n as equ at ion 5 is us ed to dem ons trate h ow equatio ns
an example: 2, 3, 4 .
ar e num b ered in th e app endix.
68 Chapter 2 Article Shells
D r. A uth or Jones
sin2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
Dr. Author Jones
as w ill a long line b elow. This line is lo ng enoug h to ill ustrate the spacing
At t hi s Addre ss fo r ma thematica l disp lays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2. Mathema tics in section heads ® ln tdt
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not
explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this Mathematics can appea r in section heads. Note that mathematics in
abstract. sectio n heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running head-
PACS numbers: 05.70 Ln, 05.70 Jk, 64. ers or tab le of contents entries.
1. Sample Mathematics and Text 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
Environments
This sho rt sample docum ent illustrates the typ eset appearance of in-
line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels A number of theo rem-like environments is available. The following
of section head ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes lemma is a well-know n fact on differentiation of asym ptotic expansion s o f
entri es for a manual bibl iography and an app endix. ana lytic functions.
where for the remainder R(z) we have 2. Numb ered list item 2.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈C H ( z )
The typeset appearance for this level is often d ifferent from the
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe-
r sin " ses aroun d the level indicator.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , an d h ence by the C auchy theo rem (b) Ano ther numbered list item un der a list item.
(4) im plies i. Third level numb ered l ist item under a list item.
d A. Fourth an d final level of numbered list items allow ed.
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
• Bullet item 1.
that implies (2) by substituting 1 =z back for z.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter o r customize the text o f
2.1. Subsection Heading the lead-in.
This text appears u nder a subsection heading. Bunyip Mythical bea st of Australian Ab original legend s.
Th e Ti tle of an A rticle
5. Prau snitz, J., Lichtent haler, R . a nd de Azevedo, E., M olecular ther m odynam ics
for flu id -p hase equilibrium, Pr entice -Hall, Inc., 1986
6. Reid, R . C ., Praus nitz, J. M . and Pollin g, B . E., T he Pr op erties of Gases an d
Liquids, 4th Edition, M cG raw -Hill Book C omp any, 1987
Appendix A. An Appendix
Because a ppendices may contain material th at is supplementary rather
than integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system
fo r equa tio ns that appear in the app end ices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is u sed to dem onstrate how
equation s are numbered in the app endix.
70 Chapter 2 Article Shells
R¯
1.2 Mathem atics in section heads ®
ln tdt
M ath ematics can app ear in section heads. Note that mat hematics in section h ead s ma y ca use difficulties
in typeset tin g styles w it h r unn in g headers or table of contents entries.
The Title of an Article
1.3 Theorem s, Lem mata, and O ther The orem -like Environments
Dr. Author Jones
A num ber of theorem-like environm ent s is availab le. T he follow in g lemma is a well-kn own fact on
At this Address
d iff erentiatio n of asympt otic exp an sion s of a nalytic fun ction s.
The Date
Lem m a 1 Le t f (z ) be an a nalytic function in C+ . I f f (z) ad mits t he re pres entation
µ ¶
a1 1
Abstrac t f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
This article illu strates m any features of a m athematics article, but we do no t expl ain the spurious
for z → ∞ inside a con e Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ ar g z ≤ ¼ − " } then
app earance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this a bstract.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text P ro of. Ch an ge z for 1=z . Th en Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ " } and
T his sho rt sample document illus trates the typ eset app earan ce of in- lin e a nd disp layed mathematics
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
in docu ments. It als o illus trates five levels of s ection hea dings a nd thr ee kind s of lists. Finally, the
d o cument in clu des ent ries fo r a m anu al b ib liogr ap hy a nd a n app end ix. F ix z ∈ Γ " , an d let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } b e a cir cle w it h radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follow s
fr om (3) th at
Z Z
(¸ − z 0 ) m d¸
1
X
1.1 In-line and D isplaye d Mathematics 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z ), (4)
2¼ i CH (z) (¸ − z )
2 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z )
2
P∞ m =0
T he expression i= 1 a i is in-line math emat ics, wh ile th e num b ered equation w here for th e rem ain der R(z ) w e have
∞
X
ai (1) |R(z )| ≤ r − 1 max o (|z|) = r − 1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
i=1 ¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈ C H (z )
|z | + r 1 + s in "
is displayed an d au tom atically nu mb ered as equ ation 1 . = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
L et H b e a Hilb ert s pace, C b e a closed b ou nded con vex subset of H , T a no nexpansive self ma p of
P∞ + T herefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , an d h ence by the Cauchy th eorem (4) imp lies
C . Sup pose that as n → ∞, a n ;k → 0 for each k, an d ° n = k = 0 (a n; k+ 1 − a n; k ) → 0. T hen fo r each
P∞ k
x in C , A n x = k = 0 a n ;k T x co nverges wea kly to a fi xed p oint of T [1]. d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1, as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ " =2 ,
T wo sets of LAT 1
EX p arameters govern m athem atical d isplays. T he spacin g ab ove and b elow a d is play dz
d epen ds on w heth er th e lin es ab ove or b elow ar e sh ort or long , as sh ow n in the follow in g examp les . th at implies (2) by su bstitu ting 1=z b ack for z .
sin2 µ + co s2 µ = 1
2.1 Subsection Heading
as w ill a long line b elo w. T his line is long enough to illus trate the sp acing for math emat ica l d isplays,
T his text app ears u nd er a su bsection heading.
r eg ardless of the m argins .
1 LATEX au tomatically selects the spacin g dep ending on th e s urrou ndin g lin e lengths .
1 2
Journal of Progress in Surface Science 71
2.1.1 .1 Su bsu bsu bsection Heading T his t ext app ear s u nder a su bsu bsu bsection h ead in g. [2] Ha rstad, K. and Bellan, J ., “Is olated fluid oxygen d rop b eh avior in flu id hyd ro gen at rocket ch amb er
pres sur es ”, I nt. J. Heat M ass Trans fer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
2 .1.1 .1 .1 Su bsu bsu bsu bsection Heading T his text app ears un der a sub sub sub sub section head-
[3] Ha rstad, K. an d Bellan , J., “ T he Lewis nu mb er un der su percr itica l conditions”, Int . J. Heat M as s
ing .
Tra nsfer, in p rint
[4] Hirshfelder , J. O., Cu rtis, C . F . and B ird , R . B ., M olec ular T heo ry o f Gases and Liqu ids , John W iley
3 Lists
a nd So ns, In c., 1964
B ullet , numb er ed and descr ip tion list envir on ments are availab le. Lists, w hich can ext en d fou r levels
[5] Prausn itz, J., Lichtenth aler, R . and de A zeved o, E., M olecular th erm odyn am ics for fl uid-phase
d eep , look like th is :
equilib rium , Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
1. Nu mbered lis t item 1.
[6] R eid , R . C., Praus nitz, J . M . and Pollin g, B . E., Th e Prop erties of G as es a nd Liquids, 4t h Ed it ion,
2. Nu mbered lis t item 2. M cGr aw -Hill B ook C omp any, 1987
Th e typ eset a pp earance for this level is often d ifferent fr om t he screen app ea rance. T he
A An A ppendix
typeset app earance often u ses p ar entheses arou nd the level ind ica tor. B ecau se app endices may contain m ateria l that is s upp lement ary rat her th an integr al to th e main text ,
(b) Ano ther num b ered list item un der a list item. ma ny s ty les use a different nu mb ering system for equa tion s th at app ear in t he app end ices.
√
i. Th ird level numbered list item und er a list item . −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
A. Fou rth and fin al level of number ed list items allow ed .
T he qu ad rat ic equ ation sh ow n as equation 5 is u sed t o d em on strate how equ ations are nu mb ered in the
• Bullet item 1 . app end ix.
• Bullet item 2 .
D escrip tion List Ea ch d es cription lis t item h as a lead- in follo wed by the item. D ou ble-click th e lead -in
box to enter or cus tom ize t he text of th e lead -in.
3 4
72 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Kluwer Journal
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
Dr. AuthorJones
Author’s Affiliation as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the
spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
April 15, 2003
R¯
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a m athematics article, but we 1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this
abstract.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in
What can’t be done with TeX isn’t worth section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running
doing.
headers or table of contents entries.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
theorem (4) implies
− Bullet item 1.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz − Bullet item 2.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. • Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
+ Fourth and final level bullet item.
2. Section Headings
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four the item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the
additional heading levels are available, as described below. text of the lead-in.
2. Numbered list item 2. And this is an acknowledgements section with a heading that was pro-
duced by the \acknowledgements command. Thank you all for helping
a) A numbered list item under a list item. me writing this LATEX sample file.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses paren-
theses around the level indicator. References
b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
Brown, J. S. and R. R. Burton. Diagnostic Models for Procedural Bugs in Basic
i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. Mathematical Skills. Cognitive Science, 2(2):155—192, 1978.
A Sample Document 5
Buchanan, B. G. and E. H. Shortliffe. Rule-Based Expert Systems: The MYCIN
Experiments of the Stanford Heuristic Programming Project. Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, 1984.
Bunt, H. C. Modular Incremental Modelling of Belief and Intention. In Proceedings
of the Second Int ernational W orkshop on User Modeling, 1990.
Cahour, B. Competence Modelling in Consultation Dialogs. In L. Berlinguet
and D. Berthelette, editors, Proceedings of the Int ernational Congress, Work
With Dispay Units’ 89, Montreal, Canada, September 1990. North Holland,
Amsterdam.
Cahour, B. La Modélisation de l’Interlocuteur: Elaboration du Modèle et Effets au
Cours de Dialogues de Consultation. PhD thesis, Université Paris 8, France,
1991. Cognitive psychology PhD.
Carberry, S. M. Modeling the User’s Plans and Goals. Computational Linguistics,
14(3):23—37, September 1988.
Carbonell, J. R . AI in CAI: An Artificial Intelligence Approach to Computer-Aided
Instruction. IEEE Transactions on Man-Machine Systems, 11:190—202, 1970.
Carr, B. and I. Goldstein. Overlays: A Theory of Modelling for Computed Aided
Instruction. AI Memo 406, 1977.
Cawsey, A. Planning Interactive Explanations. International Journal of Man-
Machine Studies, in press.
Chandrasekaran, B. and William Swartout. Explanations in Knowledge Systems:
The Role of Explicit Representation of Design Knowledge. IEEE Expert, 6(3):47—
50, June 1991.
Chapp el, H. and B. Cahour. User Modeling for M ulti-Modal Co-Operative Dialogue
with KBS. Deliverable D3, Esprit Project P2474, 1991.
Chin, D. N. Intelligent Agents as a Basis for Natural Language Interfaces. PhD
thesis, University of California at Berkeley, 1987.
Chin, D. N. KNOM E: M odeling What the User Knows in UC. In Alfred Kobsa
and Wolfgang Wahlster, editors, User Models in Dialog Systems. Springer-Verlag,
Symb olic Computation Series, Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo, 1989.
Cohen, R. and M. Jones. Incorporating User Models into Expert Systems for Educa-
tional Diagnosis. In Alfred Kobsa and Wolfgang Wahlster, editors, User Models
in Dialog Systems, pages 35 — 51. Springer-Verlag, Symbolic Computation Series,
Berlin Heidelberg New York Tokyo, 1989.
Falzon, P. Les Dialogues de Diagnostic: L’évaluation des Connaissances de
l’Interlocuteur. Technical Report 747, INRIA, Rocquencourt, France, 1987.
Finin, T. W., A. K. Joshi, and B. L. Webber. Natural Language Interactions with
Artificial Experts. Proceedings of the IEEE, 74(7), July 1986.
The Title of an Article spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or
below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
Dr. Author Jones A short line above:
At this Address x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
Submitted by submitting editor’s name
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
ABSTRACT for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do
not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
abstract.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in
section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running head-
ers or table of contents entries.
1. Sample Mathematics and Text
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in- A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following
line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions
of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes of analytic functions.
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics the representation µ ¶
P∞ a1 1
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered
f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z
equation
X∞
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = { z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
ai (1.1)
i =1 a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
T a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for
P∞ + f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (1.3)
each k ,Pand ° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
k
An x = ∞ k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
Two sets of LaTeX parameters govern mathematical displays.∗ The r = |z| sin "= 2. It follows from (1.3) that
∗
LaTeX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Z Z
1
X m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
LINEAR ALGEBRA AND ITS APPLICATIONS 203—204:1—66 (1994) 1 = am + R (z ), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2 ¼i CH (z)
2
(¸ − z )
°c Elsevier Science Inc., 1994
655 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10010 0024-3795/94/$6.00
Linear Algebra and its Applications 75
3 4
where for the remainder R (z ) we have (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
|R(z )| ≤ r−1
max o (|z |) = r −1
max |¸ | · O (|z| + r ) i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
¸∈C H( z) ¸∈C H( z)
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin " • Bullet item 1.
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem • Bullet item 2.
(1.4) implies
— Second level bullet item.
d
f (1 =z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , ∗ Third level bullet item.
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z . · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
2. Section Headings item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of
the lead-in.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
additional heading levels are available, as described below.
A. An Appendix
This is a review text file submitted electronically to MR. heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
Reviewer: A. A. Smith of contents entries.
Reviewer number: 021338 The shell feature five levels of headings: section through subsubsubsubsec-
tion. Tags figure prominently in the use of the shell. You can apply the log-
Address:
Math Dept. ical markup tag Emphasized. You can apply the visual markup tags Bold,
University of Michigan Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter. You can
Ann Arbor, MI 48109 apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
smith@umich.edu CALLIGRAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
Author: Jones, J. J., Brown, B. B. only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. You can apply the size
Short title: Group theory LARGE
tags tiny, scr iptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large, ,
Control number: 1 717 347 huge and Huge.
Primary classification: 20-01 This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific
Secondary classification(s): 20B30 20C30 20C32 WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
Review text: “scratchpad” computations.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment
is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
The article discusses in-line and displayed mathematics in Scientific WorkPlace
P∞
and Scientific Word. The expression i =1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the The buck stops here. Harry Truman
numbered equation
X∞ Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
ai (1) your country. John F Kennedy
i =1
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or an-
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and other. George Bush
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
+
k =0 a n;k T x
List Environments
converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing
at the bottom left of the screen.
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are
short or long, as shown in the following examples. 1. List item 1
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 2. List item 2
and a short line below. (a) A list item under a list item.
A long line above may depend on your margins The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character sur-
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for rounded by parentheses.
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. (b) Just another list item under a list item.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
i. Third level list item under a list item.
1 2
Mathematical Reviews Template 77
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
3
78 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Author 2
The Title of an Article A long line above may depend on your margins
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
Dr. Author Jones1 mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
At this Address
City, State 12345-6789 R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
1 Sample Mathematics and Text may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and dis-
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibli-
ography and an appendix. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Author 3 Author 4
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
implies The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the
d level indicator.
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
2 Section Headings
• Bullet item 1.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
heading levels are available, as described below. • Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection head- 4 About the Bibliography
ing.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibli-
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub- ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such
section heading. as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an
example: [2, 3, 4].
3 Lists
References
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
extend four levels deep, look like this: [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
1. Numbered list item 1. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
2. Numbered list item 2.
Author 5
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that
appear in the appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations
are numbered in the appendix.
80 Chapter 2 Article Shells
The Date for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − " } then
1 Sample Mathematics and Text Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2.
It follows from (3) that
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
Z Z
(¸ − z 0 )m d¸
1
X
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
= am + R (z ), (4)
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)
2 2¼i CH (z ) ( ¸ − z)
2
m=0
appendix.
where for the remainder R (z ) we have
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞ |R (z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r )
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation ¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
∞
X |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z|) .
ai (1) r sin "
i =1
Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- d
f (1 =z ) = a1 + R( z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → P
P 0 for each k , and ° n = dz
∞ + ∞ k
k =0 ( a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T x converges that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
A 1
Two sets of L TEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown 2 Section Headings
in the f ollowing examples.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading
A short line above:
levels are available, as described below.
x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below. 2.1 Subsection Heading
A long line above may depend on your margins
This text appears under a subsection heading.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln J@J 2.1.1.1 Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
heading.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries. 2.1.1.1.1 Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsub-
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. subsubsection heading.
1 2
Modified Article for Short Texts 81
3 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend
four levels deep, look like this:
1.Numbered list item 1.
2.Numbered list item 2.
•Bullet item 1.
•Bullet item 2.
Description ListEach description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
BunyipMythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
References
[1]N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2]Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3]Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4]Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5]Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6]Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
3
82 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Mon. N ot . R. Astron . S oc. 000, 000—000 ( 0000) Print ed 22 Ju ly 2004 (MN LATEX style fi le v1.4) 2 A. Jones (for running header)
3.1 Tags
d
f (1= z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2, You can ap pl y the logical markup tag E mpha sized .
The Title of an A rticle dz
You can apply the vi sual markup tags Bold, Ita lics,
that impl ies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Roman , San s Serif, Slanted, Small C aps, a nd T ypew rit er.
You can apply the special, mathema tics only, tags
Dr. Au thor Jones BLAC KBO ARD BOLD , CALLI G R AP H IC, and fraktur.
At this Address 2 SE CTIO N HE ADIN GS Note th at black board bold and calligrap hic are co rrect only
when applied to u ppercase letters A thro ug h Z .
Use the Section tag for ma jo r sections, such as the one just
You can ap ply the size tag s tiny , s c rip tsiz e , footn otesize ,
above. Four additional h eading levels are available, as de-
A ccepted 1998 Decemb er 15. Received 1998 December 14; in original form 1998 Oc tober 11
scribed below. sm all , normal size, large , Large , LARG E , huge and
Huge .
A BSTR ACT This is a B ody M ath parag rap h. E ach time you press
T his ar ticle illu stra tes many feat ures of a mat hema tics article, b ut we do n ot explain 2.1 Subsection H eading the E nter key, Sci enti fic WorkP lace switches to mathem at-
t he s purious app eara nce of the formu la ( ∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this ab stra ct. This text ap pea rs un der a su bsec tion heading . ics mo de. This is conven ient for carryi ng out “scratchpad”
K ey word s: S tars, p lanets . com putatio ns.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as B ody
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading Quote. This enviro nm ent is approp riate for a short quo ta -
tion or a sequ ence of short quotatio ns.
R¯ This text ap pea rs un der a su bsubsection heading.
1 SAMPLE M ATHE MATI CS AND TEXT 1.2 Mathem atic s in sec tion heads ® ln tdt The bu ck s tops her e. Harry Tru man
As k not what your cou ntry can do for you ; ask wh at you can do
This short sample docum ent illustrates the typ eset appear- Mathem atics can appear in sectio n heads. Note that mathe- 2.1.1.1 Subsubsubse ction Heading This text ap-
for you r cou ntr y. John F Kennedy
ance of in-li ne and displayed mathema tics in docum ents. It matics in section h eads m ay cause diffi culties in typesetting pears under a subsubsub section heading. I am n ot a crook. Ric hard N ix on
also il lu stra tes fi ve levels of section hea dings and three kin ds styles with runn in g hea ders or ta ble o f contents entries. It’s n o exaggeration to s ay t he undecideds could go one way or
of lists. Finally, the documen t includes entries for a manua l Subsubsubsubsectio n Head ing Th is text appea rs under an ot her. George B ush
bibliograp hy and an appendix. a subsu bsubsubsection heading. The Q uo ta tion tag i s used fo r qu otations of mo re than
1.3 Theorems, Lemm ata, and O ther The orem -like one para graph. Foll owing is the b eginning of Alice’s Adven-
Environments tures in Wo nderland by Lewis Carrol l:
1.1 I n-line and Displayed M athematics
P∞ A number of theorem-like environmen ts is available. The 3 L ISTS Al ice was b eginnin g to get very tir ed of sittin g by her sis ter
The expressio n i=1 ai is in-l in e ma th ematics, wh ile the followi ng lemma is a well-known fact on diff erentiatio n of on the bank, and of having nothin g to do: once or twice sh e h ad
numb ered equation B ullet, numbered and description list environments are peep ed int o th e b ook h er sister was readin g, bu t it had no pictu res
asym ptotic expansions of analytic functions.
X
∞ avail able. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, lo ok like or convers at ion s in it, ’and what is the us e of a b ook,’ th ou ght
ai (1) Le mma 1. L et f (z) b e an analytic functi on i n C + . If f (z) this: Ali ce ’without pictu res or conversation? ’
i=1
admits the representation S o she was considerin g in h er own min d (as well as sh e could ,
is displ ayed and automatically numbered as equa tion 1. µ ¶ (i) Numb ered list item 1. for th e hot day m ad e her feel ver y sleepy and stup id), wh ether
a1 1 the pleasure of making a daisy-chain wou ld be worth t he troubl e
L et H be a Hi lb ert space, C be a closed bound ed f (z ) = a0 + +o , (ii) Nu mbered list item 2.
z z of getting up and p icking the daisies , wh en sudd enly a Whit e
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C . Rabbit with p ink eyes ran close by h er.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = ((a)) A n umb ered list item under a li st item.
Supp ose tha t as n → ∞, an; k → 0 for each k, and Th ere was noth ing so very re markable in th at; nor di d Alice
P∞ {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then The typ eset a pp earance for this level is often diff er-
°n = 0 (a n;k+ 1 − a n;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x i n C , think it so ver y much out of the way to h ear t he Rabb it say to
Pk=
∞ k ent from the screen appeara nce. The typ eset app earance
An x = k =0 an;k T x converges weakly to a fixed p oint of
2 0
a 1 = − l im z f (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) its elf, ’Oh dear! Oh dear! I sh all b e late!’ (when she thought it over
often uses parentheses around the level i nd icator. afterwar ds, it occur red to h er that sh e ought to have won dered
T (1).
Proo f. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = ((b)) Another numb ered list item u nder a list item. at this, but at t he tim e it all seeme d quite natu ral); bu t when
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern m athematical d is- the Rabb it actually took a watch out of its waist coat-p ocket,
? {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and (1) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
plays. The spa cin g above an d below a disp lay dep end s on an d looked at it, and th en hu rried on, A lice s tart ed t o her feet,
whether the li nes a bove or below are short or lo ng , a s shown f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3) for it flashed acr os s her m ind that she had never bef or e seen a
(A) Fourth and fin al level of numbered list i tems rabbit wit h eith er a waistcoat-pocket, or a wat ch to take out of it,
in the fo llowin g exa mp les.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a allowed . an d b urning with cur ios ity, s he r an ac ross the field af ter it, and
A short line above:
circle with radius r = | z| si n "=2. It follows from (3 ) that fort unately was just in t ime to see it pop down a large rabbit -hol e
x 2 + y 2 = z2 Z Z • Bullet item 1 . und er the h edge.
1 f (¸) d ¸ X1
1
m
(¸ − z 0) d ¸ • Bullet item 2 .
= am + R(z), In another m om ent dow n went Alice after it , n ever once con-
and a short line below. 2 ¼i C H (z ) (¸ − z) 2 2¼ i C H (z) 2
m= 0 (¸ − z) sid erin g how in the world s he was to get out again.
A l on g line ab ove may depend on y our m argin s (4) — Seco nd l evel bullet i tem.
si n2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 where for the remainder R (z) we have · Thi rd level bullet i tem.
as will a lon g line below. This line is long eno ug h to illu s- 4 A BOUT THE B IBL IO GRAP H Y
|R (z )| ≤ r − 1 m ax o (|z|) = r −1 m ax |¸| · O (|z | + r) * Fo urth and fi nal level bu ll et item.
¸ ∈ C H (z ) ¸ ∈C H (z)
trate the spacing for m athematical displays, regardless of Followi ng the text of this articl e is a short manua l bibli-
the m argins. |z| + r 1 + sin " D escription List Each description list item has a lead-in
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . ography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to
r sin " followed by th e item. D ouble-click the lea d- in b ox to enter the p revi ou s text, but it shows sampl e cita tions such as (4),
? LAT X automatically s elects t he spacing dep endin g on the s ur- Therefore R(z) → 0 a s z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the or customize the tex t of the lead-in. (5) a nd (6). Yo u can also have multi ple citation s appear
E
r oun ding line len gt hs. Cauchy theorem (4) impli es B unyip Mythica l b east of Australian Abo ri ginal legends. together. Here is an exam ple: (2; 3; 4).
c 0000 RAS
° c 0000 RA S, MN RA S 000, 000—000
°
Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society 83
APPEND I X A: AN APPENDI X
B ecause appendices may contain m aterial tha t is supple-
mentary rather than integ ra l to the m ain tex t , m any styles
use a different n umb ering system for equations tha t a pp ear
in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(A1)
2a
The qua dratic equation shown as equatio n A1 is used to
dem onstrate how equations are numbered in the app en di x.
REVTeX 4
HEP/123-qed
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious I. Section Headings 104
appearance of the formula (∇ × F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. A. Subsection Heading 104
1. Subsubsection Heading 104
References 106
A. An Appendix 106
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
ai (1)
i=1
101 102
REVTeX 4 85
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.[7] The spacing above and Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in follows from (3) that
the following examples. Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
A short line above: = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
x +y =z
2 2 2
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
I. SECTION HEADINGS
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
C. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments heading levels are available, as described below.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
a. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2)
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
heading.
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
103 104
[6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2—4].
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
[7] LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
APPENDIX A: AN APPENDIX
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in
the appendices. √
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
numbered in the appendix.
106
86 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Science Magazine
1 2
Science Magazine 87
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then Subsubsection Heading
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2) This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
Lists
follows from (3) that
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
levels deep, look like this:
where for the remainder R(z) we have
1. Numbered list item 1.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z )
2. Numbered list item 2.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
d The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
Section Headings A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading • Bullet item 1.
levels are available, as described below.
• Bullet item 2.
Subsection Heading
– Second level bullet item.
This text appears under a subsection heading.
3 4
∗ Third level bullet item. 5. We’ve included in the template file scifile.tex a new environment, {scilastnote},
· Fourth and final level bullet item. that generates a numbered final citation without a corresponding signal in the text. This en-
2. As the mark-up of the TEX source for this document makes clear, your ? le should be coded
in LATEX2", not LATEX 2.09 or an earlier release. Also, please use the article document
class.
3. Among whom are the author of this document. The “real” references and notes contained
herein were compiled using BIBTEX from the sample .bib ? le scibib.bib, the style pack-
4. One of the equation editors we use, Equation Magic (MicroPress Inc., Forest Hills, NY;
http://www.micropress-inc.com/), interprets native TEX source code and generates an equa-
tion as an OLE picture object that can then be cut and pasted directly into Word. This editor,
however, does not handle LATEX environments (such as {array} or {eqnarray}); it can
interpret only TEX codes. Thus, when there’s a choice, we ask that you avoid these LATEX calls
in displayed math — for example, that you use the TEX \matrix command for ordinary
matrices, rather than the LATEX {array} environment.
5 6
88 Chapter 2 Article Shells
SIAM Journal
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the repre-
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE sentation
µ ¶
DR. AUTHOR JONES a1 1
AT THIS ADDRESS f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
Key words. sample document
AMS subject classification. 1234.56 Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. Sample Mathematics and Text. This short sample document illustrates f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (1.3)
the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also
illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
P Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i∞=1 a i is in-line 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (1.4)
mathematics, while the numbered equation 2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)
2
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)
2
m= 0
∞
X where for the remainder R (z) we have
ai (1.1)
i=1 |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. |z| + r 1 + sin "
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k= 0 (an;k+ 1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T x Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, d
as shown in the following examples. f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
A short line above:
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
x2 + y 2 = z2 2. Section Headings. Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one
just above. Four additional heading levels are available, as described below.
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
ing.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math- Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
ematical displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
R¯ heading.
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in
3. Lists. Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type-
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
setting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1. Numbered list item 1.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A 2. Numbered list item 2.
number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well- (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. level indicator.
1 2
SIAM Journal 89
REFERENCES
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Appendix A. An Appendix.
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
are numbered in the appendix.
3
90 Chapter 2 Article Shells
SIAM Proceedings Series Title of an Article ∗ 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
Dr. Author Jones†
∞
X
(1) ai
i=1
Abstract
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x =
+
k=0 an;k T x converges
weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown
in the following examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1 A
LTEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
∗
Any information regarding grants should be placed here.
†
Composition Manager, Society for Industrial and Applied Mathematics, Anytown, USA.
1
SIAM Proceedings in Applied Mathematics 91
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
(3) f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) .
• Bullet item 1.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
It follows from (3) that • Bullet item 2.
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ — Second level bullet item.
(4) = am + R(z),
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 ∗ Third level bullet item.
where for the remainder R(z) we have · Fourth and final level bullet item.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies 4 About the Bibliography
d Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and
dz
[6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
SIAM-ACM Preprint
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal leg-
the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies ends.
SIAM/ACM Preprint Series Macros, The Title of an Article∗ 4 Tags
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
dz
Dr. Author Jones† You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Ital-
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. ics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
Typewriter.
R¯ 2 Section Headings
Abstract 1.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdtMath- You can apply the special, mathematics only,
ematics can appear in section heads. Note that math- Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, CALLIGRAPHIC, and
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics
ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type- just above. Four additional heading levels are available, fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of
setting styles with running headers or table of contents as described below. are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A
the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
entries. through Z.
2.1 Subsection HeadingThis text appears under a You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnote-
1 Sample Mathematics and Text
This short sample document illustrates the typeset ap-
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem- subsection heading. size, small , normalsize, large, Large, LARGE ,
pearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu-
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
like EnvironmentsA number of theorem-like environ-
ments is available. The following lemma is a well-known 2.1.1 Subsubsection HeadingThis text appears
under a subsubsection heading.
huge and Huge.
fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of ana- This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Subsubsubsection HeadingThis text appears press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches to
lytic functions.
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. under a subsubsubsection heading. mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If Subsubsubsubsection HeadingThis text ap- “scratchpad” computations.
P∞ and Displayed MathematicsThe ex-
1.1 In-line f (z) admits the representati on pears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body
pression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the num- Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short
µ ¶
bered equation a1 1 3 Lists
f (z) = a 0 + +o , quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
∞
X z z Bullet, numbered and description list environments are
(1.1) ai available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look The buck stops here. Harry Truman
i=1 for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" =
{z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then like this: Ask not what your country can do for you;
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation ask what you can do for your country. John F
1.1. 1. Numbered list item 1.
(1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " . Kennedy
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded
2. Numbered list item 2. I am not a crook. Richard Ni xon
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C . Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" =
Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and (a) A numbered list item under a list item. It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds
P∞ + could go one way or another. George Bush
°n = (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in
k=0P The typeset appearance for this level is of-
C , An x =
∞ k (1.3) f (1=z) = a0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
k=0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed ten different from the screen appearance. The The Quotation tag is used for quotations of more
point of T [1]. typeset appearance often uses parentheses
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be than one paragraph. Following is the beginning of
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical around the level indicator.
a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) Alice’s Adventures in Wonderland by Lewis Carroll:
displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display
that (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
depends on whether the lines above or below are short Alice was beginning to get very tired of
or long, as shown in the following examples. Z i. Third level numbered list item under a list
1 f (¸) d¸ sitting by her sister on the bank, and of having
A short line above: (1.4) = item.
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 nothing to do: once or twice she had peeped
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list into the book her sister was reading, but it had
x2 + y 2 = z 2 Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
1 items allowed. no pictures or conversations in it, ’and what
and a short line below. am + R(z),
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 is the use of a book,’ thought Alice ’without
m= 0 • Bullet item 1.
A long line above may depend on your margins pictures or conversation?’
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 where for the remainder R(z) we have • Bullet item 2. So she was considering in her own mind (as
well as she could, for the hot day made her feel
as will a long line below. This line is long enough |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) — Second level bullet item. very sleepy and stupid), whether the pleasure
¸∈C H (z)
to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, of making a daisy-chain would be worth the
∗ Third level bullet item.
regardless of the margins. = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H (z) · Fourth and final level bullet item. trouble of getting up and picking the daisies,
∗ |z| + r when suddenly a White Rabbit with pink eyes
Supported by GSF grants ABC123, DEF456, and GHI789. = · O (|z| + r )
† Society
for Industrial and Applied Mathematics. r Description List Each description list item has a ran close by her.
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the
E 1 + sin " lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead- There was nothing so very remarkable in
surrounding line lengths. = · O (|z|) . in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in. that; nor did Alice think it so very much out
sin "
1
SIAM-ACM Preprint 93
of the way to hear the Rabbit say to itself, The quadratic equation shown as equation 1.5 is used
’Oh dear! Oh dear! I shall be late!’ (when to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the
she thought it over afterwards, it occurred to appendix.
her that she ought to have wondered at this,
but at the time it all seemed quite natural);
but when the Rabbit actually took a watch out
of its waistcoat-pocket, and looked at it, and
then hurried on, Alice started to her feet, for
it flashed across her mind that she had never
before seen a rabbit with either a waistcoat-
pocket, or a watch to take out of it, and
burning with curiosity, she ran across the field
after it, and fortunately was just in time to
see it pop down a large rabbit-hole under the
hedge.
In another moment down went Alice after
it, never once considering how in the world she
was to get out again.
References
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supple-
mentary rather than integral to the main text , many
styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(1.5)
2a
94 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Similar to AIP
1 2
Similar to AIP 95
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre- Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-
sentation µ ¶ subsection heading.
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
III. Lists
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. Numbered list item 1.
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
2. Numbered list item 2.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
Z Z The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
X
1 m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
where for the remainder R(z) we have
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
|R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
3 4
5 6
96 Chapter 2 Article Shells
1 2
Similar to AIP - Modified 97
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3) i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
It follows from (3) that • Bullet item 1.
Z Z
(¸ − z0 ) m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 • Bullet item 2.
= am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
— Second level bullet item.
where for the remainder R(z) we have ∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , IV. About the Bibliography
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibli-
ography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as, 45
II. Section Headings and.6 You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example:. 2—4
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
heading levels are available, as described below.
A. Subsection Heading
This text appears under a subsection heading.
1. Subsubsection Heading
III. Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
extend four levels deep, look like this:
3 4
5 6
98 Chapter 2 Article Shells
P∞ Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
f (¸) d¸
i=1 a i
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression is in-line math- 1 1
= am + R(z), (4)
ematics, while the numbered equation 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
∞
X where for the remainder R(z) we have
ai (1)
i= 1
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = r sin "
P∞ + P∞ k
k= 0 (an;k+ 1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 a n;k T x converges Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown dz
in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2 2. Section Headings
and a short line below. Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading
A long line above may depend on your margins levels are available, as described below.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
R¯ Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in section heading.
heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles
with running headers or table of contents entries.
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1
Similar to Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society 99
3. Lists A. An Appendix
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
f our levels deep, look like this: the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear
in the appendices. √
1. Numbered list item 1. −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2. Numbered list item 2. 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. numbered in the appendix.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap-
pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level
indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Li quids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
100 Chapter 2 Article Shells
The Title of an Article L emma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
Dr. Author Jones a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
At this Address z z
The Date f or z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Abstract. This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but a 1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this
abstract. Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. Sample Mathematics and Text. This short sample document illustrates the f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1z + o (z) . (3)
typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates
five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. It follows f rom (3) that
P∞ Z 1 Z m
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression ai is in-line math- 1 f (¸) d¸ X 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
i=1
ematics, while the numbered equation 2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
∞
X
ai (1) where for the remainder R(z) we have
i=1
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = r sin "
P∞ + P∞ k
k= 0 (an;k+ 1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k=0 a n;k T x converges Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown dz
in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 2. Section Headings. Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just
above. Four additional heading levels are available, as described below.
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1 Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
heading.
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt. Mathematics can appear in section
heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles 3. Lists. Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
with running headers or table of contents entries. which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
1
Similar to MAA Monthly before 1992 101
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
4. About the Bibliography. Following the text of this article is a short manual
bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it
shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
REFERENCES
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Li quids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
The Date
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below
a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
examples.
x2 + y 2 = z 2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
Dr. Author Jones Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
At this Address
1 Sample Mathematics and Text 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathemat- A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on
ics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. 1 LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1
Similar to North-Holland Journals 103
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
z z
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend f our
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
levels deep, look like this:
follows from (3) that
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 1. Numbered list item 1.
= am + R(z), (4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
2. Numbered list item 2.
where for the remainder R(z) we have
• Bullet item 1.
2 Section Headings
• Bullet item 2.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels
2 3
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no
relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can
also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
References
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main
text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are numbered
in the appendix.
4
104 Chapter 2 Article Shells
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
The Title of an Article Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
Dr. Author Jones
contents entries.
At this Address
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
Key words and phrases: sequential analysis
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a
Abstract This article illustrates many features of a mathematics well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula
(∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
Contents a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
1 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 z z
2 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
3 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
4 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
A An Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. Sample Mathematics and Text
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3)
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
bibliography and an appendix.
Z X
1 Z m
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
= am + R(z), (1.4)
P∞
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) 2 m=0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z) 2
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
where for the remainder R(z) we have
∞
X
ai (1.1) |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
i=1 ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for This text appears under a subsection heading.
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. Subsubsection Heading
1 A
L TEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
1 2
Similar to Sequential Analysis Journal 105
Subsubsubsection Heading [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
3. Li sts Liquids, 4th E dition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which A. An Appendix
can extend four levels deep, look like this:
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
1. Numbered list item 1. integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
equations that appear in the appendices.
2. Numbered list item 2. √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
(A.1)
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. 2a
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equa-
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
tions are numbered in the appendix.
the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
3 4
106 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons,
Inc., 1964
LISTS Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
-Hall, Inc., 1986
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
like this: Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill
Book Company, 1987
1. Numbered list item 1.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
REFERENCES
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
108 Chapter 2 Article Shells
SPIE Proceedings
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless
of the margins.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
The Date typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
2 Section Headings Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels are available, Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
as described below.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
This text appears under a subsection heading.
to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as, 4 5 and. 6 You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example:.2 —4
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
3 Lists Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
look like this: [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th E dition, McGraw-
Hill Book Company, 1987
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of C .
P∞ +
Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
The Title of an Article k=0 (an;k+1
P∞
An x = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T . 1
Dr. Author Jones Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display depends
At this Address on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
ABSTRACT
A long line above may depend on your margins
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
of the margins.
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in doc-
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in
uments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes
typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
P∞ A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentia-
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representation 2.1 Subsection Heading
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z This text appears under a subsection heading.
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z) m= 0
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)
3 Lists
where for the remainder R(z) we have
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r) Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep,
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) . look like this:
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
1. Numbered list item 1.
2 Section Headings (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
• Bullet item 1. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
— Second level bullet item.
Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
∗ Third level bullet item.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th E dition, McGraw-
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Hill Book Company, 1987
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
An Appendix
enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main text , many styles
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends. use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are numbered in the appendix.
4 About the Bibliography
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as, 4 5 and. 6 You can also have multiple citations appear
5 REFERENCES
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
in print
112 Chapter 2 Article Shells
The Title of an Article 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation
Anna A. Author1a and Barry B. Author2b of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
a Affiliation1, Address, City, Country Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the representati on
b Affiliation2, Short Version of a Long Address, City, µ ¶
Country a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
ABSTRACT for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious appearance a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract.
Keywords: Manuscript format, template, SPIE Proceedings, LaTeX
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed mathematics in docu-
ments. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3)
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. that
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (4)
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 2¼i C H( z) (¸ − z)2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2
m= 0
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation where for the remainder R (z) we have
∞
X |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
ai (1) ¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z )
i=1
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. r sin "
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex P subset of H, T + a nonexpansive self map of C. Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
SupposePthat as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C,
A n x = k= 0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T . 1
∞
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
Two sets of LAT ∗
EX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and below a display depends dz
on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples. that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 2. SECTION HEADINGS
and a short line below. Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels are available,
as described below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
3. LISTS
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend four levels deep, look
like this:
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the lead-in box to
enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This unnumbered section is used to identify those who have aided the authors in understanding or accomplishing
the work presented and to acknowledge sources of funding.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography has no relationship
to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as, 4 5 and. 6 You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example:. 2—4
REFERENCES
1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pres-
sures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., 1964
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium,
Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-
Hill Book Company, 1987
114 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Abstract This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
but we do not explain the spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or
z + 1 in this abstract. table of contents entries.
1 Sample Mathematics and Text A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma
is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line functions.
and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the rep-
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. resentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞ for z → ∞ inside a cone ¡ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
The expression i= 1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
a1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ ¡" . (2)
∞
X
ai (1) Proof Change z for 1=z. Then ¡" → ¡ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ ¡" } and
i=1
Fix z ∈ ¡ " , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ the level indicator.
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4) (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
where for the remainder R (z) we have
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈C H(z) ¸∈C H(z) — Bullet item 1.
|z| + r 1 + sin " — Bullet item 2.
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " — Second level bullet item.
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem • Third level bullet item.
(4) implies · Fourth and final level bullet item.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
dz item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z. lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
2 Section Headings
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four 4 About the Bibliography
additional heading levels are available, as described below.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
2.1 Subsection Heading citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2—4].
This text appears under a subsection heading.
Subsubsubsecti on Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
heading. New York, 1963.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading 2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
3 Lists Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
which can extend four levels deep, look like this: 5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
1. Numbered list item 1. 6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
2. Numbered list item 2. Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
A An Appendix
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a d
display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
examples.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below. 2 Section Headings
A long line above may depend on your margins
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading levels
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 are available, as described below.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical 2.1 Subsection Heading
displays, regardless of the margins.
This text appears under a subsection heading.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1 A
LT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
3 Lists A An Appendix
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend f our Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the main
levels deep, look like this: text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the appendices.
√
1. Numbered list item 1. −b ± b 2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
2. Numbered list item 2.
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equations are numbered
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. in the appendix.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance. The
typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click the
lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functi onal Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
118 Chapter 2 Article Shells
The Title of a Standard LaTeX Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
using the Chicago Bibliography System R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Dr. Author Jones Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
At this Address heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
of contents entries.
July 22, 2004
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-
Abstract
ronments
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. tions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre-
1 Sample Mathematics and Text sentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and z z
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
bibliography and citations created using the Chicago BibTEX bibliography style.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
P∞
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
∞ r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
X
ai (1) Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
i=1 = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
m=0
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a where for the remainder R(z) we have
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
+
k=0 a n;k T x
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
1 2
Standard LATEX Article (Chicago) 119
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- 8. Abbreviated author list, no parentheses: Knuth
tional heading levels are available, as described below.
9. Abbreviated author list and year, parentheses around year: Knuth (1981)
2.1 Subsection Heading 10. Year information only, with parentheses: (1981)
This text appears under a subsection heading. 11. Year information only, without parentheses: 1981
4. Choose OK.
1. Full author list and year, but without enclosing parentheses: Knuth 1981
3 4
120 Chapter 2 Article Shells
The Title of a Standard LaTeX Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
using the Harvard Bibliography System R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Dr. Author Jones Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
At this Address heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
of contents entries.
April 18, 2003
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-
ronments
Abstract
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin p opulation. A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic func-
drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e −i¼ − 1. tions.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre-
1 Sample Mathematics and Text sentation µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o ,
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and z z
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
bibliography and citations created using the Chicago BibTEX bibliography style.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
P∞
The expression i= 1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
∞ r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
X
ai (1) Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
i=1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a where for the remainder R(z) we have
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and |R (z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
P P∞ k
°n = ∞ k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x =
+
k=0 a n;k T x
¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
1 2
Standard LATEX Article (Harvard) 121
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi- You can use the citation as a possessive noun phrase with the LaTeX macro
tional heading levels are available, as described below. \possessivecite. Multiple citations are not permitted.
Lamport’s (1986) description of this feature is . . .
4. Choose OK.
2.3.1 \citeasnoun
The Harvard package also supports using a citation as a noun using the LaTeX
macro \citeasnoun. These mechanisms are not supported directly through the
SW interface. They are entered as TeX fields. Here are some examples that you
can copy and modify.
As Pitson (1978) and Lamport (1986, Annex B) describe . . .
3 4
122 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Packages, the Class Options tab and then click the Modify button to see the class
options that are available for this typesetting specification.
The Title of a Standard LaTeX Article 1.2 What changes when using the hyperref package?
When the hyperref package is included in a document SW writes out macros
A. U. Thor compatible with the package. If the hyperref package is not present SW, writes
The University of Stewart Island out macros compatible with SW version 3.5.
In particular, the menu items Insert, Typ eset Object, Hyp ertext Target and
July 22, 2004 Insert, Typeset Object, Hypertext Reference are available only when the hyperref
package is included.
Also, if you create a PDF file using pdfTeX, the resulting P DF file will
Abstract include active hyperlinks. This sample document includes a table of content
and the link in this sentence to the MacKichan Software, Inc. web site.
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population.
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to
drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1.
Contents
1 The hyperref package 1
1.1 About This Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 What changes when using the hyperref package? . . . . . . . . . 2
1 2
Statistics and Decisions 123
Dr. A. U. Thor 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed math-
ematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists.
Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt
M athematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1
124 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and • Bullet item 2.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It ∗ Third level bullet item.
follows from (1.3) that · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-click
= am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i C H(z) (¸ − z)2
m =0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
2 the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
where for the remainder R(z) we have Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
|z| + r 1 + sin " Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6].
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
d Bibliography
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
2. Section Headings
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
levels are available, as described below.
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
2.1. Subsection Heading Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
This text appears under a subsection heading.
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., M olecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
3. Lists Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend A. An Appendix
four levels deep, look like this:
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the
1. Numbered list item 1. main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
appendices. √
2. Numbered list item 2.
−b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
2a
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations are num-
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
bered in the appendix.
The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
TU Wien 125
TU Wien
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
of contents entries. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
1 A
LT
heading.
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
126 Chapter 2 Article Shells
3 Lists A An Appendix
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
can extend four levels deep, look like this: integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for
equations that appear in the appendices.
1. Numbered list item 1.
√
2. Numbered list item 2. −b ± b2 − 4ac
(5)
2a
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The quadratic equation shown as equation 5 is used to demonstrate how equa-
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen tions are numbered in the appendix.
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermody-
namics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
3 4
TU Wien Article (new) 127
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
1 Sample Mathematics and Text Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line
f (1=z) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) . (3)
and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
P∞ = am + R(z), (4)
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
2
m=0
2¼i C H (z)
2
(¸ − z)
∞
X
ai (1) where for the remainder R(z) we have
i= 1
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. ¸∈C H (z) ¸∈CH (z)
1 2
128 Chapter 2 Article Shells
3 Lists [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermo-
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
dynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
1. Numbered list item 1. [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
2. Numbered list item 2. and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
3 4
World Scientific Proceedings 9.00x6.00 129
April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6 April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6
1
130 Chapter 2 Article Shells
April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6 April 28, 2003 13:0 WSPC/Trim Size: 9in x 6in for Proceedings WorldScientificProceedings9x6
3 4
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem • Bullet item 1.
(4) implies • Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , ∗ Third level bullet item.
dz
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Bullet and numbered list environments are available. Lists, which can ex-
tend four levels deep, look like this: Appendix A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than
(1) Numbered list item 1.
(2) Numbered list item 2. integral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system
for equations that appear in the appendices.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. √
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from −b ± b2 − 4ac
(A.1)
the screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses 2a
parentheses around the level indicator. The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. equations are numbered in the appendix.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
World Scientific Proceedings 9.75x6.50 (updated) 131
July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002 July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002
R¯
1.2. Mathematic s in section heads ®
ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.
DR. AUTHOR JONES 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Env ironments
At this Address
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the
spurious appearance of the formula (∇ × F ) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. Lemma 1.1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z) admits the represen-
tation
µ ¶
a1 1
1. Sample Mathematics and Text f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and dis-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibli- a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
ography and an appendix.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3)
P
The expression ∞i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
∞
X r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (3) that
ai (1)
i=1 Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. = am + R(z), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and where for the remainder R(z) we have
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x |R(z)| ≤ r − 1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
converges weakly to a fixed point of T 1 . ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H (z)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.a The spacing above |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, r sin "
as shown in the following examples. Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
A short line above: implies
x2 + y 2 = z2
d
and a short line below. f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
A long line above may depend on your margins dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
2. Section Headings
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
aLAT heading levels are available, as described below.
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1
132 Chapter 2 Article Shells
July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002 July 12, 2004 11:38 Proceedings Trim Size: 9.75in x 6.5in swp0002
3 4
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE |z| sin"=2. It follows from (3) that (a) A numbered list item under a list
Z item.
1 f (¸) d¸
= The typeset appearance for this
DR. AUTHOR JONES 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
level is often different from the
At this Address X1 Z m
1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸ screen appearance. The typeset
am + R(z),
m=0
2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2 appearance often uses parentheses
This article illustrates many features of a mathematics article, but we do not explain the spurious
appearance of the formula (∇× F) · k = z + 1 in this abstract. (4) around the level indicator.
where for the remainder R(z) we have (b) Another numbered list item under
1 Sample Mathematics and Text A long line above may depend on your a list item.
margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o(|z|)
¸∈CH (z) i. Third level numbered list item
This short sample document illustrates the
typeset appearance of in-line and displayed sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) under a list item.
¸∈CH (z)
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates A. Fourth and final level of
as will a long line below. This line is long |z| + r
five levels of section headings and three kinds = · O (|z| + r) numbered list items al-
enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe- r
of lists. Finally, the document includes en- matical displays, regardless of the margins. 1 + sin" lowed.
tries for a manual bibliography and an ap- = · O (|z|) .
sin "
pendix. • Bullet item 1.
1.2 Mathematics in section heads
R¯ Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and
®
ln tdt hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies • Bullet item 2.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞ Mathematics can appear in section heads.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathemat- d — Second level bullet item.
Note that mathematics in section heads may f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 ,
ics, while the numbered equation cause difficulties in typesetting styles with dz
∗ Third level bullet item.
∞ running headers or table of contents entries. as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
X · Fourth and final level bul-
ai (1) that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for let item.
i=1
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other z.
is displayed and automatically numbered as Theorem-like Environments Description List Each description list item
equation 1. 2 Section Headings has a lead-in followed by the item.
A number of theorem-like environments is
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed Double-click the lead-in box to enter or
available. The following lemma is a well-
bounded convex subset of H, T a nonex- Use the Section tag for major sections, such customize the text of the lead-in.
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic
pansive self map of C. Suppose that as as the one just above. This typesetting spec-
expansions of analytic functions. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Abo-
n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n = ification provides only for the addional level
P∞ + Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function riginal legends.
k=0 (an;k+1P− an;k ) → 0. Then for each x of subsection, shown below.
in C, An x = ∞ k in C+. If f (z) admits the representation
k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
µ ¶
to a fixed point of T 1 . a1 1 2.1 Subsection Heading 4 Tags
f (z) = a0 + + o ,
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern z z This text appears under a subsection head-
mathematical displays.a The spacing above You can apply the logical markup tag Em-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = ing.
phasized.
and below a display depends on whether the
{z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then You can apply the visual markup tags
lines above or below are short or long, as
3 Lists Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
shown in the following examples. a1 = − limz2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (2)
A short line above: Small Caps, and Typewriter.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = Bullet, numbered and description list envi-
You can apply the special, mathe-
x2 + y 2 = z 2 {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and ronments are available. Lists, which can ex-
matics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
tend four levels deep, look like this:
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that
and a short line below. f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z). (3)
1. Numbered list item 1. blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
=L
AT X automatically selects the spacing depending
E
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : only when applied to uppercase letters A
on the surrounding line lengths. |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = 2. Numbered list item 2. through Z.
134 Chapter 2 Article Shells
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large, 3537-3550
LARGE, huge and Huge. 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis
number under supercritical conditions”,
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
time you press the Enter key, Scientific Work-
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and
Place switches to mathematics mode. This
Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad”
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
computations. 1964
Following is a group of paragraphs
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de
marked as Short Quote. This environment
Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
is appropriate for a short quotation or a se-
ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
quence of short quotations.
-Hall, Inc., 1986
The buck stops here. Harry Tru- 6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and
man Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill
Ask not what your country can do
Book Company, 1987
for you; ask what you can do for
your country. John F. Kennedy
Appendix
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the unde- A An Appendix
cideds could go one way or another.
Because appendices may contain material
George H. W. Bush
that is supplementary rather than integral to
I did not have sexual relations with the main text , many styles use a different
that woman, Miss Lewinsky. Bill numbering system for equations that appear
Clinton in the appendices.
They misunderestimated me. √
−b ± b 2 − 4ac
George W. Bush (5)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation
5 About the Bibliography
5 is used to demonstrate how equations are
Following the text of this article is a short numbered in the appendix.
manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
phy has no relationship to the previous text,
but it shows sample citations such as 4, 5 and
6
. You can also have multiple citations ap-
pear together. Here is an example: 2;3;4.
References
THE TITLE OF AN ARTICLE where for the remainder R(z) we have The typeset appearance often uses paren-
theses around the level indicator.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|)
¸∈C H (z )
DR. AUTHOR JONES (b) Another numbered list item under a list
= r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) item.
At this Address ¸∈C H (z )
play depends on whether the lines above or below are This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection
short or long, as shown in the following examples. Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = heading.
References
A short line above: {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
3 Lists 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analy-
x2 + y2 = z 2 f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (3) sis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
Bullet, numbered and description list environments
and a short line below. 2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxy-
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} are available. Lists, which can extend four levels
A long line above may depend on your margins gen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from deep, look like this:
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Trans-
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 (3) that fer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
1. Numbered list item 1.
3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis num-
as will a long line below. This line is long enough Z
1 f (¸) d¸ 2. Numbered list item 2. ber under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, 2 =
regardless of the margins.
2¼i (¸ − z)
CH (z) Mass Transfer, in print
1 Z m
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. 4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B.,
X 1 (¸ − z 0 ) d¸
=L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the am + R (z), (4) The typeset appearance for this level is of- Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John
m=0
2¼i C H (z) (¸ − z)2
surrounding line lengths. ten different from the screen appearance. Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
1
136 Chapter 2 Article Shells
Appendix
A An Appendix
The shell documents in the directory Author Packages for AMS Shells are available for
creating documents suitable for sending to the American Mathematical Society. See
http://www.ams.org/tex/author-info.html for a complete list of publications.
138 Chapter 3 Author Packages for AMS Shells
Contemporary Mathematics
2 AUTHOR ONE, AUTHOR TWO, AND AUTHOR THREE
Author One, Author Two, and Author Three 1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A
number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Dedicated to the memory of S. Bach.
Lemma 1.1 . Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f ( z) admits the rep-
resentation µ ¶
Abstract. Replace this text with your own abstract. a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = { z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
1. Sample Mathematics and Text (1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ" = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- (1.3) f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual
bibliography and an appendix. Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
P∞ r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i =1 a i is in- Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 ( ¸ − z0 ) d¸
line mathematics, while the numbered equation (1.4) = am + R(z ),
∞ 2 ¼i C H( z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2
X m= 0
(1.1) ai where for the remainder R (z) we have
i=1
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a |z | + r 1 + sin "
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
P∞ P∞ r sin "
→ 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
+
°n = k =0 (an;k +1 − a n;k ) Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short d
or long, as shown in the following examples. f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
dz
A short line above: that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z. ¤
x2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below. 2. Section Headings
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
2000 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 05C38, 15A15; Secondary 05A15, 15A18.
tional heading levels are available, as described below.
Key words and phrases. Keyword one, keyword two, keyword three.
Thanks for Author One. 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Thanks for Author Two.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication elsewhere. 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection head-
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
E ing.
Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection head-
°2001
c enter name of copyright h older ing.
1
Contemporary Mathematics (Proceedings) 139
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head- that appear in the appendices.
ing. √
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A.1)
2a
3. Lists The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which are numbered in the appendix.
can extend four levels deep, look like this: (A. One and A. Two) Author OneTwo address line 1, Author OneTwo address line 2
(1) Numbered list item 1. E-mail address, A. One: aone@aoneinst.edu
URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
(2) Numbered list item 2.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. Current address, A. Two: Author Two current address line 1, Author Two current address
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen line 2
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around E-mail address, A. Two: atwo@atwoinst.edu
URL: http://www.authortwo.twouniv.edu
the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. (A. Three) Author Three address line 1, Author Three address line 2
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item. URL: http://www.authorthree.threeuniv.edu
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer , 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids , John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Appendix A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
140 Chapter 3 Author Packages for AMS Shells
Generic Journal
Unspecified Journ al
Volume 00, Numb er 0, Pages 000—000
2 AUTHOR ONE, AUTHOR TWO, AND AUTHOR THREE
S ????-????(XX)0000-0
R¯
1.2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . Mathematics can appear in sec-
tion heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in type-
setting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
THE FULL TITLE OF AN AMS PROCEEDINGS ARTICLE
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments. A num-
AUTHOR ONE, AUTHOR TWO, AND AUTHOR THREE ber of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Dedicated to the memory of S. Bach.
Lemma 1.1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f ( z) admits the repre-
sentation µ ¶
Abstract. Replace this text with your own abstract.
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = { z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
1. Sample Mathematics and Text
(1.2) a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" .
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head- Proof. Change z for 1 =z . Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual
bibliography and an appendix. (1.3) f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z) .
P∞ Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics. The expression i= 1 a i is in-line
mathematics, while the numbered equation r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
X∞ Z Z
( ¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
(1.1) ai (1.4) = am + R(z ),
i=1
2 ¼i C H( z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2
m= 0
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. where for the remainder R (z) we have
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
P∞ + P∞ ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
°n = k =0 (an;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , An x = k =0 a n;k T k x
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. |z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above r sin "
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
as shown in the following examples. implies
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R (z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
and a short line below. dz
A long line above may depend on your margins that implies (1.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z. ¤
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2. Section Headings
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four addi-
Received by the editors July 27, 2001. tional heading levels are available, as described below.
2000 Mathematics Subject Classification. Primary 05C38, 15A15; Secondary 05A15, 15A18.
Key words and phrases. Keyword one, keyword two, keyword three. 2.1. Subsection Heading. This text appears under a subsection heading.
Thanks for Author One.
Thanks for Author Two.
This paper is in final form and no version of it will be submitted for publication elsewhere. 2.1.1. Subsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
E
Subsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head-
°2001
c enter name of copyright h older ing.
1
Generic Journal 141
3. Lists The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
are numbered in the appendix.
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
can extend four levels deep, look like this: (A. One and A. Two) Author OneTwo address line 1, Author OneTwo address line 2
E-mail address, A. One: aone@aoneinst.edu
(1) Numbered list item 1. URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
(2) Numbered list item 2.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. Current address, A. Two: Author Two current address line 1, Author Two current address
line 2
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen E-mail address, A. Two: atwo@atwoinst.edu
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around URL: http://www.authortwo.twouniv.edu
the level indicator.
(A. Three) Author Three address line 1, Author Three address line 2
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
URL: http://www.authorthree.threeuniv.edu
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer , 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids , John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Appendix A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A.1)
2a
142 Chapter 3 Author Packages for AMS Shells
Mathematics of Computation
3. Lists The quadratic equation shown as equation A.1 is used to demonstrate how equations
are numbered in the appendix.
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
can extend four levels deep, look like this: (A. One and A. Two) Author OneTwo address line 1, Author OneTwo address line 2
E-mail address, A. One: aone@aoneinst.edu
(1) Numbered list item 1. URL: http://www.authorone.oneuniv.edu
(2) Numbered list item 2.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item. Current address, A. Two: Author Two current address line 1, Author Two current address
line 2
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen E-mail address, A. Two: atwo@atwoinst.edu
appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around URL: http://www.authortwo.twouniv.edu
the level indicator.
(A. Three) Author Three address line 1, Author Three address line 2
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
URL: http://www.authorthree.threeuniv.edu
(i) Third level numbered list item under a list item.
(A) Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List: Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer , 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids , John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Appendix A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than in-
tegral to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations
that appear in the appendices.
√
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A.1)
2a
Book Shells
Most book shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in one of two base doc-
ument classes—book.cls or report.cls. The program uses several other .cls
files for customized book shells. Book shells generally have extensive front and back
matter. The shells produce documents with up to five heading levels defined for the
body of the document, in addition to chapters and, in some cases, parts. The typesetting
specifications for many book shells add blank pages where necessary so that chapters
and chapter-like elements begin on odd-numbered pages. In this chapter, we include
many pages of each sample book so that you can see the many different kinds of pages
included in a single shell.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and see page 4 for
page layout diagrams for the base document classes.
146 Chapter 4 Book Shells
Contents Preface
Preface v This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears in
Chapter 1. Introduction vii the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter.
Chapter 2. Purpose of this Document 1
Chapter 3. Sample Mathematics and Text 3
1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics 3
R¯
2. Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt 3
3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 3
4. Section Headings 4
5. Tags 4
6. Lists 5
7. About the Bibliography 5
Appendix A. The First Appendix 7
Appendix. Afterword 9
Appendix. Bibliography 11
ii i v
CHAPTER 1 CHAPTER 2
The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduction This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
chapter appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered chapter. The displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section head-
primary difference between the preface and the introduction in this shell document ings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual
is that the introduction will appear in the table of contents and the page headings bibliography and an appendix.
for the introduction are automatically handled without the need for the markboth
TeX field. You may use either or both methods to create chapters at the beginning
of your document. You may also delete these preliminary chapters.
vii 1
148 Chapter 4 Book Shells
3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Env ironments You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a Small Caps, and Typewriter.
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
Lemma 1. Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the repre- CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
sentation correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
µ ¶
a1 1 You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large,
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment
1LAT is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
3
7
AMS Book or Monograph 149
Afterword Bibliography
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac- [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer , 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back matter, you can delete Mass Transfer, in print
the back matter TeX field and everything that follows it. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids , John
Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
9 11
150 Chapter 4 Book Shells
CT Contents
1 Introduction v
The Title of a Book
2 Purpose of this Document 1
3.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
ii
ETP (Electronic Technical Publishing) 151
CT Preface CN Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself containing
CT Introduction
\chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window
like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The markboth TeX
The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduction chapter
field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the correct page heading for the Preface
appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered chapter. The primary
portion of the document. The preface does not appear in the table of contents.
difference between the preface and the introduction in this shell document is that the
introduction will appear in the table of contents and the page headings for the intro-
duction are automatically handled without the need for the markboth TeX field. You
may use either or both methods to create chapters at the beginning of your document.
iv v
CHAPTER 1 – MANUSCRIPT
CN Chapter 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an
appendix.
vi 1
152 Chapter 4 Book Shells
CHAPTER 3 – MANUSCRIPT
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or
x2 + y2 = z 2
CN Chapter 3 and a short line below.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe-
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 3.1.
a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and A 3.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x converges
Environments
weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
2 3
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation A 3.4 Section Headings
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a 0 + +o , Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then heading levels are available, as described below.
where for the remainder R(z) we have Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub-
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) section heading.
¸∈CH (z ) ¸ ∈CH (z )
4 5
ETP (Electronic Technical Publishing) 153
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are cor- (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
rect only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap-
The buck stops here. Harry Truman A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your
• Bullet item 1.
country. John F Kennedy
• Bullet item 2.
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. — Second level bullet item.
A 3.6 Lists
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
6 7
CN Appendix A CT Bibliography
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
CT The First Appendix
York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
9 12
154 Chapter 4 Book Shells
Contents
Introduction 3
Afterword 11
v
Linda Gilbert Book 155
Preface Introduction
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduc-
itself containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this tion chapter appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered
appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnum- chapter. The primary difference between the preface and the introduction in
bered chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph this shell document is that the introduction will appear in the table of con-
sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The tents and the page headings for the introduction are automatically handled
preface does not appear in the table of contents. without the need for the markboth TeX field. You may use either or both
methods to create chapters at the beginning of your document. You may
also delete these preliminary chapters.
1 3
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
a manual bibliography and an appendix.
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i=1
ing above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below
are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 3
156 Chapter 4 Book Shells
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2.2) Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
heading.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ"} and
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsub-
f (1=z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z) . (2.3) subsubsection heading.
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that 2.5 Tags
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
= am + R(z), (2.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
2
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2 You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
m=0
Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.
where for the remainder R(z) we have You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIGRAP HIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
¸∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z)
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize,
|z| + r 1 + sin "
=
r
· O (|z| + r) =
sin "
· O (|z|) . large, Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ- Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do
for your country. John F Kennedy
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
2.7 About the Bibliography
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
another. George Bush bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
2.6 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Appendix Afterword
The First Appendix The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac-
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In
the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are
entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be
matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that follows
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
it.
9 11
Bibliography
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in
fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical con-
ditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
13
158 Chapter 4 Book Shells
Springer-Verlag Conference
This is page i
Printer: Opaque this ii
The Date
Springer-Verlag Conference 159
Contents Preface
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by
1 Purpose of this Document 1 itself containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this
appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an
2 Sample Mathematics and Text 3 unnumbered chapter. This style starts numbering in the document preface
1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 using lower case Roman characters. The TEX field at the beginning of the
R¯
2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 first paragraph in the next chapter changes number to arabic style and
3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 3 resets the page counter to one.
4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B Afterword 9
1 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
This is page 1
Printer: Opaque this 2 1. Purpose of this Document
This is page 3
Printer: Opaque this 4 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
functions.
4 Section Headings
3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
Environments Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four
additional heading levels are available, as described below.
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma
is a well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic
4.1 Subsection Heading
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. This text appears under a subsection heading.
6 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
1 References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical
conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Preface Organization
This textbook is intended for use by students of physics, physical chemistry, ECOOP’95 is organized by the department of Computer Science, Univeristy
and theoretical chemistry. The reader is presumed to have a basic knowledge of Århus and AITO (association Internationa pour les Technologie Object) in
of atomic and quantum physics at the level provided, for example, by the first cooperation with ACM/SIGPLAN.
few chapters in our book The Physics of Atoms and Quanta. The student of
physics will find here material which should be included in the basic education
of every physicist. This book should furthermore allow students to acquire an Executive Commitee
appreciation of the breadth and variety within the field of molecular physics and
Conference Chair: Ole Lehrmann Madsen (Århus University, DK)
its future as a fascinating area of research.
Program Chair: Walter Olthoff (DFKI GmbH, Germany)
For the student of chemistry, the concepts introduced in this book will provide
Organizing Chair: Jørgen Lindskov Knudsen ( Århus University,
a theoretical framework for that entire field of study. With the help of these con-
DK)
cepts, it is at least in principle possible to reduce the enormous body of empirical
Tutorials: Birger Møller-Pedersen
chemical knowledge to a few basic principles: those of quantum mechanics. In
(Norwegian Computing Center, Norway)
addition, modern physical methods whose fundamentals are introduced here are
Workshops: Eric Jul (University of Kopenhagen, Denmark)
becoming increasingly important in chemistry and now represent indispensable
tools for the chemist. As examples, we might mention the structural analysis of
complex organic compounds, spectroscopic investigation of very rapid reaction Program Commitee
processes or, as a practical application, the remote detection of pollutants in the
air. Conference Chair: Ole Lehrmann Madsen (Århus University, DK)
Program Chair: Walter Olthoff (DFKI GmbH, Germany)
Organizing Chair: Jørgen Lindskov Knudsen (Århus University,
DK)
April 1995 Walter Olthoff Tutorials: Birger Møller-Pedersen
Program Chair (Norwegian Computing Center, Norway)
ECOOP’95 Workshops: Eric Jul (University of Kopenhagen, Denmark)
Referees
V. Andreev P.C. Bosetti Del Buono
Bärwolff Braunschweig P. Dingus
E. Barrelet F.W. Büsser H. Duhm
H.P. Beck T. Carli J. Ebert
G. Bernardi A.B. Clegg S. Eichenberger
E. Binder G. Cozzika and others not included
P.C. Bosetti S. Dagoret in this sample...
Sponsoring Institutions
Ivar Ekeland 1 , Roger Temam2 Jeffrey Dean, David Grove, Craig Chambers,
Hamiltonian Mechanics Kim B. Bruce, and Elsa Bertino
Hamiltonian Mechanics unter besonderer Berücksichtigung der 1
Princeton University, Princeton NJ 08544, USA,
höhreren Lehranstalten : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1 I.Ekeland@princeton.edu,
Ivar Ekeland (Princeton University), Roger Temam (Université de WWW home page: http://users/~iekeland/web/welcome.html
2
Paris-Sud), Jeffrey Dean, David Grove, Craig Chambers (Università di Université de Paris-Sud, Laboratoire d’Analyse Numérique, Bâtiment 425,
Geova), Kim B. Bruce (Stanford University), Elisa Bertino (Digita F-91405 Orsay Cedex, France
Research Center)
Hamiltonian Mechanics2 : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 7
Abstract. The abstract should summarize the contents of the paper
Ivar Ekeland, Roger Temam using at least 70 and at most 150 words. It will be set in 9-point font
size and be inset 1.0 cm from the right and left margins. There will be
Author Index : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 13 two blank lines before and after the Abstract. . . .
Subject Index : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 17
1 Fixed-Period Problems: The Sublinear Case
With this chapter, the preliminaries are over, and we begin the search for periodic
solutions to Hamiltonian systems. All this will be done in the convex case; that
is, we shall study the boundary-value problem
ẋ = JH 0( t; x )
x(0) = x( T )
2 3
h2 1 2 h2 1 2
à (hu1 ) ≤ k u1 k 2 + ku 1 k : (11)
2 ¸ 2 ±0
¡ ¢
If we choose ± close enough to ± , the quantity 1¸ + ±10 will be negative, and
0
Fig. 1. This is the caption of the figure displaying a white eagle and a white horse on we end up with
a snow field à (hu1 ) < 0 for h 6= 0 small : (12)
On the other hand, we check directly that à (0) = 0. This shows that 0 cannot
Theorem 1 tells us that if ¸ + ° < 0, the boundary-value problem: be a minimizer of à , not even a local one. So u 6= 0 and u 6= ¤ −1
o (0) = 0. t
u
4 5
Table 1. This is the example table taken out of The TEXbook, p. 246 Assume also that H is C 2 , and H 00 (t; x) is positive definite everywhere. Then
there is a sequence xk , k ∈ IN, of kT -periodic solutions of the system
Year World population
ẋ = J H 0 (t; x) (27)
8000 B.C. 5,000,000
50 A.D. 200,000,000 such that, for every k ∈ IN, there is some po ∈ IN with:
1650 A.D. 500,000,000
1945 A.D. 2,300,000,000 p ≥ p o ⇒ x pk 6= x k : (28)
1980 A.D. 4,400,000,000
t
u
Example 1 (External forcing). Consider the system:
Lemma 1. Assume that H is C 2 on IR2 n \{0} and that H 00 (x ) is non-degenerate
ẋ = J H (x) + f (t )
0
(29)
for any x 6= 0. Then any local minimizer x
e of à has minimal period T .
where the Hamiltonian H is (0; b∞ )-subquadratic, and the forcing term is a
Proof. We know that e e + » for some constant » ∈ IR2n , is a T -periodic
x , or x
distribution on the circle:
solution of the Hamiltonian system:
d ¡ ¢
ẋ = JH 0 (x ) : f= F + fo with F ∈ L 2 IR=T ZZ ; IR2n ; (30)
(20) dt
RT
There is no loss of generality in ¡ taking » = ¢0. So à (x) ≥ à (e x ) for all x
e in where f o := T −1 o f ( t)dt . For instance,
some neighbourhood of x in W 1;2 IR=T ZZ ; IR 2n . X
But this index is precisely the index i T (e x ) of the T -periodic solution xe over f ( t) = ± k» ; (31)
the interval (0; T ), as defined in Sect. 2.6. So k ∈IN
iT (e
x) = 0 : (21) where ± k is the Dirac mass at t = k and » ∈ IR2n is a constant, fits the pre-
scription. This means that the system ẋ = J H 0 (x ) is being excited by a series
Now if x
e has a lower period, T =k say, we would have, by Corollary 31: of identical shocks at interval T .
i T (e
x ) = ikT =k (e
x) ≥ k iT =k (e
x) + k − 1 ≥ k − 1 ≥ 1 : (22) Definition 1. Let A∞ (t ) and B∞ (t ) be symmetric operators in IR2n , depending
continuously on t ∈ [0; T ], such that A∞ ( t) ≤ B ∞ (t ) for al l t.
This would contradict (21), and thus cannot happen. t
u A Borelian function H : [0; T ] × IR2 n → IR is cal led (A∞ ; B ∞ )-subquadratic
at infinity if there exists a function N (t; x ) such that:
Notes and Comments. The results in this section are a refined version of [1]; the
minimality result of Proposition 14 was the first of its kind. 1
H (t; x) = (A∞ ( t) x; x ) + N (t; x ) (32)
To understand the nontriviality conditions, such ¡as the one in formula
¢ (16), 2
one may think of a one-parameter family xT , T ∈ 2¼! −1 ; 2 ¼b −1 of periodic
∞
∀t ; N (t; x ) is convex with respect to x (33)
solutions, x T (0) = xT (T ), with xT going away to infinity when T → 2 ¼! −1 ,
which is the period of the linearized system at 0. N ( t; x ) ≥ n (k xk) with n ( s)s−1 → +∞ as s → +∞ (34)
1
Theorem 1 (Ghoussoub-Preiss). Assume H ( t; x ) is (0; ")-subquadratic at ∃ c ∈ IR : H (t; x ) ≤
(B∞ (t )x; x) + c ∀x : (35)
infinity for all " > 0, and T -periodic in t 2
If A∞ ( t) = a∞ I and B ∞ (t ) = b ∞I , with a ∞ ≤ b ∞ ∈ IR, we shal l say that
H (t; ·) is convex ∀t (23) H is (a ∞ ; b∞)-subquadratic at infinity. As an example, the function k xk® , with
1 ≤ ® < 2, is (0 ; ")-subquadratic at infinity for every " > 0. Similarly, the
H (·; x) is T −periodic ∀x (24) Hamiltonian
1 2 ®
H (t; x) ≥ n (kx k) with n (s)s −1
→ ∞ as s → ∞ (25) H (t; x) = k kk k + kx k (36)
2
"
∀" > 0 ; ∃c : H (t; x) ≤ kxk 2 + c : (26) is (k; k + ")-subquadratic for every " > 0. Note that, if k < 0, it is not convex.
2
Notes and Comments. The first results on subharmonics were obtained by Ra- Author Index
binowitz in [5], who showed the existence of infinitely many subharmonics both
in the subquadratic and superquadratic case, with suitable growth conditions
on H 0 . Again the duality approach enabled Clarke and Ekeland in [2] to treat
the same problem in the convex-subquadratic case, with growth conditions on Abt I. 7 Cozzika G. 9
H only. Ahmed T. 3 Criegee L. 11
Recently, Michalek and Tarantello (see [3] and [4]) have obtained lower bound Andreev V. 24 Cvach J. 27
on the number of subharmonics of period kT , based on symmetry considerations Andrieu B. 27
and on pinching estimates, as in Sect. 5.2 of this article. Arpagaus M. 34 Dagoret S. 28
Dainton J.B. 19
Babaev A. 25 Dann A.W.E. 22
References Bärwolff A. 33 Dau W.D. 16
Bán J. 17 Deffur E. 11
1. Clarke, F., Ekeland, I.: Nonlinear oscillations and boundary-value problems for Baranov P. 24 Delcourt B. 26
Hamiltonian systems. Arch. Rat. Mech. Anal. 78 (1982) 315—333 Barrelet E. 28 Buono Del A. 28
2. Clarke, F., Ekeland, I.: Solutions périodiques, du période donnée, des équations Bartel W. 11 Devel M. 26
hamiltoniennes. Note CRAS Paris 287 (1978) 1013—1015 Bassler U. 28 De Roeck A. 11
3. Michalek, R., Tarantello, G.: Subharmonic solutions with prescribed minimal period Beck H.P. 35 Dingus P. 27
for nonautonomous Hamiltonian systems. J. Diff. Eq. 72 (1988) 28—55 Behrend H.-J. 11 Dollfus C. 35
4. Tarantello, G.: Subharmonic solutions for Hamiltonian systems via a ZZ F pseudoin- Berger Ch. 1 Dreis H.B. 2
dex theory. Annali di Matematica Pura (to appear) Bergstein H. 1 Drescher A. 8
5. Rabinowitz, P.: On subharmonic solutions of a Hamiltonian system. Comm. Pure Bernardi G. 28 Düllmann D. 13
Appl. Math. 33 (1980) 609—633 Bernet R. 34 Dünger O. 13
Duhm H. 12
Besançon M. 9
Biddulph P. 22
Ebbinghaus R. 8
Binder E. 11 Eberle M. 12
Bischoff A. 33
Ebert J. 32
Blobel V. 13 Ebert T.R. 19
Borras K. 8
Efremenko V. 23
Bosetti P.C. 2 Egli S. 35
Boudry V. 27 Eichenberger S. 35
Brasse F. 11 Eichler R. 34
Braun U. 2
Eisenhandler E. 20
Braunschweig A. 1 Ellis N.N. 3
Brisson V. 26 Ellison R.J. 22
Büngener L. 13 Elsen E. 11
Bürger J. 11 Evrard E. 4
Büsser F.W. 13
Buniatian A. 11,37 Favart L. 4
Buschhorn G. 25 Feeken D. 13
Felst R . 11
Campbell A.J. 1 Feltesse A. 9
Carli T. 25 Fensome I.F. 3
Charles F. 28 Ferrarotto F. 31
Clarke D. 5 Flamm K. 11
Clegg A.B. 18 Flauger W. 11
Colombo M. 8 Flieser M. 25
Courau A. 26 Flügge G. 2
Coutures Ch. 9 Fomenko A. 24
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg LLNCS 165
14
Physics — Monograph
(Editorials C. Ascheron, H. J. Kölsch)
The Date
Springer-Verlag
Berlin Heidelberg New York
London Paris Tokyo
Hong Kong Barcelona
Budapest
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Physics Monograph 167
Preface Contents
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears 1. Purpose of this Document : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 1
in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered
chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the 2. Sample Mathematics and Text : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : 3
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface 2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
R¯
does not appear in the table of contents. 2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . 4
2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
place(s), Firstname Surname 2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
month year Firstname Surname 2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and 2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
displayed mathematics in do cuments. It also illustrates five levels of section
P∞
headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for The expression a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
i =1
a manual bibliography and an appendix.
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i =1
x 2 + y 2 = z2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
for z → ∞ inside a cone ¡" = { z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 2.5 Tags
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ ¡" . (2.2) You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then ¡ " → ¡ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ ¡"} and
Slanted , Small Caps, and Typewriter.
f (1 =z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (2.3) You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIG RAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
Fix z ∈ ¡ " , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize,
1
Z
f ( ¸) d¸
1
X 1
Z m
(¸ − z0 ) d¸
large, Large , LARGE , huge and Huge .
= am + R (z), (2.4) Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ-
2¼i C r(z ) (¸ − z )
2
m=0
2 ¼i C r(z)
2
(¸ − z ) ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
where for the remainder R(z ) we have The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
|R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C r(z ) ¸∈C r( z ) your country. John F Kennedy
|z | + r 1 + sin " I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) . It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or an-
r sin "
other. George Bush
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
(2.4) implies
2.6 Lists
d
f (1 =z) = a1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ ¡ "=2 , Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
dz
can extend four levels deep, look like this:
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z .
1. Numbered list item 1.
2. Numbered list item 2.
2.4 Section Headings a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around
additional heading levels are available, as described below. the level indicator.
b) Another numbered list item under a list item. A. The First Appendix
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
• Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item. The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in. created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
Springer-Verlag Heidelberg Physics Monograph 169
Afterword References
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac- 1. N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back 3537-3550
matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that follows 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
it. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
5. Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
170 Chapter 4 Book Shells
Springer-Verlag Multi-authored
This is page i
Printer: Opaque this ii
The Date
Springer-Verlag Multi-authored 171
Contents Preface
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by
1 Purpose of this Document 1 itself containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this
appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an
2 Sample Mathematics and Text 3 unnumbered chapter. This style starts numbering in the document preface
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 using lower case Roman characters. The TEX field at the beginning of the
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 first paragraph in the next chapter changes number to arabic style and
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 4 resets the page counter to one.
2.4 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.4.1 Subsection Heading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.5 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.6 Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.7 About the Bibliography . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
B Afterword 9
B.1 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
This is page 1
Printer: Opaque this 2 1. Purpose of this Document
1
Purpose of this Document
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line
and displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of
section headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes
entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
172 Chapter 4 Book Shells
This is page 3
Printer: Opaque this 4 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
R¯ that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z .
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or 2.4 Section Headings
table of contents entries.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. additional heading levels are available, as described below.
2.4.1 Subsection Heading (a) A numbered list item under a list item.
This text appears under a subsection heading. The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe-
Subsubsection Heading ses around the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
Subsubsubsection Heading A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
• Bullet item 1.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
tion heading. • Bullet item 2.
2.6 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
Appendix A Appendix B
The First Appendix Afterword
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword,
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. acknowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item.
In the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they
are entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the
back matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that
follows it.
B.1 References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical
conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
Springer-Verlag Single-authored
This is page i
Printer: Opaque this ii
The Date
Springer-Verlag Single-authored 175
Contents Preface
B Afterword 9
References 11
This is page 1
Printer: Opaque this 2 1. Purpose of this Document
1
Purpose of this Document
This is page 3
Printer: Opaque this 4 2. Sample Mathematics and Text
2 as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, such as the one just above. Four 2. Numbered list item 2.
additional heading levels are available, as described below.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
2.4.1 Subsection Heading screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parenthe-
This text appears under a subsection heading. ses around the level indicator.
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
Subsubsection Heading
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
Subsubsubsection Heading
• Bullet item 1.
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
• Bullet item 2.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading. This text appears under a subsubsubsubsec-
tion heading. — Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
2.5 Tags · Fourth and final level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
the lead-in.
Slanted , Small Caps , and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize,
2.7 About the Bibliography
large, Large, LARGE , huge
and Huge.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
The buck stops here. Harry Truman together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can
do for your country. John F Kennedy
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or
another. George Bush
2.6 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
which can extend four levels deep, look like this:
Springer-Verlag Single-authored 177
Appendix A Appendix B
The First Appendix Afterword
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword,
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. acknowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item.
In the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they
are entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the
back matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that
follows it.
This is page 11
Printer: Opaque this
References
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical
conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6 A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
Publishers’ page
World Scientific Book 9.00x6.00 179
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6 A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
Preface
vii
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6 A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
Chapter 1
Afterword 9
Bibliography 11
ix 1
180 Chapter 4 Book Shells
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6 A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
4 B ook Title
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
and a short line below. where for the remainder R(z ) we have
A long line above may depend on your margins
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
¸∈C r( z) ¸∈ Cr( z)
sin 2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
|z | + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing r sin "
for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
1L
AT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. (2.4) implies
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6 A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
2.6 Lists
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z . ¤ (1) Numbered list item 1.
(2) Numbered list item 2.
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
2.4 Section Headings The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the
screen appearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four around the level indicator.
additional heading levels are available, as described below. (b) Another numbered list item under a list item.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
2.4.1 Subsection Heading A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
This text appears under a subsection heading.
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ- Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
The buck stops here. Harry Truman together. Here is an example: [2; 3; 4].
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you
can do for your country. John F Kennedy
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one
way or another. George Bush
World Scientific Book 9.00x6.00 181
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6 A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
Appendix A
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword,
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. acknowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item.
In the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they
are entered in the table of contents. If you are not using anything in the
back matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything that
follows it.
7 9
A p ril 28, 200 3 16:10 W S PC/ Bo ok Trim S ize f or 9in x 6in Bo ok -WorldSc ie ntificBo ok 9x 6
Bibliography
11
182 Chapter 4 Book Shells
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2 July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
Publishers’ page
World Scientific Book 9.75x6.50 183
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2 July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
Preface
vii
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2 July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
Chapter 1
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and dis-
Preface vii played mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings
and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibli-
1. Purpose of this Document 1 ography and an appendix.
Afterword 9
Bibliography 11
ix 1
184 Chapter 4 Book Shells
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2 July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
4 Book Title
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2 July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
2.5 Tags Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted ,
Small Caps, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD, 2.7 About the Bibliography
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibli-
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
ography has no relationship to the previous text. The typesetting specification does
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large,
not display citations and they are not used in this sample document.
Large , and LARGE .
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment
is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
2.6 Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
extend four levels deep, look like this:
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
— Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
World Scientific Book 9.75x6.50 185
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2 July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
Appendix A
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowledge-
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. ments, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back matter,
chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of
contents. If you are not using anything in the back matter, you can delete the back
matter TeX field and everything that follows it.
7 9
July 2 3, 2004 14:45 WSP C/Book Trim Size for 9.75in x 6.5in swp000 2
Bibliography
N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
1963.
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
11
Exam and Syllabus Shells
Exam and syllabus shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in one of two
base document classes—article.cls or report.cls. Exam shells usually have
limited front and back matter, if any.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and see page 4 for
page layout diagrams for the base document classes.
188 Chapter 5 Exam and Syllabus Shells
Assignment
1. Use the definition of derivative to compute the derivative of the following functions:
(a) f (z) = z 3 + 2z + 1
(b) g(x) = 1=(3x2)
√
(c) °(t) = 3
t
2. Use problem 1 from assignment 3 and the definition of derivative to show that (f +g)0 =
f 0 + g0 .
3. Do the following exercises from the text:
(a) Suppose f and g are inverse functions and g0 (x) is known. Use chain rule and the
fact that f and g are inverse functions to find f 0 (x) in terms of g0 and f:
(b) Suppose E(x) and L(x) are inverse functions and L0 (x) = 1x . Use the above result
to find E0 (x).
5. Simultaneous tangent lines. Sketch the graphs of f (x) = −(x2 + 1) and g(x) = (x −1)2 .
Find the equations of the lines that are tangent to both curves simultaneously.
1
Bolton Institute 189
Bolton Institute
–2–
3. Answer 4 questions.
Materials required:
1. Answer Books
2. Formulae Books
190 Chapter 5 Exam and Syllabus Shells
Class Announcement
ClassAnnouncement
CAPS
Tutoring by appointment:
1. Register in person: Zimmerman Library, 3rd Floor
2. Call for appointment: 277-7205
Walk-in Lab: Centennial Library, 2nd floor down
MW 9:30-1:30 and 3-6
TTh 9-12 and 2-6
F 9-1:30
MEP Study Group
Tapy Hall room 218
TTh 2-4
The Study Group leader can tell you how to obtain a mentor for individual help.
MR&R
Tutoring TTh 9-6 by appointment
Student Union Building, Suite 200
277-6896
Class Handout 191
Class Handout
In this note we give a construction of an algebraic closure of an arbitrary field. This construction is due
to Emil Artin. Zorn’s lemma is not invoked in this proof, unlike the one given in class. We do indirectly
use Zorn’s lemma since we require the existence of maximal ideals inside arbitrary commutative rings with
identity, which does require Zorn’s lemma. However, we avoid the use of cardinal arithmetic.
Proof. Suppose we have constructed extension fields F ⊆ F 1 ⊆ F2 ⊆ · · · such that for all n , (1) Fn +1 is
algebraic over Fn , and (2) every nonconstant f (x ) ∈ Fn [x ] has a root in F n+1 . Let K be the union of the
F n for all n. Since the {Fn } form an ascending chain of fields, K is a field extension of F . Also, since being
algebraic is a transitive property, we see that every F n is algebraic over F , so K is also algebraic over F . We
claim that K is algebraically closed, which will then show K is an algebraic closure of F . To see this, take
a nonconstant g (x ) ∈ K [x]. Since there are only finitely many coefficients of g (x), we see that g (x) ∈ F n [x]
for some n . Then g (x) has a root in Fn +1 ⊆ K . This shows that K is algebraically closed.
We now inductively construct the fields F n . Suppose that F ⊆ F1 ⊆ · · · ⊆ Fn have been constructed.
We then construct Fn +1 . Consider the polynomial ring F n [{x f }] in the variables xf , one variable for each
monic irreducible polynomial f (x) ∈ F n [x]. Let I be the ideal of Fn [{ x f }] generated by {f (x f )} for each
such f . Then I 6= Fn [{ x f }], which is proved in the lemma below. Set R = F n [{x f }]=I , a nonzero ring. Let
M be a maximal ideal of R , and finally set F n+1 = R=M . We have a sequence of ring homomorphisms
Since the map Fn → F n+1 is not the zero map (as 1 7→ 1), this map is 1 − 1, so we may assume Fn ⊆ F n+1 .
The ring F n+ 1 = R=M is a field since M is a maximal ideal of R . Furthermore, since the last two maps
above are onto, if a f is the image in F n+ 1 of xf then Fn +1 = Fn [{ af }]. Now f (x f ) → 0 in R since f ( xf ) ∈ I .
Thus f (x f ) → 0 in Fn +1 . But f (x f ) → f (a f ), so f (a f ) = 0. This shows that each a f is algebraic over Fn .
Hence as Fn +1 is generated over F n by the af , Fn +1 is algebraic over F n . Finally, if g( x) ∈ F n [x ] then let
f (x ) be a monic irreducible factor of g (x ). Then f ( x) has a root in F n +1 , namely a f . Thus g (x ) has a root
in F n +1 . This completes the proof of the properties of F n+1 .
The last step in the proof is to demonstrate that the ideal I defined above is nonzero. We do this in the
following lemma.
Lemma 2 Let F be a field and F [{x i }] the polynomial ring in the variables xi , where i ranges over some
set I. Suppose for each i that f i (x ) is a monic irreducible polynomial over F . Then the ideal I of F [{ xi }]
generated by f i (x i) for each i is a proper ideal.
Proof. Suppose I = F [{xi }]. Then there is an n and polynomials g 1; : : : ; gn such that
1 = f1 (x i 1) g1 (x i1 ; : : : ; xi n ) + · ·· + f n (x i n )gn (xi 1 ; : : : ; x i n ):
For simplicity we shall write xm in place of x im f or each m . We can assume that all the gm involve
only the variables x1 ; : : : ; xn by increasing the number of f m if necessary in an equation of this type.
Suppose n is chosen to be minimal such that we have such an expression involving n of the x i . If
S = F [x1 ; : : : ; xn ] then (f1 (x 1 ); : : : ; fn ( xn )) = S . Let R = F [x 1 ; : : : ; x n−1]. By minimality of n we
have ( f1 (x 1 ); : : : ; f n −1 (x n−1 )) 6= R. Let us view the above equation as taking place in S = R[xn ]. If
c m = fm (xm ) ∈ R we have J = (c1 ; : : : ; cn− 1 ; f n (x n )) = S . Now set I0 = (c1 ; : : : ; cn −1 ) ⊆ R. So
J = ( I; f n (xn )). There are ring homomorphisms
(R=I 0 )[xn ]
R[x n ] −→ ( R=I0 )[x n ] −→
(f n (x n ))
where f n (x n ) is the image of f n (x n ) in (R=I 0 )[x]. Since R=I0 is a nonzero ring and fn (xn ) is not a unit (as
f n is monic of degree at least 1) we see that this last ring is nonzero. Hence the kernel of the composite
homomorphism is a proper ideal of S . But J lies in this kernel, so J 6= S . This contradiction shows our
original I is a proper ideal of F [{xi }], proving the lemma.
1
192 Chapter 5 Exam and Syllabus Shells
Exam Title
The Date
1
SW Exam #1 - 8.5 x 14 Page 193
Exam Title
The Date
1
194 Chapter 5 Exam and Syllabus Shells
SW Exam #2
1
SW Exam #3 195
SW Exam #3
Exam Title
The Date
Instructions. Replace this text by the instructions to the students. The fixed vertical spaces for each
question were entered using Insert Spacing, Vertical, and then choosing the Custom option. To adjust the
amount of space set aside for each question, place the insertion point to the right of the vertical space (the
large green down arrow that’s visible at the end of each question when View Invisibles is turned on).
1. The first question.
1
196 Chapter 5 Exam and Syllabus Shells
Syllabus
2
Other Document Shells
With one exception, the shells in this category are based on the typesetting specifica-
tions set in one of three base document classes—article.cls, book.cls, or re-
port.cls. The shells produce both short documents (faxes, letters, memos, press
releases, resumes, and slides) and long (books and reports). Obviously, the structure and
elements in these document shells differ widely. Many of the shells were designed for
earlier versions of the program.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and see page 4 for
page layout diagrams for the base document classes.
198 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Math 123, Section 4 Fall 2001 You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large, LARGE,
Assignment #2: Due October 9 huge and Huge .
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches to
mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations.
1 Mathematics in This Shell Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short
P∞ quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X The buck stops here. Harry Truman
ai (1)
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country. John F
i=1
Kennedy
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation ??. I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex P subset of H , T a+ nonexpansive self map of C . It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
SupposePthat as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k , and ° n = ∞ k =0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C ,
∞
A n x = k= 0 a n;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and below a display 4.1 List Environments
depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom left of the screen.
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2 1. List item 1
and a short line below.
2. List item 2
A long line above may depend on your margins
(a) A list item under a list item.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows a lower case
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic
regardless of the margins. character surrounded by parentheses.
(b) Just another list item under a list item.
2 Features of This Shell i. Third level list item under a list item.
A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
This is some introductory text.
• Bullet item 1
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections. — Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
3.1 Subsection · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that term. Double
click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
3.1.1 Subsubsection
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
4 Tags
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small Caps, and
Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and CALLIGRAPHIC.
Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
1 2
Assorted - Math Scratchpad 199
1
200 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Book - SW Book #1
Contents
Afterword 17
3
Book - SW Book #1 201
Preface
Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created us ing a TeX field in a paragraph by
itself containing \cha pter* {Pref ace}. When the document is loaded,
this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually
an unnumbered chapter. T he mark both TeX field at the beginning of
this paragraph sets t he correct page heading for the Preface portion of
the document. The preface does not appear in the table of contents.
Purp ose of this Document
5 7
Chapter 2
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
1 A
L TEX au tom atically selects the spacing d epen ding on th e s urroun ding line
lengths.
9
202 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy
spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. theorem (2.4) implies
d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
R¯ dz
M athematics in section heads ® ln J@J that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Lem m a 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C + . If f (z ) admits the Subsubsubsection Heading This tex t appears under a subsubsub-
representation µ ¶ section heading.
a1 1
f (z ) = a 0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection H eading This text appears under a sub-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then subsubsubsection heading.
a 1 = − lim z f (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ " .
2 0
(2.2)
Pr oof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and Tags
f (1=z ) = a0 + a 1z + o (z) . (2.3)
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
Fix z ∈ Γ " , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans
radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follow s from (2.3) that Serif, Slanted, Sma ll C aps, and T ypewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLA CK BO AR D
Z Z
(¸ − z 0 ) m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 BOLD, CALLI GR AP H I C, and fraktur. Note that blackboard b old
= am + R(z), (2.4) and calligraphic are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2
2¼ i C H (z) (¸ − z )
2
m=0
through Z.
where for the remainder R(z) we have You can apply the size tags tiny , scrip tsize , footnotesize , small, normal-
Lists
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists,
which can ex tend four levels deep, lo ok like this:
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Afterword
App endix A
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword,
ack nowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar
item. In the back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number,
but they are entered in the table of contents.
15 17
Bibliography
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
in fluid hy drogen at rocket chamb er pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lew is number under supercritical
conditions”, Int. J. H eat Mass Transfer, in print
19
204 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Book - SW Book #2
Contents
A T he First A ppendix 13
July 19, 2004
A fterword 15
CONTENTS 3
Book - SW Book #2 205
Preface
Chapter 2
matics gins
A long line ab ove may depend on your mar-
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics,
while t he numbered equation sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
X ∞
ai (2.1)
i=1 as will a long line b elow. This line is long
is displayed and automatically numb ered as enough to illustrate the spacing for mathemat-
equation 2.1. ical displays, regardless of the margins.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed
bounded convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive
self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k →
P∞ +
0 for each k , and ° n = k=0 (an;kP
+1 − a n;k ) →
0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k=0 an;k T kx
∞
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other bold and calligraphic are correct only when ap- (b) Another numbered list item under
plied to uppercase letters A through Z. a list item.
Theorem-like Environments d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, i. Third level numbered list item
dz footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large,
as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, under a list item.
A number of theorem-like environments is avail- LARGE, huge and Huge. A. Fourth and final level of num-
able. The following lemma is a well-known fact that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for Following is a group of paragraphs marked bered list items allowed.
on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of z. as Body Quote. This environment is appropri-
analytic functions. ate for a short quotation or a sequence of short • Bullet item 1.
quotations.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in • Bullet item 2.
C+ . If f (z) admits the representation Section Headings The buck stops here. Harry Tru-
µ ¶ man — Second level bullet item.
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , Ask not what your country can do ∗ Third level bullet item.
z z Use the Section tag for major sections, such as
the one just above. Four additional heading for you; ask what you can do for · Fourth and final level bullet
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = levels are available, as described below. your country. John F. Kennedy item.
{z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
Description List Each description list item
a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (2.2) It’s no exaggeration to say the un- has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
Subsection Heading decideds could go one way or an- click the lead-in box to enter or customize
This text appears under a subsection heading. other. George H. W. Bush
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = the text of the lead-in.
{z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and I did not have sexual relations with
Subsubsection Heading Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aborig-
that woman, Miss Lewinsky. Bill
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (2.3) inal legends.
This text appears under a subsubsection head- Clinton
ing. They misunderestimated me. George
Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− :
|¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius W. Bush
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that Subsubsubsection Heading This text ap- About the Bibliography
pears under a subsubsubsection heading.
Z
1 f (¸) d¸ Following the text of this article is a short
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2 =
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This
Lists manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
1
X Z m text appears under a subsubsubsubsection head- phy has no relationship to the previous text,
1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
am 2 + R(z), (2.4) ing. Bullet, numbered and description list environ- but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5]
m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) ments are available. Lists, which can extend and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
four levels deep, look like this: appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
where for the remainder R(z) we have
Afterword
App endix A The back mat ter often includes one or more
of an index, an afterword, acknowledgements,
a bibliography, a colophon, or any other simi-
lar item. In the back matter, chapters do not
pro duce a chapter number, but they are en-
tered in the table of contents.
Bibliography
BIBLIOGRAPHY 17
208 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Book - SW Book #3
CONTENTS
Afterword 17
CONTENTS 3
Book - SW Book #3 209
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance
paragraph by itself containing \chapter*{Preface}. When of in-line and displayed mathematics in documents. It also il-
the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a lustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds of lists.
normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliogra-
markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the phy and an appendix.
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document.
The preface does not appear in the table of contents.
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the num-
bered equation
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i=1
x2 + y2 = z 2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
R¯
Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that math-
ematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting
styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
Section Headings
Lists
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appen- The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an
dices can be created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. afterword, acknowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or
any other similar item. In the back matter, chapters do not
produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of
contents.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop be-
havior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under su-
percritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
BIBLIOGRAPHY 19
212 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Book - SW Book #4
CONTENTS
Afterword 15
A. U. Thor
CONTENTS 3
Book - SW Book #4 213
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears displayed mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section
in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered headings and three kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a
chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the manual bibliography and an appendix.
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface
does not appear in the table of contents.
X
∞
ai (2.1)
i=1
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z) admits the repre- Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection
sentation heading.
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub-
subsection heading.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and 2.5 Tags
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (2.3)
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that
Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.
Z X1 Z m You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am + R(z), (2.4) C ALLIG RAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
m=0 are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
where for the remainder R(z) we have
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge .
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ-
¸∈CH ( z) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin " ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do
(2.4) implies for your country. John F Kennedy
d I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for z. another. George Bush
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the
item. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the
lead-in.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
AFTERWORD BIBLIOGRAPHY
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, ac- [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
knowledgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the Sons, New York, 1963.
back matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered
in the table of contents. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermody-
namics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Book - SW Book #5
CONTENTS
1 Purpose of this Document 7
Afterword 15
Sample SW Book #5
A. U. Thor
5 7
8 9
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.
10 11
Proof. Change z for 1=z . Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and You can apply the size tags t i ny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (2.3)
Large, LARGE, huge and Huge.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (2.3) that
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Z 1
X Z m Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z) , (2.4) your country. John F Kennedy
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
where for the remainder R(z) we have It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another.
George Bush
|R(z)| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsub- Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
section heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
13 15
17
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
220 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Book - SW Book #6
CONTENTS
1 Purpose of this Document 7
A. U. Thor
3
Book - SW Book #6 221
5 7
Following is a group of paragraphs marked Description List Each description list item
as Body Quote. This environment is appro- has a lead-in followed by the item. Double-
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, priate for a short quotation or a sequence of click the lead-in box to enter or cus-
dz short quotations. tomize the text of the lead-in.
as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
The buck stops here. Harry Tru- Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Abo-
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1=z back for man riginal legends.
z.
Ask not what your country can do
for you; ask what you can do for
your country. John F. Kennedy About the Bibliography
Section Headings
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon Following the text of this article is a short
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as It’s no exaggeration to say the un- manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra-
the one just above. Four additional heading decideds could go one way or an- phy has no relationship to the previous text,
levels are available, as described below. other. George Bush but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5]
and [6]. You can also have multiple citations
appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
Subsection Heading
Lists
This text appears under a subsection heading.
Bullet, numbered and description list environ-
ments are available. Lists, which can extend
Subsubsection Heading four levels deep, look like this:
This text appears under a subsubsection head-
1. Numbered list item 1.
ing.
2. Numbered list item 2.
Subsubsubsection Heading This text ap-
pears under a subsubsubsection heading. (a) A numbered list item under a list
item.
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This The typeset appearance for
text appears under a subsubsubsubsection this level is often different from the
heading. screen appearance. The typeset ap-
pearance often uses parentheses
around the level indicator.
Tags (b) Another numbered list item under
a list item.
You can apply the logical markup tag Empha- i. Third level numbered list item
sized. under a list item.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold,
A. Fourth and final level num-
Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, Small
bered list item.
Caps, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics • Bullet item 1.
only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIGRAPHIC , and fraktur. Note that • Bullet item 2.
blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
only for uppercase letters A through Z. — Second level bullet item.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, ∗ Third level bullet item.
footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large,
· Fourth and final level bul-
LARGE, huge and Huge. let item.
10 11
13 15
Book - SW Book #6 223
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional
Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
17
224 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Fax - SW Fax #1
Fax Transmission
No. of pages incl. this one: 1
Here is the content of the fax memo. This fax includes contact information, the number
of pages, special instructions, and the fax message itself. Complete the fields with the
information you need.
The fields in the fax shell can be left blank but should not be deleted. The Subject field
must remain, and must immediately precede the body of the fax.
encl: None
Fax - SW Fax #2 225
Fax - SW Fax #2
Here is the content of the fax memo. This fax includes contact information, the number
of pages, special instructions, and the fax message itself. Complete the fields with the
information you need.
The fields in the fax shell can be left blank but should not be deleted. The Subject field
must remain, and must immediately precede the body of the fax.
cc: Ron Programmer
encl: None
Fax - SW Fax #3
Fax Transmission
A Fax
Here is the content of the fax memo. This fax includes contact information, the number
of pages, special instructions, and the fax message itself. Complete the fields with the
information you need.
The fields in the fax shell can be left blank but should not be deleted. The Subject field
must remain, and must immediately precede the body of the fax.
cc: Ron Programmer
encl: None
Letter - Informal 227
Letter - Informal
June 3, 2001 equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
beyond those covered in the manual.
Dear Simon,
Best regards,
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci-
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and Jack
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming P.S. If you need additional information, please let me know.
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
information you need.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
228 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
MacKichan Software, Inc. Bainbridge Island, WA 98110 The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
Michele Well, Analyst Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
information you need.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
June 3, 2001 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
John Brown undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
506 Blackhawk Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
Las Cruces, NM 88001 the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
Dear John, for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci-
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
beyond those covered in the manual.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and Sincerely,
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. Michele Well
gp/MW
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating CC: Tom Smith
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print- George Wayne
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad- P.S. If you need additional information, please call.
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
Letter - SW Letter #1 229
Letter - SW Letter #1
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
Bainbridge Island, WA 98110 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
October 29, 2001 undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
Elizabeth Smith the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
Best Writing and Graphics, Inc. graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
1234 Any Street for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
Chicago, IL 60613 equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
Subject: Scientific WorkPlace solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
beyond those covered in the manual.
Dear Elizabeth,
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci- Best regards,
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and Barry MacKichan
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming President
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: John, Jack, George
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to encl: Sample documents
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
information you need.
230 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Letter - SW Letter #2
MacKichan Software, Inc. Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
information you need.
February 28, 2001 Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Marcus Phillips
Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
ABC Development Corporation
the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
1234 Any Street
graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
Chicago, IL 60613
for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
Subject: Scientific WorkPlace equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
Dear Marcus, beyond those covered in the manual.
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci- Best regards,
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming Barry MacKichan
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This President
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: Jon, Ron, Larry
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. encl: Specimen
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Bainbridge Island, WA 98110
Letter - SW Letter #3 231
Letter - SW Letter #3
MacKichan Software, Inc. Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Bainbridge Island, WA 98110 information you need.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
August 24, 2001 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
Sarah Jones
the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
ABC BioMedical Corporation
graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
1234 Any Street
for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
Chicago, IL 60613
equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
Subject: Scientific WorkPlace solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
beyond those covered in the manual.
Dear Sarah,
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci- Best regards,
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and
Barry MacKichan
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming
President
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: Steve, Carol, Darel
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. encl: Sample Files
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
232 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Letter - SW Letter #4
MacKichan Software, Inc. Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
information you need.
October 9, 2001 Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
Richard Julian undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Best Mathematics Books, Inc. Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
1234 Any Street the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
Las Cruces, NM 88011 graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
SUBJECT: Scientific WorkPlace equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
Dear Richard, beyond those covered in the manual.
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci- Best regards,
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming Barry MacKichan
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This President
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful cc: Elizabeth, Sarah
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX. encl: Sample Files
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Bainbridge Island, WA 98110
Letter - SW Letter #5 233
Letter - SW Letter #5
Letter - SW Letter #6
MacKichan Software, Inc. Document Manager, and customizing your installation. A full index simplifies finding the
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 information you need.
Bainbridge Island, WA 98110
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use
July 24, 2001 the built-in computer algebra system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing
directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book is organized around the
undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals.
Sally Thompson Chapters 1—5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from
Nursing Specialties Corporation the standard precalculus courses. Chapter 6 provides examples and instructions for creating
1234 Glenridge Drive graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7—12 provide procedures for using the system
Fort Worth, TX 76130 for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential
equations, statistics, and applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample
SUBJECT: Scientific WorkPlace and the Word Pro equation editor solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to suggest possibilities to explore
beyond those covered in the manual.
Dear Sally,
Best regards,
Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Sci-
entific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible.
The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors
Barry MacKichan
increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose and
President
edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming
language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This cc: Rick, Kate, Cain
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful
encl: Sample Files
one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to
produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word is organized by tasks,
giving step-by-step instructions for completing both simple and more advanced user tasks.
It begins with the basic word processing tasks required for nearly every document: opening,
saving, and closing documents; entering and editing text and mathematics; previewing and
printing when you typeset a document and when you don’t; and formatting documents.
The second half explains more advanced tasks, including using graphics and tables, struc-
turing documents for LaTeX typesetting and for online use, managing documents with the
Memo - SW Memo #1 235
Memo - SW Memo #1
TO: A. U. Thor
FROM: George Pearson
DATE: July 6, 2001
SUBJECT: Memo shell
Here is the information you requested about Scientific WorkPlace. The product makes
writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your
productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents
directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple
click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate
on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific
WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly
and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating your
own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and printing a
simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics, format
using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally,
the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra
system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to
typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing, and
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when you
need it.
cc: Carol, Elbert, Darel
encl: None
236 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Memo - SW Memo #2
MEMO
To: Elbert Walker
From: John MacKendrick
Date: May 23, 2001
Subject: Memo shell
Here is the information you requested about Scientific WorkPlace. The product makes
writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your
productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents
directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple
click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate
on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific
WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly
and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating your
own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and printing a
simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics, format
using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally,
the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra
system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to
typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing, and
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when you
need it.
cc: Ron, Steve
encl: None
Memo - SW Memo #3 237
Memo - SW Memo #3
Memorandum
Here is the information you requested about Scientific WorkPlace. The product makes
writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your
productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents
directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple
click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate
on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific
WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly
and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating your
own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and printing a
simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics, format
using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally,
the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra
system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to
typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing, and
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when you
need it.
cc: Jack, Susan
encl: None
238 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Memo - SW Memo #4
MEMORANDUM
To: R. L. Williams
From: Barry MacKichan
Date: August 1, 2001
Subject: Memo shell
Here is the information you requested about Scientific WorkPlace. The product makes
writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your
productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents
directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple
click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate
on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific
WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly
and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating your
own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and printing a
simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics, format
using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally,
the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra
system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to
typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing, and
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when you
need it.
cc: Ron
encl: None
Memo - SW Memo #5 239
Memo - SW Memo #5
Memo
To: David Finston
From: Barry MacKichan
Date: August 24, 2001
Subject: Memo shell
Here is the information you requested about Scientific WorkPlace. The product makes
writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your
productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents
directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple
click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate
on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific
WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly
and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating your
own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and printing a
simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics, format
using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally,
the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra
system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to
typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing, and
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when you
need it.
cc: Jon, George, Larry
encl: None
240 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
INVENTION DESCRIPTION
Here is the information you requested about Scientific WorkPlace. The product makes
writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word processor increases your
productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents
directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple
click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate
on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific
WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly
and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating your
own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and printing a
simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics, format
using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Additionally,
the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer algebra
system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how to
typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing, and
cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
Inventor: Date:
1
Press Release - SW Press Release #1 241
PRESS RELEASE
Headline
Scientific WorkPlace makes writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined
possible. The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word
processor increases your productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can com-
pose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a
programming language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in
LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is
a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce
stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
cc: Business Editor
encl: Brochure
242 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
NEWS
MacKichan Software, Inc. RELEASE
600 Ericksen Avenue NE, Suite 300 Bainbridge Island, WA 98110
Headline
Scientific WorkPlace makes writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined
possible. The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing since 1992, this scientific word
processor increases your productivity because it is easy to learn and use. You can com-
pose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a
programming language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in
LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is
a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace enables both professional and support staff to produce
stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Getting Started with Scientific WorkPlace, Scientific Word, and Scientific Notebook de-
scribes how to install and activate these three products, and how to get started creating
your own documents. The chapters cover installation; creating, revising, saving, and print-
ing a simple document. Additional chapters cover how to enter text and mathematics,
format using tags, preview and print, using hyperlinks, and customize the program. Ad-
ditionally, the manual describes how to compute and plot with the integrated computer
algebra system in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook. Final chapters address how
to typeset your documents and how to take advantage of automatic numbering, indexing,
and cross-referencing in Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word, and how to get help when
you need it.
cc: Business Editorv
encl: Brochure
Report - JEEP Report 243
Abstract
The Title of a JEEP Report This is the text of the abstract. Abstracts give a short synopsis of the report,
noting the major points developed in the course of the report and mentioning the
results, conclusions, and recommendations reported.
Dr. James Author
The Date
244 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
1 2
4
Report - JEEP Report 245
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific ∗ Third level bullet item.
WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
“scratchpad” computations.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the descrip-
is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. tion of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change
it.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
your country. John F Kennedy
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another.
George Bush
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
A.1. About the Bibliography drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
is an example: [2, 3, 4].
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
7 8
246 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Report - SW Report #1
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #1 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is
that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is
approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Report - SW Report #1 247
A.1 About the Bibliography [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated
Following the text of this article is a short fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
manual bibliography. This sample bibliogra- drogen at rocket chamber pressures”,
phy has no relationship to the previous text, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] 3537-3550
and [6]. You can also have multiple cita-
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis
tions appear together. Here is an example: number under supercritical conditions”,
[2, 3, 4]. Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
3 4
248 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Report - SW Report #2
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #2 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is that it
is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is approximately
−e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Report - SW Report #2 249
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2. It
follows from (1.3) that
P∞
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Z 1
X Z m
a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation 1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸
The expression i=1 = am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
∞
X
ai (1.1) where for the remainder R(z) we have
i=1
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below a Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies
display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
d
examples. f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
A short line above: dz
x2 + y2 = z 2 that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1 2
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
3 4
250 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Report - SW Report #3
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #3 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population.
The major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins
to drink warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1.
Replace this text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Report - SW Report #3 251
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits
the representation
µ ¶
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics a1 1
P f (z) = a0 + +o ,
∞ z z
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered
equation
∞
X for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
ai (1.1)
i=1 a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset
of H, T a nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, f (1=z) = a 0 + a1 z + o (z) .
P∞ + (1.3)
an;k → 0 for each k, P
and ° n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for
each x in C, An x = k=0 an;kT k x converges weakly to a fixed point
∞
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with
of T [1]. radius r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1
The spacing above and below a display depends on whether the lines Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples. = am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z 2 where for the remainder R(z) we have
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
|z| + r 1 + sin "
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy
spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
theorem (1.4) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
1.2 Mathematics
R¯ in Section
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in
section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running
headers or table of contents entries.
1 2
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior
in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
A.1 About the Bibliography Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This
sample bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercrit-
shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have ical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4]. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory
of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
3 4
252 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Report - SW Report #4
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #4 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water.
The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own
abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Report - SW Report #4 253
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
a1 1
Text f (z) = a0 +
z
+o
z
,
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
nonexpansive
P∞ self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 forPeach k, and Z Z
(¸ − z 0)m d¸
1
X
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;kT k x
+ ∞ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short where for the remainder R(z) we have
or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
x2 + y2 = z 2 |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
and a short line below. r sin "
A long line above may depend on your margins
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 implies
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
contents entries.
1 2
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
A.1 About the Bibliography
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
is an example: [2, 3, 4].
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
3 4
254 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Report - SW Report #5
Abstract
The Title of a Sample SW Report #5 We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water.
The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own
abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Report - SW Report #5 255
Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the represen-
tation µ ¶
a1 1
Text f (z) = a0 +
z
+o
z
,
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a r = |z| sin "=2. It follows from (1.3) that
nonexpansive
P∞ self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 forPeach k, and Z Z
(¸ − z 0)m d¸
1
X
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;kT k x
+ ∞ 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short where for the remainder R(z) we have
or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
x2 + y2 = z 2 |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
and a short line below. r sin "
A long line above may depend on your margins
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 implies
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
contents entries.
1 2
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hy-
drogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41,
3537-3550
A.1 About the Bibliography
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
is an example: [2, 3, 4].
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynam-
ics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
3 4
256 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Abstract
The Title of a Sample TU Wien Report We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The
major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink
warm water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this
text with your own abstract.
A.U. Thor
The Date
Report - TU Wien Report 257
1 2
Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsub-
= am + R(z), (1.4) section.
CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
2¼i 2
m=0
3 4
258 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific ∗ Third level bullet item.
WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying
out “scratchpad” computations. · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment Description List: Each description list item has a term followed by the description of
is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations. that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change
it.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Bunyip: Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do
for your country. John F Kennedy
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or
another. George Bush
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
(a) A list item under a list item.
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style.
The screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a
period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic char-
acter surrounded by parentheses.
(b) Just another list item under a list item.
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
5 6
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in
A.1 About the Bibliography fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical con-
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear ditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4]. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermo-
dynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
7 8
Report - TU Wien Report (new) 259
1
260 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (1.3)
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius
P∞ r = |z | sin "= 2. It follows from (1.3) that
The expression i =1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
Z 1
X Z m
∞
X 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
ai (1.1) = am + R( z), (1.4)
2 ¼i C H(z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2 ¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z )
2
i= 1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. where for the remainder R(z ) we have
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T |R (z )| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H (z ) ¸∈CH (z )
a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for
P∞ + |z | + r 1 + sin "
each k ,Pand ° n = k= 0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , = · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
∞
An x = k =0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. r sin "
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing Therefore R ( z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are (1.4) implies
short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: d
f (1 =z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 ,
x2 + y 2 = z 2 dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z .
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing
for mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or
table of contents entries.
2 3
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsec- The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style.
tions. The screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a
period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic char-
2.1.1 Subsection acter surrounded by parentheses.
(b) Just another list item under a list item.
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
i. Third level list item under a list item.
Subsubsection A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection. • Bullet item 1
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIGRAPHI C, and fraktur . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize , footnotesize, small , normalsize, large,
4 5
Report - TU Wien Report (new) 261
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag. Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
A.1 About the Bibliography hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer,
1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
bibliography has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical con-
citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. You can also have multiple citations appear ditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of
Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermo-
dynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
6 7
262 Chapter 6 Other Document Shells
Resume - SW Resume #1
A. U. Thor
1234 Main Street
Hometown, IL 60613
Education
• Bachelor of Science, Mathematics, University of Chicago, 1994
Work Experience
• Systems programmer, MacKichan Software, Inc. 1997—2000
Interests
References
Carol Walker, Professor of Mathematics, New Mexico State University, (505) 123-4567
Jon C. Stenerson
2300 Montana, Las Cruces, NM 88001, (505)-522-1234 jsten@fakeaddress.edu
Slides - SW Slides
2. Computing X∞
1
=2
n=1 n
2
3. Internet access
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded
convex subset of H, T a nonexpansive self map of C.
Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ ³ ´+
°n = k=0 an;k+1 − an;k → 0: Then for each x
P∞
in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a
fixed point of T .
4 Tags • Bigger
• Emphasized
• Strongly Emphasized
• Keyboard Input
• Sample
• Bold
• Italics
• Typed Code
Standard LATEX Shells
The standard LATEX shells provide the most general and portable set of document fea-
tures. You can achieve almost any typesetting effect by beginning with a standard shell
and adding LATEX packages as necessary. We strongly recommend that you begin all new
documents using one of the standard LATEX shells, unless you have a compelling reason
(such as publisher’s instructions) to do otherwise.
With one exception, the standard shells are based on the typesetting specifications
set in one of three LATEX base document classes—article.cls, book.cls, or re-
port.cls. See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and for
page layout diagrams for the base document classes.
268 Chapter 7 Standard LATEX Shells
The Title of an Article as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
1 2
Standard LATEX Article and Blank Standard LATEX Article Shells 269
Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
heading. hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsub- [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
subsection heading. tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
3 Lists and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermody-
can extend four levels deep, look like this: namics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
1. Numbered list item 1. [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
2. Numbered list item 2. and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
3 4
270 Chapter 7 Standard LATEX Shells
Contents
Introduction vii
Afterword 9
iii
Standard LATEX Book 271
Preface Introduction
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself The introduction is entered using the usual chapter tag. Since the introduction
containing \chapter*{Preface}. When the document is loaded, this appears chapter appears before the mainmatter TeX field, it is an unnumbered chapter.
in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered The primary difference between the preface and the introduction in this shell
chapter. The markboth TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the document is that the introduction will appear in the table of contents and
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does the page headings for the introduction are automatically handled without the
not appear in the table of contents. need for the markboth TeX field. You may use either or both methods to
create chapters at the beginning of your document. You may also delete these
preliminary chapters.
v vii
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
∞
X
ai (2.1)
i =1
sin2 µ + cos 2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
1 A
LTEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 3
272 Chapter 7 Standard LATEX Shells
1
Z
f ( ¸) d¸ X1
1
Z m
(¸ − z0 ) d¸
Large , LARGE , huge and Huge .
= am + R (z), (2.4) Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment
2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H(z ) (¸ − z )2 is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
m =0
where for the remainder R(z ) we have The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
|R ( z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z| + r )
¸∈C H ( z) ¸∈C H ( z) your country. John F Kennedy
|z | + r 1 + sin " I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin " It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or an-
Therefore R (z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem other. George Bush
(2.4) implies
d
2.6 Lists
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which
that implies (2.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z . can extend four levels deep, look like this:
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
7
Standard LATEX Book 273
Afterword Bibliography
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowl- [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and
edgements, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back Sons, New York, 1963.
matter, chapters do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the
table of contents. If you are not using anything in the back matter, you can [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid
delete the back matter TeX field and everything that follows it. hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a,
41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical condi-
tions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases
and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
9 11
274 Chapter 7 Standard LATEX Shells
Page 1 Page 2
Standard LATEX Conference Proceedings 275
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
Page 3
276 Chapter 7 Standard LATEX Shells
Contents
1
Standard LATEX Report 277
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
of contents entries.
3 4
Chapter 2 Appendix A
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created
2.1 Section Headings using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
2.1.1 Subsection
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
Subsubsection
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
2.2 Tags
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
Slanted , Small Caps , and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic
are correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize , footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
5 7
Style Editor Shells
The shells discussed in this chapter were developed with the Style Editor. Thus, you
may find that modifying them by using the Style Editor is easier than by making changes
within the program.
Style Editor shells produce a variety of documents: articles, books, exams, faxes,
letters, memos, slides, resumes, and theses. The shells differ according to their pur-
pose. All the shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in the base document
class sebase.cls. You must use the Style Editor to modify the class options for
sebase.cls.
280 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Article
A. U. Thor
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the representation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
1 Sample Mathematics and Text a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds Proof. Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix. f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "= 2.
It follows from (3) that
P∞
The expression a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X1
i= 1 1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
∞
X = am + R(z ), (4)
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H( z ) (¸ − z )2
ai (1) m =0
i= 1 where for the remainder R (z ) we have
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. |R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a ¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and |z | + r 1 + sin "
P∞ + P∞ k = · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
°n = k= 0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0 . Then for each x in C, An x = k =0 a n;k T x r sin "
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in d
f (1 =z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
the following examples. dz
A short line above: that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins 2 Section Headings
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical heading levels are available, as described below.
displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯ 2.1 Subsection Heading
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln tdt
This text appears under a subsection heading.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause 2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. Subsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading.
1 2
Article 281
Subsubsubsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
heading. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
3 Tags
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, 5 About the Bibliography
SMAL L C APS , and Typewriter.
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6].
CALLI GRAP HIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, Large, [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
• Bullet item 1.
• Bullet item 2.
– Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
3 4
Appendix A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to the
main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear in the
appendices. √
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A-1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A-1 is used to demonstrate how equations are
numbered in the appendix.
5
282 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ln tdt
A Simple Article ®
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
A. U. Thor
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
∞
X
ai (1) where for the remainder R (z ) we have
i =1
|R (z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1. ¸∈ CH (z) ¸∈ CH (z)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non- | z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and r sin "
P∞ + P∞
°n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k =0 a n;k T k x Therefore R( z) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. implies
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as d
f (1 =z) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
shown in the following examples. dz
A short line above: that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
x2 + y 2 = z 2
and a short line below. 2 Section Headings
A long line above may depend on your margins
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional
sin 2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 heading levels are available, as described below.
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe-
matical displays, regardless of the margins. 2.1 Subsection Heading
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. This text appears under a subsection heading.
1 2
Article - LATEX-like Article 283
4 Lists [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics
for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can
extend four levels deep, look like this: [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
1. Numbered list item 1.
2. Numbered list item 2.
Appendix A. An Appendix
(a) A numbered list item under a list item.
The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen ap- Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral to
pearance. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level the main text, many styles use a different numbering system for equations that appear
indicator. in the appendices. √
(b) Another numbered list item under a list item. − b ± b2 − 4 ac
(A-1)
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item. 2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A-1 is used to demonstrate how equations
A. Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
are numbered in the appendix.
3 4
284 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
entries.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a where for the remainder R (z ) we have
nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞ , a n;k → 0 for each k , and |R(z )| ≤ r −1
max o (|z|) = r −1
max |¸ | · O (|z | + r )
P∞ + P
°n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = ∞ k
k =0 an;k T x
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z )
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2 Section Headings
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯ Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln tdt additional heading levels are available, as described below.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads 2.1 Subsection Heading
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
This text appears under a subsection heading.
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 2
Article - Sans serif 285
2.1.1 Subsubsection Heading (a). Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
3 Tags Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
SMAL L C APS , and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD ,
CALLI GRAP HIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are 5 About the Bibliography
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny , scr iptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample
3 4
Appendix A. An Appendix
Because appendices may contain material that is supplementary rather than integral
to the main text , many styles use a different numbering system for equations that
appear in the appendices. √
−b ± b 2 − 4 ac
(A-1)
2a
The quadratic equation shown as equation A-1 is used to demonstrate how
equations are numbered in the appendix.
5
286 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Contents
Preface 3
Maple Shell
A. U. Thor
2
Book - CalcLabs Book 287
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
3 5
| z| + r 1 + sin " [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
= · O (|z | + r ) = · O (|z |) . E dition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
r sin "
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies
d
f (1 =z) = a 1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
9
288 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
ii
A. U. Thor
XYZ University
Copyright °
c 1997 by Author
Book - Fred Szabo’s Book 289
Preface Contents
Preface Head
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When
the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is
actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets
Preface iii
the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does not
appear in the table of contents. Preface Head iii
Acknowledgments iii
Acknowledgments
1 Chapter Head 1
Scientific Notebook is the latest product conceived by Roger Hunter, President of TCI
Software Research, and his staff, in a series of electronic tools developed for the teach- About the Shell 1
ing, learning, and applying of mathematics. Scientific Notebook is a natural electronic About the Preamble 1
blackboard and a syntax-free interface to the Maple symbolic computation system. It
is an extension of Scientific WorkPlace, a TEX-based document production system.
2 Chapter Head 3
Scientific Notebook is elegant, easy, and powerful. It is fun to work with and makes
mathematics, both elementary and advanced, accessible to a wider audience than ever Mathematics Examples 3
before. I feel privileged to be able to use Scientific Notebook to make linear algebra More Examples 3
accessible, enjoyable, and rewarding. Thank you, Roger, for your genius, dedication,
and persistence.
A Additional Material 5
XYZ University Author.
Mathematical Induction 5
Sigma Notation 6
B References 9
C Index 11
This style is based on the swugbk style. It involves the following modifications: Relevant material
• The crop marks are turned off.
• The index prints in two columns instead of three.
Example 2.1 ¥Example A Suitable Problem
• Definitions constitute an additional theorem-like environment.
• All definitions, theorems, etc. are numbered within chapters.
• A solution label is defined in the preamble.
Each example has a label, followed by a descriptive title. Examples are numbered within
• A Maple output environment is defined in the preamble.
chapters.
• Additional white space is introduced between the rows of matrices for easier read-
ability of fractional entries. Solution. Solutions are introduced by the solution label.
• Fonts and screen tags, in particular screen colors, are used to enhance readability.
All definitions are preceded by the definition label. Definitions are numbered within
chapters.
About the Preamble
A linear equation in the variables x 1 ; : : : ; x n over the field R is an equation of the
form
The preamble of this shell includes the following items: a 1 x 1 + · · · + a n x n = b;
where the coefficients a 1 ; : : : ; a n and the constant b are in R:
“input—tcilatex˝
“def“solution—“noindent—“bfseries Solution. ˝˝—˝
“newenvironment—MapleBox˝—“STARTGRAYBOX˝—“ENDGRAYBOX˝ More Examples
“renewcommand—“arraystretch˝—1.25˝
Exercises
Mathematical Induction
Note This is a note. Notes are unnumbered. Mathematical induction is an accepted procedure for proving that certain statements
concerning the natural numbers are true no matter which natural number is involved.
Lemma 2.1 Here is a lemma. Lemmas are numbered within chapters. For example, we might have a formula '(n ) for computing the sum 1 + 2 + · · · + n;
and we want to prove that the formula works for all n: If n = 15; then the formula
Corollary 2.2 The matrix T has can be represented as a direct sum
' (15) computes the sum 1 + 2 + ·· · + 15; if n = 1001; then ' (1001) compute the sum
C1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Cr ;
1 + 2 + · · · + 1001 ; and so on. We would prove the fact that we can use the formula
of companion matrices for a unique r; with Ci being the companion matrix of the T -
annihilator of f (t )n E : Corollaries are numbered within chapters. ' (n ) in this way by using mathematical induction.
The reason behind mathematical induction is the fact that, as discussed above, the set N
of natural numbers is characterized by Peano’s axioms as the set each of whose elements
Theorem 2.3 (Rational Form Theorem) Suppose that T : V → V is a linear trans-
formation whose minimum polynomial over the field k of the space V is the product of is either 0 or of the form n + 1 = (1 + 1 + · · · + 1) + 1: If we can prove that '(0)
the distinct irreducible monic factors p 1 (t )n 1 ; : : : ; p 1 (t )nH1 : Then T can be represented holds, and if we can deduce the validity of ' (n + 1) from the validity of '( n ); then the
as the direct sum principle of mathematical induction asserts that the statement ' (m ) holds for all m ∈ N.
(C11 ⊕ · ·· ⊕ C 1n 1 ) ⊕ · · · ⊕ (Cr 1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ Crn H )
of companion matrices. Each matrix Ci 1 ⊕ · · · ⊕ CinE is a direct sum of the form It is clear from the given illustration, that a proof by mathematical induction consists of
described in Lemma 2.1. two parts:
1. The proof that '(0) holds. This part is called the induction basis. Depending on the
specific claim expressed by the formula ' (n ); the statement may actually only make
Proof. See Appendix A. sense for p > 0 : In that case, the induction basis is the proof that ' (p) holds. We
may also have to prove the validity of the first case or two by different means. This
Theorems are numbered within chapters. depends on the nature of the formula '( n) : If the induction basis involves more than
one initial proof, the induction involved is known as complete induction.
2. The proof that if ' (q ) holds for an arbitrary q ∈ N ; then '( q + 1) holds. This part is
called the induction step.
Note The use of the word basis in mathematical induction has nothing to do with the
use of the word basis in linear algebra. It will of course always be clear from the context
which meaning of the word is intended.
In finite-dimensional linear algebra, statements of the form ' (n ) are usually statements
asserting that a certain fact ' hold for spaces of all dimensions n ∈ N : Since there is
a space of dimension 0 ; we would have to prove that ' (0) holds. We may also have to
prove, in addition, that '(1) holds, if the validity of '(1) does not follow from that of
' (0); given the triviality of the space V = {0} : Other types of proofs in linear algebra
using mathematical induction are proofs about linear combinations of arbitrary length,
or polynomials of arbitrary degrees.
Sigma Notation
B References C Index
This appendix contains the references. This appendix contains the index.
292 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Contents
Preface iv
A Additional Material 6
Frederick Altamont Cornwallis Twistleton
Index 7
iii
Book - Jonathan Lewin’s Book 293
Preface Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself.
Sample Mathematics and Text
When the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal
chapter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning
of this paragraph sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
document. The preface does not appear in the table of contents. P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
may cause dif? culties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of con-
tents entries.
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
iv 2
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z .
1. The table of contents field at the top of this document is needed. The table
of contents is called for differently in the style editor book styles.
6
294 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Contents
iii
Book - LATEX-like Book 295
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three
kinds of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an 2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
appendix. P∞
The expression i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
X
∞
ai (2.1)
i=1
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe-
matical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in section heads ®
ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1 A
LT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1 3
Chapter 3 d
f (1=z ) = a1 + R(z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 ,
dz
that implies (3.2) by substituting 1 =z back for z.
Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Lemma 3 Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T
Theorem-like Environments a nonexpansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, a n;k → 0 for each k, and
°n = ∞
P
k =0 (an;k+ 1 − a n;k )
+ P
→ 0 . Then for each x in C , An x = ∞ k
k =0 a n;k T x
converges weakly to a fixed point of T .
f (1 =z ) = a0 + a1 z + o (z ) . (3.3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr ( z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r} be a circle with radius
r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (3.3) that
Z 1
X Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R(z ), (3.4)
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )
2
m =0
2 ¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z )
2
5
296 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Chapter 4 You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
S MALL CAPS, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur, BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIGRAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
Features of this Shell You can apply the size tags tiny, scr iptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, Large ,
11
Book - LATEX-like Book 297
Bibliography
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons,
New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
13
298 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
d
f (1=z ) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , (6.)
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
1
Book - Stewart Calculus 299
1–15
3 4
3.1.1 Subsection
3.1.1.1 Su bsubsection
Contents
Typesetting Documents
Preface 1
Tags 5
Text for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
1 LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowledge-
ments, a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back matter, chapters
Section Headings do not produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of contents.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
heading levels are available, as described below. 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated ? uid oxygen drop behavior in ? uid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
Subsection Heading [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
This text appears under a subsection heading.
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
Subsubsection Heading
This text appears under a subsubsection heading. [5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for ? uid-
phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
Subsubsubsection Heading [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading.
Tags
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
S MALL C APS, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIGRAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize, small , normalsize, large, Large,
Book #1
Contents
Contents 2
Preface 3
References 11
2
Book #1 303
Preface Chapter 1
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When the
Purpose of this Document
document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is actually This short sample document illustrates the typeset appearance of in-line and displayed
an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the correct mathematics in documents. It also illustrates five levels of section headings and three kinds
page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does not appear in the of lists. Finally, the document includes entries for a manual bibliography and an appendix.
table of contents.
3 4
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
5 6
304 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
About This Shell Bullet, numbered and description list environments are available. Lists, which can extend
four levels deep, look like this:
1. Numbered list item 1.
3.1 Section Headings 2. Numbered list item 2.
a. A numbered list item under a list item.
Use the Section tag for major sections, such as the one just above. Four additional heading The typeset appearance for this level is often different from the screen appearance.
levels are available, as described below. The typeset appearance often uses parentheses around the level indicator.
3.1.1 Subsection Heading b. Another numbered list item under a list item.
i. Third level numbered list item under a list item.
This text appears under a subsection heading. (a). Fourth and final level of numbered list items allowed.
3.1.1.1 Subsubsection Heading This text appears under a subsubsection heading.
(Subsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsection Heading • Bullet item 1.
This text appears under a subsubsubsection heading. • Bullet item 2.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Heading – Second level bullet item.
This text appears under a subsubsubsubsection heading. ∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth and final level bullet item.
3.2 Tags
Description List Each description list item has a lead-in followed by the item.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. Double-click the lead-in box to enter or customize the text of the lead-in.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
SMALL CA PS , and Typewriter. Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIGRAPHIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when
applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, sc riptsize, footnotesize , small, normalsize, large, Large,
7 8
Chapter 4 Appendix A
About the Bibliography The First Appendix
Following the text of this article is a short manual bibliography. This sample bibliography The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using the
has no relationship to the previous text, but it shows sample citations such as [4], [5] and [6]. Chapter Section/Body Tag.
You can also have multiple citations appear together. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4].
9 10
Book #1 305
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
11
306 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Exam #1
5. Another question.
8. Another question.
2. The second question.
a. The first part.
9. Another question.
b. The second part.
1 2
Exam Builder Shell 307
6. Another question.
N EW M EXICO S TATE U NIVERSITY
Mathematical Sciences
Instructor: Dr. A. U. Thor Office: 123
Class: Calculus 292 Semester: Fall 2004 Date: October 9, 2004
7. Another question.
8. Another question.
Instructions. Replace this text by the instructions to the students.
1. The first question.
9. Another question.
Calculus 292 Fall 2004 Final Exam for Calculus 292 October 9, 2004
308 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Student Name:
3. The third question.
Student ID:
5. Another question.
6. Another question.
7. Another question.
Calculus 292 Fall 2001 Final Exam for Calculus 292 October 9, 2001
Exam Builder with Title Page 309
8. Another question.
9. Another question.
Calculus 292 Fall 2001 Final Exam for Calculus 292 October 9, 2001
310 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Fax #1
Fax Transmission
No. of pages incl. this one: 1
To:
Larry Hughes
cc:
Susan Bagby
Here is the content of the fax memo. This fax includes contact information, the number of pages, special instructions, and
the fax message itself. Complete the fields with the information you need.
The fields in the fax shell can be left blank but should not be deleted. The Subject field must remain, and must immediately
precede the body of the fax.
Attachments:
List attachments
General - Scientific Word Readme 311
Contents 1 2 Contents
This is the preface and it is created using the preface tag from the Section/Body
Tag toolbar. The preface does appears in the table of contents.
R¯
Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table
of contents entries.
1 LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
312 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Contents 3 4 Contents
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f ( z) admits the representation You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif,
µ ¶
a1 1 Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter.
f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = { z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then BOLD, and CALLIGRAPHI C. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
a 1 = − lim z2 f 0 (z ) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large,
Proof. Change z for 1 =z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and Large, LARGE , huge and Huge .
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific
f (1=z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = {¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius “scratchpad” computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body
r = |z | sin "= 2. It follows from (3) that Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of
Z X 1 Z m
1 f ( ¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z 0) d¸ short quotations.
= am + R (z ), (4)
2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z)2 2¼i C H(z ) ( ¸ − z)2
m=0 The buck stops here. Harry Truman
where for the remainder R(z ) we have Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z |) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r) country. John F Kennedy
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸ ∈C H(z)
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
|z | + r 1 + sin " It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another.
= · O (|z| + r ) = · O (|z |) .
r sin " George Bush
Therefore R (z ) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4)
implies
d List Environments
f (1=z ) = a 1 + R(z ) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 ,
dz
that implies (2) by substituting 1 =z back for z . You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at
(Chapter head:)Features of this Shell the bottom left of the screen.
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
2 Section Headings
a. A list item under a list item.
Use the Section tag for ma jor sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections. The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while
the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by
Subsection parentheses.
b. Just another list item under a list item.
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
i Third level list item under a list item.
Subsubsection (1) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
• Bullet item 1
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection. • Bullet item 2
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection
• Second level bullet item.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection.
• Third level bullet item.
• Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Tags
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized. description of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to
Contents 5 Contents 7
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above and below a display 2.1.1 Subsubsection
depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following examples.
A short line above: This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
x2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below. 2.2 Tags
A long line above may depend on your margins
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, S MALL C APS , and
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, regardless of the
Typewriter.
margins.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
R¯ CALLIGRAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied to upper-
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln J@J
case letters A through Z.
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause difficulties in typesetting LARGE
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize , footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large , ,
styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
huge and Huge.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches to
mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations. Following is a group of
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on differentiation of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short
asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. quotations.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the representation Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country. John F Kennedy
µ ¶ I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
a1 1
f (z ) = a0 + +o , It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = { z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
2.3 List Environments
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom left of the screen.
Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
1. List item 1
f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C − : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2 . It follows from (3) that 2. List item 2
Z Z (a) A list item under a list item.
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X 1
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1
= a m + R (z ), (4) The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows a lower case
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H( z ) (¸ − z )2
m =0 alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character
where for the remainder R( z) we have surrounded by parentheses.
|R(z )| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸ | · O (|z | + r)
¸∈C H(z ) ¸∈C H(z ) (b) Just another list item under a list item.
|z | + r 1 + sin " (i) Third level list item under a list item.
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z|) . (A) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
r sin "
Therefore R(z ) → 0 as z → ∞ , z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4) implies • Bullet item 1
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
314 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
• Bullet item 2
– Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Descrip. List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that term. Double click the term box to enter the
term, or to change it.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket chamber pressures”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc.,
1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E ., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice
-Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book
Company, 1987
Letter #1 315
Letter #1
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Knoxville, TN 37923
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific
Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. T he Gold Standard for mathematical
publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You
can compose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A
simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper,
while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support
staff to produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use the built-in computer algebra
system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book
is organized around the undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals. Chapters
1–5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from the standard precalculus courses. Chapter
6 provides examples and instructions for creating graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7–12 provide procedures for using
the system for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential equations, statistics, and
applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to
suggest possibilities to explore beyond those covered in the manual.
Sincerely,
Barry
Letter #2
Barry MacKichan
MacKichan Software, Inc.
19307 8th Avenue, Suite C
Poulsbo, WA 98370-7370
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Valley, CA 94552
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific
Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. T he Gold Standard for mathematical
publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You
can compose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A
simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper,
while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support
staff to produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use the built-in computer algebra
system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book
is organized around the undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals. Chapters
1–5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from the standard precalculus courses. Chapter
6 provides examples and instructions for creating graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7–12 provide procedures for using
the system for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential equations, statistics, and
applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to
suggest possibilities to explore beyond those covered in the manual.
Sincerely,
Barry
Letter #3
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Fort Worth, Texas 76130
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific
Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. T he Gold Standard for mathematical
publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You
can compose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A
simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper,
while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support
staff to produce stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use the built-in computer algebra
system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book
is organized around the undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals. Chapters
1–5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from the standard precalculus courses. Chapter
6 provides examples and instructions for creating graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7–12 provide procedures for using
the system for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential equations, statistics, and
applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to
suggest possibilities to explore beyond those covered in the manual.
Sincerely,
Barry
Letter #4
Jim Smith
1234 Any Street
Knoxville, TN 37923
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word
make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard for mathematical publishing
since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are easy to learn and use. You can compose
and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to think in a programming language. A simple click of a
button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software
ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to produce
stunning results quickly and easily, without having to know TeX or LaTeX.
Doing Mathematics with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Notebook describes how to use the built-in computer algebra
system to do a wide range of mathematics without dealing directly with the syntax of the computer algebra system. This book
is organized around the undergraduate mathematics curriculum for ease of use by beginners through professionals. Chapters
1–5 give you basic procedures for using the system, illustrated with material from the standard precalculus courses. Chapter
6 provides examples and instructions for creating graphs of curves and surfaces. Chapters 7–12 provide procedures for using
the system for problems in analytic geometry and calculus, linear algebra, vector analysis, differential equations, statistics, and
applied modern algebra. The manual includes exercises and sample solutions to help you practice the ideas presented and to
suggest possibilities to explore beyond those covered in the manual.
Sincerely,
Barry
Memo #1
Memorandum
Replace this with your text. Here is the information you requested about our products. Scientific WorkPlace and
Scientific Word make writing and doing mathematics easier than you ever imagined possible. The Gold Standard
for mathematical publishing since 1992, these scientific word processors increase your productivity because they are
easy to learn and use. You can compose and edit your documents directly on the screen, without being forced to
think in a programming language. A simple click of a button allows you to typeset your document in LaTeX. This
lets you concentrate on writing a correct paper, while our software ensures it is a beautiful one. Scientific WorkPlace
and Scientific Word enable both professional and support staff to produce stunning results quickly and easily, without
having to know TeX or LaTeX.
cc: Larry, Ron
encl: More information
320 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Play
Much Ado About Nothing The prince and Claudio promised by this hour
To visit me. You know your office, brother:
You must be father to your brother’s daughter
William Shakespeare And give her to young Claudio.
Antonio
Which I will do with confirm’d countenance.
Act 5 Benedick
Friar, I must entreat your pains, I think.
Scene 4 Friar Francis
A room in Leonato’s house. Enter Leonato, To do what, signior?
Antonio,
Benedick, Benedick
Beatrice, To bind me, or undo me; one of them.
Margaret, Signior Leonato, truth it is, good signior,
Ursula, Friar Your niece regards me with an eye of favour.
Francis, and
Hero Leonato
That eye my daughter lent her: ’tis most true.
Friar Francis
Did I not tell you she was innocent? Benedick
And I do with an eye of love require her.
Leonato
So are the prince and Claudio, who accused her Leonato
Upon the error that you heard debated: The sight whereof I think you had from me,
But Margaret was in some fault for this, From Claudio and the prince: but what’s your will?
Although against her will, as it appears
In the true course of all the question. Benedick
1 2
Play 321
Pedro and
Claudio, and
two or three
others
Don Pedro
Good morrow to this fair assembly
Leonato
Good morrow, prince; good morrow, Claudio:
We here attend you. And you yet determined
To-day to marry with my brother’s daughter?
Claudio
I’ll hold my mind, were she an Ethiope.
Leonato
Call her forth, brother; here’s the friar ready. Exit Antonio
Don Pedro
Good morrow, Benedick. Why, what’s the matter,
That you have such a February face,
So full of frost, of storm and cloudiness?
Claudio
I think he thinks upon the savage bull.
Tush, fear not, man; we’ll tip thy horns with gold
And all Europa shall rejoice at thee,
As once Europe did at lusty Jove,
When he would play the noble beast in love.
Benedick
Bull Jove, sir, had an amiable low;
And some such strange bull leap’d your father’s cow,
And got a calf in that same noble feat
Much like to you, for you have just his bleat.
Claudio
For this I owe you: here comes other reckonings. Re-enter
Antonio, with
the Ladies
masked
Which is the lady I must seize upon?
3
322 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Press Release
PRESS RELEASE
QCA Workbook
1 Sample Mathematics
and Text
1.1 In-line and Displayed
Mathematics
QCA Workbook
P
Style The expression ∞ i=1 ai is in-line mathemat-
ics, while the numbered equation
A. U. Thor X
∞
ai (1)
i=1
Econometrics Laboratory
324 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
This is some text. You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize,
, normalsize, large, Large, LARGE, huge and
small
References
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional
Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New
York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid
oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis
number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
Econometrics Laboratory
Report #1 325
Report #1
Abstract
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The
success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
A. U. Thor
326 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Contents Chapter 1
Sample Mathematics and Text
1 Sample Mathematics and Text 4
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics 4
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt 4 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments 4 P∞
The expression i =1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
2 Features of this Shell 6
ai (1)
2.1 Section Headings 6 i =1
2.1.1 Subsection 6 is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a
2.2 Tags 6
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞
° n = k =0 (a n;k +1 − a n;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C , A n x = k =0 an;k T k x
+
3 List Environments 7
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1].
References 8 Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown
A The F irst Appendix 9 in the following examples.
A short line above:
x 2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.Here is a figure:
1 LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
3 4
d
dz
f (1=z ) = a 1 + R (z ) → a 1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"= 2 , 2.2 Tags
that implies (2) by substituting 1 =z back for z.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
S MALL C APS, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD ,
CALLIGRAPHIC , and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct
only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large,
5 6
Report #1 327
Chapter 3 References
List Environments The back matter often includes one or more of an index, an afterword, acknowledgements,
a bibliography, a colophon, or any other similar item. In the back matter, chapters do not
produce a chapter number, but they are entered in the table of contents. If you are not
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom using anything in the back matter, you can delete the back matter TeX field and everything
left of the screen. that follows it.
1. List item 1 [1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional Analysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York,
2. List item 2 1963.
a. A list item under a list item. [2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses [3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by parentheses. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
b. Just another list item under a list item. [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
i. Third level list item under a list item. John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
(a). Fourth and final level of list items allowed. [5] Prausnitz, J., L ichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
• Bullet item 1 [6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
• Bullet item 2
– Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of
that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
7
8
Appendix A
The First Appendix
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using
the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
9
328 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Resume #1
A. B. Carson
Work Experience
• Systems programmer, MacKichan Software, Inc. 1997–2000
• Firefighter, Cape Girardoux Municipal Fire Department, Cape Girardoux, Missouri, 1996–1997
• TEXnician, TCI Software Research, 1994–1996
• Aide, Student Computer Lab, University of Chicago, 1990–1994
Interests Crew, Renaissance choir, Amateur theater, Poetry, Rock climbing, Pyromania.
1 MacKichan Software
MacKichan mathematics software products are based on an easy-to-use but powerful mathematical
word processor. All provide reading, browsing, and printing of .tex files.
Slides A
1 MacKichan Software
Title of This Presentation MacKichan mathematics software products
are based on an easy-to-use but powerful
A. U. Thor mathematical word processor. All provide
reading, browsing, and printing of .tex files.
July 15, 2004
1.1 Enhanced Mathematics
MacKichan software products enhance the
production of beautiful typeset mathematics.
1.1.1 Products Suited to Your Needs
Choose the product features that meet your
needs:
1. Create mathematical documents
2. Typeset your documents
3. Compute symbolically and numerically
4. Publish on the web
5. Develop a mathematical website
6. Write exams and course materials
1 2
Slides A 331
3 4
332 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Slides B
1 MacKichan Software
Title of Presentation MacKichan mathematics software
products are based on an easy-to-use
A. U. Thor but powerful mathematical word
July 15, 2004 processor.
1.1 Enhanced Mathematics
MacKichan software products en-
hance the production of beautiful
typeset mathematics.
1.1.1 Products Suited to Your
Needs
1. Create mathematical documents
2. Typeset your documents
3. Compute symbolically and numeri-
cally
4. Develop a mathematical website
1 2
Slides B 333
Slides C
1 MacKichan Soft-
Title of Presentation ware
A. U. Thor MacKichan mathematics soft-
ware products are based on
July 15, 2004
an easy-to-use but powerful
mathematical word processor.
All provide reading, browsing,
and printing of .tex files.
1.1 Enhanced Mathe-
matics
MacKichan software products
enhance the production of
beautiful typeset mathematics.
2
Slides C 335
3 Tags
You can apply these tags:
• Emphasized
• Bold
• Italics
• Roman
• Sans Serif
• Typewriter
You can apply the special,
mathematics only, tags
• BLACKBOARD BOLD
• CALLIGRAPHIC
• fraktur.
5
336 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Slides D
∞
You can apply these tags:
X 1 • Emphasized
=2
n=1
n2 • Bold
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded
convex subset of H , T a nonexpansive self map of • Italics
C . Suppose
P that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k , and • Roman
°n = ∞ k=0P(an;k+1 − an;k )+ → 0: Then for each x in • Sans Serif
C , An x = k=0 an;k T k x converges weakly to a fixed
∞
point of T . • Typewriter
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags
• BLACKBOARD BOLD
• CALLIGRAPHIC
• fraktur.
Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
correct only when applied to uppercase letters A
through Z.
338 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Slides QCA
1 MacKichan Software
MacKichan mathematics software products are based on an easy-
to-use but powerful mathematical word processor. All provide
reading, browsing, and printing of .tex files.
1.1 Enhanced Mathematics
MacKichan software products enhance the production of beautiful
Title of this Presentation typeset mathematics.
1.1.1 Products Suited to Your Needs
A. U. Thor
Choose the product features that meet your needs:
Junly 15, 2004
(1) Create mathematical documents
(2) Typeset your documents
(3) Compute symbolically and numerically
(4) Publish on the web
(5) Develop a mathematical website
(6) Write exams and course materials
Econometrics Laboratory
Slides QCA 339
A thesis presented
by
James W. Smith
Doctor of Philosophy
in the subject of
Economics
Harvard University
Cambridge, Massachusetts
June 2001
ii
Thesis - Harvard Thesis 341
Abstract Acknowledgments
Put the abstract here. The abstract must have a (1) statement of the problem, The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
(2) an exposition of methods and procedures, and (3) a summary of the findings. who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also ac-
The length may not exceed 350 words. knowledge any support or special research materials given you.
permission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright
for example,“the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the scope
of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8).
iii iv
Contents Preface
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When
the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it is
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph sets the
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface does not appear
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
v 1
342 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Chapter 1
Sample Mathematics and Text as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non- 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
Environments
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P∞ P∞
− an;k )
+
→ 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
k=0 (an;k+1 k=0 an;k T x converges
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown
µ ¶
in the following examples. a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o , (1.2)
z z
A short line above:
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
x2 + y2 = z2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
1
Proof Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
Chapter 2
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2.
Features of this Shell
It follows from (1.4) that
Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸)d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
2 = am + R(z), (1.5)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)
2
2.1 Section Headings
where for the remainder R(z) we have
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (| z | + r)
¸∈CH (z ) ¸ ∈CH (z )
|z | + r 1 + sin " 2.1.1 Subsection
= · O (|z | + r) = · O (|z |) .
r sin "
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
Subsubsection
Corollary 1 Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , and hence by the Cauchy
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
theorem (1.5) implies
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz 2.2 Tags
that implies (1.3) by substituting 1=z back for z.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
1.A Appendix to Chapter 1
SMALL C APS, and Typewriter.
This is some additional information for the chapter. You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD,
and CALLIG RAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only
You can apply the size tags tiny, scriptsize, footnotesiz e, small , normalsize, large, Large, LARGE,
5
Thesis - Harvard Thesis 343
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scienti? c Work-
• Bullet item 1
Place switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad”
• Bullet item 2
computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environ-
– Second level bullet item.
ment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman ∗ Third level bullet item.
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country.
John F Kennedy · Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of
that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
2.3 List Environments
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen
shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset
Appendix A References
The First Appendix
Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with TEX, Proceedings
of the Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA Spring 1985, 349–356.
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created
Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley, Vol. 2, second
using the Section tag. edition, 1981.
Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathematical Society,
1984.
Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document production, TUG-
boat Vol. 5 (1984), No. 2, 79–90; Corrigenda, Vol. 6 (1985), No. 1, p. 6.
TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o American
Mathematical Society, P. O. Box 9506, Providence, RI, 02940.
8 9
344 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
A thesis presented
by
James W. Smith
to
c 2001 by James W. Smith
°
The Department of Mathematics All rights reserved.
Doctor of Philosophy
in the subject of
Mathematics
Emory University
Atlanta, Georgia
June 2001
Thesis - Harvard Thesis Modified by Philippe Laval 345
Abstract Acknowledgments
Put the abstract here. The abstract must have a (1) statement of the problem, The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
(2) an exposition of methods and procedures, and (3) a summary of the findings. The who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowl-
length may not exceed 350 words. edge any support or special research materials given you.
Copyright permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) per-
mission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright pro-
Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the research is discussed, for
example, “the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the scope of the
Contents Preface
This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself.
When the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chap-
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
ter, but it is actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this
1 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
paragraph sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
preface does not appear in the table of contents.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 3
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math-
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln J@J
X
∞
ai (1.1)
i=1 Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1. may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. a1 = − lim z 2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ ". (1.3)
4 5
Chapter 2
Proof Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
Features of this Shell
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z | = r } be a circle with radius 2.1 Section Headings
r = |z | sin "=2. It follows from (1.4) that
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
Z X1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
= am + R(z), (1.5)
2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z)2 2¼i CH (z ) (¸ − z) 2
m=0
2.1.1 Subsection
where for the remainder R(z) we have
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o ( |z |) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z | + r)
¸ ∈CH (z) ¸∈CH ( z)
Corollary 1.1 Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2, and hence by the 2.2 Tags
Cauchy theorem (1.5) implies
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
dz
that implies (1.3) by substituting 1=z back for z. S MALL C APS, and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
1.A Appendix to Chapter 1 BOLD, and CALLIG RAP HIC . Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
6 7
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize , footnotesize , small, normalsize , large, Large , the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scien- (b) Just another list item under a list item.
ti? c WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out i. Third level list item under a list item.
“scratchpad” computations. Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body (A) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a sequence of short
2. List item 2
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The This is some additional information for the chapter.
8 9
References Appendix A
Name of First Appendix
[1] Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with TEX,
Proceedings of the Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA
Spring 1985, 349–356. Precede the first appendix with the indent latex fragment included here. Use
[2] Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley, regular sections and subsections (or subsectionNoContents) in appendices.
Vol. 2, second edition, 1981.
[3] Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathe-
matical Society, 1984.
[5] Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document pro-
duction, TUGboat Vol. 5 (1984), No. 2, 79–90; Corrigenda, Vol. 6 (1985),
No. 1, p. 6.
[6] TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o
American Mathematical Society, P. O. Box 9506, Providence, RI, 02940.
348 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
A Dissertation
in
The Department of Mechanical Engineering
by
Frank Herbert Muldoon
B.S., Mechanical Engineering, Louisiana State University, 1996
May, 2004
ii
Thesis - LSU Thesis 349
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends who have Acknowledgements .....................................................................................................................................................................................iii
assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowledge any support or Abstract ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................v
special research materials given you. Chapter 1 Sample Mathematics and Text............................................................................................................................1
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics ..............................................................................................................................1
R¯
MacKichan Software, Inc. would like to thank Frank Muldoon for providing the Louisiana 1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt...................................................................................................................1
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments .................................................................2
State University typesetting specification he created using the Style Editor.
Chapter 2 Features of this Shell..................................................................................................................................................3
2.1 Section Headings ........................................................................................................................................................................3
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2.2 Tags .......................................................................................................................................................................................................3
2.3 List Environments ......................................................................................................................................................................4
References............................................................................................................................................................................................................6
Vita.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................7
iii iv
This shell document was created from a doctoral dissertation that was successfully submitted 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
P∞
to the Department of Mechanical Engineering at Louisiana State University. Replace this text The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
with the text for your abstract. ai (1.1)
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below a
display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
examples.
x2 + y 2 = z 2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
v 1
350 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments Chapter 2 Features of this Shell
switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations.
d
f (1=z) = a 1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2 , Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a
dz
that implies (1.3) by substituting 1=z back for z. short quotation or a sequence of short quotations.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country. John F
Kennedy
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
2 3
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the bottom left
of the screen.
The appendix can contain technical proofs and derivations that can be separated from the main
(1) List item 1
(2) List item 2 text..Generally, avoid using appendices; however sometimes they serve a useful purpose for data
(a) A list item under a list item.
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The screen shows a lower that cannot be presented easily as a table or a figure.
case alphabetic character followed by a period while the typeset style uses a lower case
alphabetic character surrounded by parentheses.
(b) Just another list item under a list item.
(I) Third level list item under a list item.
(i) Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
• Bullet item 1
• Bullet item 2
– Second level bullet item.
∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that
term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
4 5
Thesis - LSU Thesis 351
References Vita
Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with TEX, Proceedings of the
Replace this text with a short pertinent autobiography.
Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA Spring 1985, 349–356.
Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley, Vol. 2, second edition,
1981.
Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathematical Society, 1984.
Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document production, TUGboat
TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o American Mathemat-
6 7
352 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
Thesis #1
The Study of Scientific Word on TeX and LaTeX Users “The Study of Scientific Word on TeX and LaTeX Users,” a dissertation prepared by Ron Ausbrooksin
partial ful?llment of the requirements for the degree, Doctor of Scientific Word, has been approved and
BY accepted by the following:
Ron Ausbrooks
Master of Arts
Andy Canham
Chair of the Examining Committee
2
Thesis #1 353
ABSTRACT
Chapter 1
Opening the Document Shell
The Study of Scientific Word on TeX and LaTeX Users The shell for this document opens showing front matter information in fields in the body of the
BY document. These fields include thesis title, author, requirements, degree name, major and minor
subjects, university, thesis date, and copyright information. Additional fields include the dissertation
name and the names of the committee chair and committee members.
Ron Ausbrooks
Master of Arts
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is that it
is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is approximately
−e −i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
3 5
Chapter 2 Chapter 3
In-line and Displayed Mathematics Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like
The expression
P∞
i =1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
Environments
X
ai (1) A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known fact on
i=1 differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset
P of H , T a nonexpansive self map of
C. Suppose that as nP → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n = ∞ k =0 (an;k +1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for
+
Lemma 1 Let f (z ) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z ) admits the representation
k µ ¶
each x in C , An x = ∞ k =0 a n;k T x converges weakly to a fixed point of T [1]. a1 1
Two sets of LTEX parameters govern mathematical displays. The spacing above and below a
A 1 f (z ) = a0 + +o ,
z z
display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = { z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
examples.
a 1 = − lim z 2 f 0 ( z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
A short line above:
x2 + y 2 = z2
and a short line below. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = { z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ " } and
A long line above may depend on your margins f (1 =z ) = a 0 + a 1 z + o (z ) . (3)
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let C r (z ) = { ¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r } be a circle with radius r = |z | sin "=2. It follows
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical displays, from (3) that
regardless of the margins. Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸ ) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0 ) d¸
= am + R(z ), (4)
2 ¼i CH (z) (¸ − z )2 2¼i C H( z ) (¸ − z )2
R¯ where for the remainder R( z) we have
m =0
1
LATEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
7 9
354 Chapter 8 Style Editor Shells
• Bullet item 1
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
• Bullet item 2
4.1.1.1 Subsubsection
– Second level bullet item.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection. ∗ Third level bullet item.
· Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
(Subsubsubsubsection head:)Subsubsubsubsection Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description of that term.
This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
4.2 Tags
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted, S MALL CAPS ,
and Typewriter.
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, and
CAL LIGRAP HIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only when applied to
uppercase letters A through Z.
You can apply the size tags , scriptsize, footnotesize, small, normalsize, large, Large ,
tiny LARGE,
huge and Huge.
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific WorkPlace switches
to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out “scratchpad” computations. Following is a
group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is appropriate for a short quotation or a
sequence of short quotations.
The buck stops here. Harry Truman
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your country. John F
Kennedy
I am not a crook. R ichard Nixon
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another. George Bush
11 12
References AppendixA
The First Appendix
[1] N. Dunford and J. Schwartz, Functional A nalysis, v. 2, John Wiley and Sons, New York, 1963.
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated ? uid oxygen drop behavior in ? uid hydrogen at rocket chamber The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created using the Section tag.
pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat Mass
Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids, John Wiley and
Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for ?uid-phase
equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th Edition,
McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
13 14
Thesis Shells
Thesis formatting requirements differ from university to university. The thesis shells
included with the program reflect the requirements in effect at the time the shell was
designed. Please review the requirements at your university to ensure that the shell you
choose is appropriate for your thesis.
The thesis shells are based on the typesetting specifications set in one of two base
document classes—book.cls or report.cls. The program uses several other .cls
files for customized shells.
See page 2 for information about base document class defaults and for page layout
diagrams for the base document classes.
356 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
AFIT/123/456/78-9
The views expressed in this thesis are those of the author and do not reflect the official
A TALE OF GNUS, GNATS AND ARMADILLOS policy or position of the Department of Defense or the United States Government.
THESIS
A. U. Thor
First Lieutenant, USAF
AFIT/123/456/78-9
AFIT/123/456/78-9 AFIT/123/456/78-9
THESIS
Master of Science
September 2004
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
iii vii
358 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
AFIT/123/456/78-9
List of Abbreviations
Abbreviation Page
Abstract
Win2k Windows 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The
success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
viii ix
Preface
A TALE OF GNUS, GNATS AND ARMADILLOS
This is the preface. Your name appears automatically at the end of this section when the
document is typeset. You can use Acknowledgments here instead.
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1
to a fixed point of T .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as
shown in the following examples.
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
displays, regardless of the margins.
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
x 1-1
Air Force Institute of Technology 359
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt
II. Features Unique to This Shell
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
2.1 Typesetting Features
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
2.1.1 Number by Chapter. If \numberbychapter is added to the document
preamble, then pages, figures, tables and equations will all be numbered by chapter.
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well- 2.1.2 No Section Numbers. If \nosectionnumbers is added to the document
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. preamble, then section numbers are not used in the text and in the table of contents.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation 2.1.3 Underline Option. If \underlineoption is added to the document pream-
µ ¶ ble, then underlining is used instead of italics for emphasized text, including chapter,
a 1
f (z) = a0 + 1 + o , section, etc. headings
z z
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then 2.1.4 List of Symbols. Remove the List of Symbols tag from the front matter if
you are not using this document feature. To place symbols in the list use the command
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2) \symbol[#1]{#2} inside of an encapsulated TeX field where #2 is the symbol and #1 is
the definition to be put in the list of symbols. The symbol is also automatically put in
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and your text. Leave out [#1] if you don’t want a definition. For example, He is the symbol
for Helium and Au inserts another symbol in the body of the document, without adding
f (1=z) = a0 + a1 z + o (z) . (1.3) a definition to the List of Symbols. NOTE: The \symbol macro must be encapsulated
since the typesetting style used by this document defines this macro as a replacement for
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin"=2.
the \symbol macro already defined by LATEX.
It follows from (1.3) that
Z Z 2.1.5 List of Abbreviations. Remove the List of Abbreviations tag from the front
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (1.4) matter if you are not using this document feature. To place abbreviations in the list use
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH(z) (¸ − z)2
the command \abbreviation[#1]{#2} inside a TeX field where #2 is the abbreviation
where for the remainder R(z) we have and #1 is the definition to be put in the list of abbreviations. The abbreviation is also
automatically put in your text. Leave out [#1] if you don’t want a definition. For example,
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) Win2k is sometimes used as an abbreviation for Windows 2000.
|z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies
1-2 2-1
Vita
Appendix A. First appendix title
Insert your brief biographical sketch here. Your permanent address is generated
A.1 In an appendix
automatically.
This is appendix section A.1. The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent
appendices can be created using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
BibTeX has been selected for the bibliography choice in this shell document. The
BibTeX bibliography style was designed to accompany the typesetting style used by this
document. One of the sample BibTeX databases included with SW has been selected and
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the TeXBook (?), the
LaTeX reference book (?), and to a well known grammar book (?). The bibliography
section for these citations comes next.
A-1 VITA-1
360 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
A Thesis
Presented to
The Academic Faculty
by
A. U. Thor
PREFACE
This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, though unnamed,
who helped me in the completion of this task.
iii iv
DEDICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
I want to gratefully acknlowedge all those who helped me in this task. ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . v
SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
I INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
REFERENCES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
VITA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
v vi
362 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
SUMMARY CHAPTER I
INTRODUCTION
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success Every dissertation should have an introduction. You might not realize it, but the introduc-
factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract. tion should introduce the concepts, backgrouand, and goals of the dissertation.
ix 1
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
P∞ a1 1
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
∞
X
ai (1) for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i=1
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (2)
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H , T a non-
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n = Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
P∞ + P∞ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (3)
to a fixed point of T .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin "=2.
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in It follows from (3) that
Z Z
the following examples. (¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (4)
A short line above: 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
1A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
2 3
Georgia Institute of Technology 363
Ancillary material should be put in appendices, which appear just before the bibliography. produced such a fine specimen of a researcher.
Create your BibTeX bibliography by adding a BibTeX field using your BibTeX database
and the gatech-thesis BibTeX bibliography style. Compile the document and create the
bibliography using the usual methods. Then, delete the BibTeX field from your document
and compile again. The \references TeX field that follows will include the bibliography in
the typeset document and also include a listing for the references in the table of contents.
5 7
364 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
Doctor of Philosophy
Abstract
and We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is
that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is
Master of Science approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
at the
Research Head: David Collis
Title: Director, Sound and Furry Laboratory
UNIVERSITY OF NEW MEXICO
Thesis Supervisor: George D. Pearson
June 2001
Title: Director, Technical Support
°
c Remove to use default copyright from the style
The author hereby grants to University of New Mexico permission to reproduce and
to distribute copies of this thesis document in whole or in part.
Signature of Author . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .
Department of Electrical Engineering and Computer Science
13 May 2001
Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
David Collis
Director, Sound and Furry Laboratory
Research Head
Certified by . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
George D. Pearson
Director, Technical Support
Thesis Supervisor
Accepted by. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
Arthur C. Clarke
Chairperson, Department Committee on Graduate Students 2
Massachusetts Institute of Technology 365
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
Chapter 1 displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
Sample Mathematics and Text
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may cause
difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and below
a1 = − lim z2f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1.2)
a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in the following
examples.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
A short line above:
x2 + y2 = z2 f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
1
X
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
3 4
Chapter 2 Bibliography
Features of this Shell [1] American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edition, 1992
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at rocket
chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
2.1 Section Headings
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J. Heat
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections. Mass Transfer, in print
2.1.1 Subsection [4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
Subsubsection phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids, 4th
Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
2.2 Tags
6 9
366 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
Northwestern University
NORTHWESTERN UNIVERSITY
A DISSERTATION
°
c Copyright by Name of Author 2002
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
All Rights Reserved
Field of Mathematics
By
Name of Author
EVANSTON, ILLINOIS
December 2002
ii
Northwestern University 367
ABSTRACT Acknowledgements
Name of Author
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major
The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own
abstract.
iii iv
Preface Contents
Acknowledgements iv
Preface v
List of Figures ix
Introduction 1
References 6
v vi
368 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
CHAPTER 1
This is the introduction. Use a normal chapter heading if you prefer to write 1.1. In-line and Displayed Mathematics
∞
X
(1.1) ai
i=1
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short
x2 + y 2 = z 2
1LAT X automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
E
1 2
3 4
and a short line below. for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ " = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ"} and
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
(1.3) f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) .
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
1.3. Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments |R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a |z| + r 1 + sin "
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the repre- implies
sentation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
Northwestern University 369
APPENDIX
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”,
Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases
and Liquids, John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
Liquids, 4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
6 7
Vita
8
370 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
BY the requirements for the degree, Doctor of Philosophy , has been approved and
Doctor of Philosophy
Ron Ausbrooks
Chairman of the Examining Committee
Date
ii
Similar to New Mexico State University 371
DEDICATION ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
though unnamed, who helped me in the completion of this task. who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also
(Note: The Dedication section is optional.) acknowledge any financial support or special research materials given you.
permission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright
for example, ”the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the
scope of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8).
iii iv
VITA ABSTRACT
Born May 16, 1962 etc....This is a vita—a simple biographical sketch—not a MY THESIS
X. Fan, N. B. Abu-Ghazaleh , and P. A. Wilsey , ”On the Complexity of Dr. Ron Ausbrooks, Chair
Scheduling MIMD Operations for SIMD Interpretation,” Journal of Parallel
and Distributed Computing, Vol 29, No 1, 91-95, August 1995. abstract.
Put the abstract here. The abstract must have a (1) statement of the problem,
R. A. Bagley , P. A. Wilsey, and N. B. Abu-Ghazaleh, ”Composing Functional
Unit Blocks for Efficient Interpretation of MIMD Code Sequences on SIMD (2) an exposition of methods and procedures, and (3) a summary of the findings.
Processors,” Parallel Processing: CONPAR 94 - VAPP VI (LNCS 854), B.
Buchberger and J. Volkert (eds), 616-627, September 1994. abstract. The length may not exceed 350 words.
The above list of publications is done using a Custom List which provides a single
v vi
372 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1
2.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
2.1.1.1 Subsubsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
Subsubsubsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x = k=0 an;k T x
Subsubsubsubsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing
2.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
above and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short
APPENDICES
or long, as shown in the following examples.
A. THE APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
A short line above:
B. ANOTHER APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
x2 + y2 = z 2
vii 1
A long line above may depend on your margins Fix z ∈ Γ ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius
Z Z
(¸ − z0 )m d¸
X 1
1 f (¸) d¸ 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for 2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins.
where for the remainder R(z) we have
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
contents entries.
implies
tation
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
2 3
Similar to New Mexico State University 373
CHAPTER 2 Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for
George Bush
2.1 Section Headings
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
2.3 List Environments
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup
2.1.1 Subsection
at the bottom left of the screen.
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
1. List item 1
2.1.1.1 Subsubsection
2. List item 2
This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection. (a) A list item under a list item.
The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsec-
screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period
tion.
while the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character sur-
rounded by parentheses.
2.2 Tags
(b) Just another list item under a list item.
You can apply the logical markup tag Emphasized.
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, i. Third level list item under a list item.
Slanted, Small Caps, and Typewriter. A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
4 6
APPENDICES BIBLIOGRAPHY
[BB] Beeton, Barbara, Typesetting articles for the DECUS Proceedings with
TEX, Proceedings of the Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, USA
A. THE APPENDIX
Spring 1985, 349—356.
This is the appendix. Use the section division for the title of each appendix.
[ACP] Knuth, Donald E., The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley,
Vol. 2, second edition, 1981.
B. ANOTHER APPENDIX
[TB] Knuth, Donald E., The TEXbook, Addison-Wesley and American Mathe-
This is another appendix. matical Society, 1984.
[TD] Southall, Richard, First principles of typographic design for document pro-
duction, TUGboat Vol. 5 (1984), No. 2, 79—90; Corrigenda, Vol. 6 (1985),
No. 1, p. 6.
[TUB] TUGboat, the Newsletter of the TEX Users Group, TEX Users Group, c/o
American Mathematical Society, P. O. Box 9506, Providence, RI, 02940.
8 9
374 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
A Dissertation
Submitted to the Graduate Faculty (OBTAIN AT THE GRADUATE SCHOOL)
of the
North Dakota State University
of Agriculture and Applied Science
MY THESIS
by
A. U. Thor
A THESIS
by
A. U. Thor
By Thesis Committee
, Chairperson
In Partial Fulfillment of the Requirements
for the Degree of
DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY
Major Department:
Mathematics
November, 1998.
ABSTRACT DEDICATION
Thor, Alan Uthur, B.S., M.S., Mathematics, College of Arts and Sciences, North Dakota
State University. November, 1998. My Thesis Major Professor: Dr. Merciless Ming. This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, though
unnamed, who helped me in the completion of this task. (The Dedication is optional.)
Place abstract here.
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends ABSTRACT. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . ii
who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowl- DEDICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . iii
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . iv
edge any financial support or special research materials given you.
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. vi
Copyright permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) per-
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . vii
mission has been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected
CHAPTER 1. SAMPLE MATHEMATICS AND TEXT . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 1
items and (2) gives the source of the permission.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the research is discussed, for R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
example, ”the motivation for the study, the background of the project, the scope of the 1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . 2
research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996, p. 7-8). CHAPTER 2. FEATURES OF THIS SHELL . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. 4
2.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
REFERENCES CITED . .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
iv
376 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X
ai (1..1)
i=1
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as
x2 + y 2 = z 2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe-
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®
ln tdt CHAPTER 2.
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of con- 2.1 Section Headings
tents entries.
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C +. If f (z) admits the representation Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (1..2) This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsection.
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and 2.2 Tags
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r = You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
|z| sin "=2. It follows from (1..3) that Small Caps, and Typewriter.
Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸ You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
= am + R(z), (1..4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) 2
BOLD, and CALLIGRAP HIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are cor-
where for the remainder R(z) we have
rect only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) You can apply the size tags , scriptsize , footnotesize , small, normalsize, large ,
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z) t in y
1. List item 1
Text Tags Mathematics Tags Size Tags
Table 2..1: Available tags A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scien-
• Bullet item 1
tific WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
• Bullet item 2
“scratchpad” computations.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created
1. American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edi-
using the Chapter Section/Body Tag.
tion, 1992
Following is a short bibliography. It has no relationship to the previous text,
2. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen
but can be used to show sample citations such as4 and.6 This typesetting style places
at rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
each citation in a superscript position. If you want multiple citations to appear next to
2;3;4
each other, either separate the citations using a superscripted comma like or type 3. Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int.
all of the citation keys inside a single citation, separating each with a comma like.2, 3, 4 J. Heat Mass Transfer, in print
4. Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and
6. Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and
7 8
378 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
UNIVERSITY OF MIAMI
By
A.U. Thor
A.U. Thor
A THESIS
Submitted to the Faculty
of the University of Miami
in partial fulfillment of the requirements for Approved:
the degree of Master of
A.U. Thor
Chapter 1
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The
X
∞
ai (1.1)
i=1
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
2 3
A short line above: Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ " = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
x2 + y 2 = z 2
f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math-
where for the remainder R(z) we have
ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
|R(z)| ≤ r −1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
R¯ ¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4)
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents implies
entries.
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like dz
Chapter 2
Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
2.1.1 Subsection
Subsubsection
tion.
2.2 Tags
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
6 7
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD BOLD, (a) A list item under a list item.
and C ALLIG RAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are correct only The typeset style for this level is different than the screen style. The
when applied to uppercase letters A through Z. screen shows a lower case alphabetic character followed by a period while
You can apply the size tags tiny , scriptsize, footnotesize , small , normalsize, large , the typeset style uses a lower case alphabetic character surrounded by
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scien-
(b) Just another list item under a list item.
tific WorkPlace switches to mathematics mode. This is convenient for carrying out
i. Third level list item under a list item.
“scratchpad” computations.
A. Fourth and final level of list items allowed.
Following is a group of paragraphs marked as Body Quote. This environment is
Ask not what your country can do for you; ask what you can do for your
— Second level bullet item.
country. John F Kennedy
∗ Third level bullet item.
I am not a crook. Richard Nixon
· Fourth (and final) level bullet item.
It’s no exaggeration to say the undecideds could go one way or another.
George Bush Description List Each description list item has a term followed by the description
of that term. Double click the term box to enter the term, or to change it.
2.3 List Environments
Bunyip Mythical beast of Australian Aboriginal legends.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup at the
1. List item 1
2. List item 2
Similar to University of Miami 381
Appendix A
The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be created
9
382 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
MY THESIS
by
A. U. Thor
c A. U. Thor 1998
Copyright °
A Thesis submitted to the faculty of
The University of Utah
All Rights Reserved
in partial fulfillment of the requirements for the degree of
Master of Mediocrity
Department of Mathematics
October 1998
Similar to University of Utah 383
ABSTRACT CONTENTS
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The
ABSTRACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
major finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm
LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
water. The success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
own abstract. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Appendices
A. The First Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1 Available tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends
who have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also ac-
knowledge any financial support or special research materials given you. Copyright
permissions may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) permission has
been granted for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected items
and (2) gives the source of the permission. Use a Preface rather than Acknowledg-
ments when the research is discussed, for example, ”the motivation for the study,
the background of the project, the scope of the research, and the purpose of the
vi
384 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section
heads may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
contents entries.
∞
X
ai (1.1)
i=1
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments
implies Use the Section tag for major sections, and the Subsection tag for subsections.
tion.
2.2 Tags
You can apply the visual markup tags Bold, Italics, Roman, Sans Serif, Slanted,
You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags fraktur; BLACKBOARD
BOLD, and CALLIG RAPHIC. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
5 7
Bold Fraktur tiny The appendix fragment is used only once. Subsequent appendices can be
Slanted large
Typewriter huge
Huge
This is a Body Math paragraph. Each time you press the Enter key, Scientific
“scratchpad” computations.
You can create numbered, bulleted, and description lists using the tag popup
University of Arizona
Table of Contents
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Manual for Theses and Dissertations formatted
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
with ua-thesis.cls with the draft Option Abstract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Acknowledgments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
by Chapter 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
The Graduate College
Chapter 2. University Microfilms Incorporated (UMI) . . . . . . 8
Appendix B. Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
1996
Appendix C. Human/Animal Subjects Approval . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
University of Arizona 387
4 5
This example dissertation contains the original text of the “Manual for Theses and
Table 4.1. Available tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Dissertations”, written by the Graduate College at the University of Arizona. It has
been obtained via the internet at
http://grad.admin.arizona.edu/degreecert/ThesisManual/manual.htm
on May 10, 1996. The page was last updated November 9, 1995. No guarantee is
made that this information is current, and students should check with the Graduate
College before submitting a dissertation or thesis.
6 7
Acknowledgments
Chapter 1
The contents of this example dissertation has been entirely written by the Graduate Introduction
College at the University of Arizona.
Use this manual as a guide for setting up the physical format of your thesis, dis-
sertation or document. Your thesis will represent you, your department, and The
University of Arizona in the international scholarly community. Your work is im-
portant and worthy of professional presentation. This manual lists Graduate College
requirements for the mechanical aspects of meeting these high standards.
In this manual the word thesis, includes documents and dissertations. If format
requirements for the document or dissertation vary from those for the thesis, specific
requirements for each type of paper will be listed.
Two final copies of the thesis must be submitted; both must meet all specifications
of this manual. The two final copies should be submitted unbound in a box to the
Graduate College Degree Certification Office.
388 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
8 9
Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Your thesis will be published by University Microfilms Incorporated, Ann Arbor, 3.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
Michigan. Upon certification by your major professor, your examining committee, P∞
and the Graduate College, a copy of the thesis and a Special Abstract are forwarded The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
to UMI. The manuscript is cataloged and microfilmed, the microfilm negative is in- ∞
X
spected and put in vault storage. Paper copies of your work will be produced on ai (3.1)
demand by UMI. Catalog information is sent to the Library of Congress for produc- i=1
tion and distribution of catalog cards for libraries. The original copy of the thesis is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 3.1.
is returned to The University of Arizona Library. The Special Abstract is printed Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
in Microfilm Abstracts and distributed to leading libraries in the United States and nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P∞ P∞
° n = k=0 (a n;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;kT kx con-
+
abroad and to a selected list ofjournals and abstracting services.
Publication by UMI does not preclude publication by other means later. You verges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
are urged to submit your work for publication in a scholarly or professional journal. Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above
Suitable acknowledgment must indicate that the publication is a thesis, dissertation, and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
or document, or portion thereof, which was submitted in partial fulfillment of the as shown in the following examples.
requirements for a degree at the University of Arizona. A short line above:
You must complete a UMI publication agreement, available through the Degree x2 + y 2 = z 2
Certification Office.
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for math-
ematical displays, regardless of the margins.
R¯
3.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.
10 11
4.5 Printers
Laser printing or other letter quality printing is required. Impact, or daisy wheel
printing is generally acceptable. 24-pin dot matrix near letter quality and draft
quality printing are not acceptable.
12 15
16 17
A.2 Appendices
Appendix B
All mechanical requirements for Appendices listed in the ORDER OF SECTIONS
apply. Your appendices will consist of:
Permissions
1. A reprint of each paper as a separate appendix in the following order:
(a) a copy of the title page of the journal in which the article appeared Use of copyrighted material in your thesis, including illustrations, usually requires
written permission from the copyright holder. Start this time-consuming process as
(b) the statement of permission for use of copyrighted material (see Appendix early as possible. Play it safe and assume that you must obtain permission if the
B: Permissions) material is copyrighted. Consult your advisor or departmental graduate secretary
(c) the reprint(s), copied single-sided onto the required type of paper about this process.
Exceptions, sometimes pertaining to small fractions of a musical score or other
2. Supplementary materials such as data tables, graphs, and maps which might document, are governed by the concept of ”fair use.” Factors weighed in determining
ordinarily appear as appendices to a thesis. ”fair use” include: the purpose of the use, whether commercial or non-profit and
educational; the nature of the copyrighted work; the amount and substance of the
These two types of appendices form a single sequence, assigned letters and titled material used in relation to the entire work; and the effect of the use upon the potential
as described in this manual. All Appendix pages are part of the single pagination market for or value of the copyrighted work. The ”fair use” concept is explained in
sequence of the thesis. The page numbers will be typed in as needed. detail in the Chicago Manual of Style. According to the Association of American
University Presses, permission is required for quotations which are complete units,
for example, an entire poem, letter, book chapter, or an entire map, chart, drawing
or other illustration.
Permission to use copyrighted material should be in writing and retained by the
author. The release letters should indicate that permission extends to microfilming
and publication by University Microfilms Incorporated and that the copyright owners
are aware that UMI may sell, on demand, single copies of the thesis, dissertation or
document, including the copyrighted materials, for scholarly purposes. UMI requires
copies of permission letters to be attached to the publication agreement, and assumes
no liability for copyright violations. If permission letters are not supplied, copyrighted
materials may not be filmed.
It is polite and good practice to obtain permission to use noncopyrighted material,
which may or may not be acknowledged in the text.
For additional information, telephone the Copyright Public Information Office in
Washington, DC, (202) 479-0700, weekdays between 8:30 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. EST or
write to the Copyright Office, Library of Congress, Washington D.C. 20559.
390 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
University of California
by
The dissertation of A. U. Thor is approved:
A. U. Thor
Chair Date
A dissertation submitted in partial satisfaction of the
requirements for the degree of
Doctor of Philosophy
in Date
Aboriginal Basketry
in the
Date
GRADUATE DIVISION
of the
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA, BERKELEY
Committee in charge:
Professor Abundant Knowledge, Chair
Professor Ivory Tower Spring 2004
Professor General Reference
Spring 2004
University of California 391
Copyright 2004 by
by
A. U. Thor
A. U. Thor
Doctor of Philosophy in Aboriginal Basketry
We study the effects of warm water on the local penguin population. The major finding is
that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The success factor is
i ii
Contents
List of Tables iv
To my mother,who never gave up on me.
I First Part 1
1 Introduction 2
4 Conclusion 9
iv v
Acknowledgments
List of Tables
1.1 A normalsize table. There has been a complaint that table captions are not
single-spaced. This is odd because the code indicates that they should be. . 2
1.2 A small table. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
2 3
Chapter 1 Chapter 2
Every dissertation should have an introduction. You might not realize it, but the
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
introduction should introduce the concepts, background, and goals of the dissertation.
P∞
Title Author The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
War And Peace Leo Tolstoy
∞
X
The Great Gatsby F. Scott Fitzgerald
ai (2.1)
Table 1.1: A normalsize table. There has been a complaint that table captions are not i=1
single-spaced. This is odd because the code indicates that they should be.
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 2.1.
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown
4 6
x2 + y2 = z2
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
3.1.1 Subsection
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environ-
This is some harmless text under a subsection.
ments
Subsubsection
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a
well-known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions. This is some harmless text under a subsubsection.
Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation Subsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsection.
µ ¶
a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z Subsubsubsubsection This is some harmless text under a subsubsubsubsec-
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then tion.
9 10
Chapter 4 Appendix A
Every dissertation needs a conclusion, but clearly, we don’t see one here. Our Ancillary material should be put in appendices, which appear after the bibliogra-
University of Georgia
Michael A. Covington
Example of a Thesis Formatted with LaTeX Using the University of Georgia Style
Macro Package, Version 1.9a
(Under the direction of Abraham Baldwin) Example of a Thesis
of the
Doctor of Philosophy
Athens, Georgia
1991
University of Georgia 395
Example of a Thesis
by
Michael A. Covington
c 1991
°
Major Professor
Date
Approved:
Graduate Dean
Date
Acknowledgements Preface
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends who This is the preface and it is created using a TeX field in a paragraph by itself. When
have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowledge the document is loaded, this appears in the edit window like a normal chapter, but it
any financial support or special research materials given you. Copyright permissions is actually an unnumbered chapter. The TeX field at the beginning of this paragraph
may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) permission has been granted sets the correct page heading for the Preface portion of the document. The preface
for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected items and (2) gives does not appear in the table of contents..
the source of the permission. Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the
research is discussed, for example, ”the motivation for the study, the background
of the project, the scope of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian,
1996, p. 7-8).
ii iii
396 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
Introduction
Page
Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii This document is an example of how to format a thesis or dissertation using LaTeX
LaTeX (with its parent TeX) has two major advantages for academic use. First,
Chapter
to a remarkable degree it makes design decisions automatically. The author supplies
1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
only the words of a text, and LaTeX places them on the page in an aesthetic manner,
2 Sample Mathematics and Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
avoiding rivers and awkward breaks. In this respect LaTeX is like a very intelligent
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . 3
typist or typesetter.
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . 4
Second, LaTeX can typeset complex mathematical formulas such as
2.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi- ∞
X p +q+r
xy+z =
ronments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 s + t+u + v
i=1
P∞ y+z p+q+r
3 Features of the Shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 both displayed (as shown above) and in the text, as in i=1 x = s+t+u+v
. This
3.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 makes TeX and LaTeX indispensable for mathematicians, physicists, and the like.
3.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 LaTeX also has built—in formats for other kinds of displayed material such as
iv 1
If you wish, quotes and other displayed material can be single—spaced; here is an
2.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics
example of how that is achieved:
P∞
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
Yes, I wrote “The Purple Cow.”
∞
X
I’m sorry now I wrote it.
ai (2.1)
But I can tell you anyhow
i=1
I’ll kill you if you quote it!
– Anonymous? is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 2.1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a
Well, maybe it’s not as anonymous as it looks. There you have it.1 Whenever
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
you quote parts of a computer program in English text, they should be set off by P∞ + P∞ k
°n = k=0 (an;k+1 − a n;k) → 0. Then for each x in C , Anx = k=0 an;k T x
using typewriter type.
converges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
x2 + y2 = z 2
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
3
University of Georgia 397
4
R¯
2.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents Chapter 3
entries.
Features of the Shell
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well- 3.1 Section Headings
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r −1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r) You can apply the special, mathematics only, tags BLACKBOARD BOLD,
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin " CALLIGRAPHIC, and fraktur. Note that blackboard bold and calligraphic are
= · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin " correct only when applied to uppercase letters A through Z.
Appendix
Bibliography
Some More Things
LaTeX has powerful bibliography—generating tools built in, and you’re welcome to
use them. If you don’t, you should use the “reflist” environment (a U.Ga. specialty) This is where an appendix could go. To include a single appendix simply place the
instead, and type your reference list, like this: command “\appendix” and then use the “\chapter*” command to begin and name
your appendix.
Abrahams, P. W.; Berry, K.; and Hargreaves, K. A. (1990) TeX for the Impatient.
If you have more than one appendix, use the command “\appendices” and the
Reading, Mass.: Addison—Wesley.
regular “\chapter” command to begin and name each appendix.
Knuth, D. E. (1984) The TeXbook. Reading, Mass.: Addison—Wesley.
9 10
398 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
Thesis Title
by
A. U. Thor
°2004,
c A. U. Thor
THESIS
Master of Science
Mathematics
December, 2004
iii
University of New Mexico 399
Dedication Acknowledgments
I would like to thank my advisor, Professor Martin Sheen, for his support and some
great action movies. I would also like to thank my dog, Spot, who only ate my
This work is dedicated to my mother and father and to the many others, though homework two or three times. I have several other people I would like to thank, as
unnamed, who helped me in the completion of this task. well. 1
iv v
Thesis Title
Thesis Title
by
A. U. Thor
by
A.A.S., University of Southern Swampland, 1988
M.S., Art Therapy, University of New Mexico, 1991
A. U. Thor
M.S., Mathematics, University of New Mexico, 2004
ABSTRACT OF THESIS
Master of Science finding is that it is extremely difficult to induce penguins to drink warm water. The
Mathematics success factor is approximately −e−i¼ − 1. Replace this text with your own abstract.
December, 2004
vii
400 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
Contents Glossary
Glossary xi
Introduction xii
A Proving E = M C 2 4
B Derivation of A = ¼r 2 5
viii xi
Introduction Chapter 1
Every dissertation should have an introduction. You might not realize it, but the Sample Mathematics and Text
introduction should introduce the concepts, backgrouand, and goals of the disserta-
tion.
P∞
The expression i=1 a i is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
X
∞
ai (1.1)
i=1
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays. 1 The spacing above
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long,
as shown in the following examples.
1LAT
EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths.
xii 1
University of New Mexico 401
Chapter 1. Sample Mathematics and Text Chapter 1. Sample Mathematics and Text
A short line above: Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ " → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ "} and
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 Z X 1 Z m
1 f (¸) d¸ 1 (¸ − z0) d¸
2 = am 2 + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z) m=0
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for
mathematical displays, regardless of the margins. where for the remainder R(z) we have
d
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a 1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
2 3
Appendix A Appendix B
Proving E = MC 2 Derivation of A = ¼r 2
I refer the reader to many of grandpa’s famous books on this subject. A circle is really a square without corners. QED.
4 5
402 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
1 Introduction 1
2 Applications 2
2.1 Biomedical Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
8
5.1 Section Headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.1.1 Subsection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.2 Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
5.3 List Environments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
John Zaitseff (2120715)
6 Conclusions 11
Bachelor of Engineering (Computer Engineering)
A Élan Computer Schematics 13
October 1995
i
University of New South Wales 403
Acknowledgements
The acknowledgment is the place to thank the faculty, staff, family, and friends who
have assisted you in preparing your thesis or dissertation. You may also acknowledge
any financial support or special research materials given you. Copyright permissions
may also be acknowledged here by stating that: (1) permission has been granted
for reproduction of tables, tests, and other copyright protected items and (2) gives
the source of the permission. Use a Preface rather than Acknowledgments when the
research is discussed, for example, ”the motivation for the study, the background of
the project, the scope of the research, and the purpose of the paper” (Turabian, 1996,
p. 7-8).
iii 1
Chapter 2 Chapter 3
Applications Alternatives
2.1 Biomedical Applications In Chapter 2, we saw a number of applications in which a portable computer may be
used.
The rôle of the Élan Portable Computer, the system this thesis describes, in such ...
biomedical systems would be to actually take the place of the hand-held device taking The Élan CPU chooses the configuration mode at reset time, on the rising edge
data readings, or as part of the instrumentation modules placed around the house. of RESIN, by sampling the state of three pins: DTR, RTS and SOUT. These pins are
The requirements of the Élan Portable Computer in such systems are described in the usually used for serial port output, except for their special function at reset. To select
next chapter. one of the modes, we place 10 kΩ pull-up or pull-down resistors on these pins, as per
This paragraph is so important that we’ll repeat it for emphasis. The rôle of the Table 3.1. In this table, a “1” indicates pull-up, “0” indicates pull-down, and “X”
Élan Portable Computer, the system this thesis describes, in such biomedical systems indicates that no resistor is required.
would be to actually take the place of the hand-held device taking data readings, or
as part of the instrumentation modules placed around the house. The requirements of 3.0.1 Level 1 ISA Bus Support
the Élan Portable Computer in such systems are described in the next chapter.
Table 3.2 shows the meaning of the pins used in this mode.
Before we continue, a few points to note about the notation:
• A pin name like PIN indicates either an active-high pin (i.e., where the pin is
asserted when it is at a High level, generally either 3.3 V or 5 V), or a rising-edge
2 3
404 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
3. Alternatives 4 3. Alternatives 5
R¯
4.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln J@J
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads
may cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents
entries.
Chapter 4
4.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Envi-
ronments
Sample Mathematics and Text
A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-
known fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
4.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z) admits the representation
µ ¶
P∞ a1 1
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
∞
X
ai (4.1) for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
i=1
a1 = −lim z2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ" . (4.2)
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 4.1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ" } and
nonexpansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and
P P∞ k f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (4.3)
°n = ∞ k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, An x =
+
k=0 an;k T x con-
verges weakly to a fixed point of T [?].
Fix z ∈ Γ" , and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ − z| = r} be a circle with radius r =
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above
|z| sin"=2. It follows from (4.3) that
and below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as
Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
X
shown in the following examples. 1 f (¸) d¸ 1
= am + R(z), (4.4)
A short line above: 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
x2 + y2 = z 2
where for the remainder R(z) we have
and a short line below.
A long line above may depend on your margins |R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o (|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O (|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
|z| + r 1 + sin "
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 = · O (|z| + r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathe- Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2 , and hence by the Cauchy theorem (4.4)
matical displays, regardless of the margins. implies
1 A
LT EX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
that implies (4.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
6
University of New South Wales 405
Chapter 6 Bibliography
Conclusions [1] “Development of a Range of PCMCIA Type III Instrumentation Modules for Clin-
ical Measurement, based on the PoqetPad Plus Pen-based Computer ”, Branko
Celler, Biomedical Systems Laboratory, University of NSW, Australia, 23rd June
1993.
In conclusion, this project has been very challenging, but very interesting as well. [2] “ Élan Am386SC300 Microprocessor Data Sheet ”, Mobile Computing Products Di-
Although we were not able to proceed with the implementation, we are more than vision of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
reasonably satisfied that the design is sound and thorough. If the project is continued
[3] “ Élan Am386SC300 Microprocessor Programmers’ Reference Manual”, Mobile
in the next year, the Élan Portable Computer will eventually emerge as a symbol of Computing Products Division of Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.
today’s modern computing.
[4] “PC Interrupt List” Ralf Brown, Release 47, August 1995. Available as
ftp://ftp.cs.cmu.edu/afs/cs.cmu.edu/user/ralf/pub/inter47*.zip
[5] “PCMCIA Standards”, “PC Card Standard 2.1”, “Socket Services Specification
2.1 ”, “Card Services Specification 2.1 ”, “PC Card ATA Specification 1.02 ”,
“AIMS Specification 1.01 ”, “Recommended Extensions 1.0 ”, Personal Computer
Memory Card International Association, July 1993.
11 12
Appendix A
The following pages show the final Élan Portable Computer schematics. The actual
schematics are in the following order:
4. System Memory
5. Display Interface
6. PCMCIA Buffers
7. PCMCIA Connectors
8. Parallel Port
9. Serial Port
10. Keyboard Connector
11. Expansion Connector
13
406 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
University of Pittsburgh
MATHEMATICS DEPARTMENT
‘PITTETD’ CLASS
I. M. Student by
It was defended on
University of Pittsburgh
2004
ii
University of Pittsburgh 407
SAMPLE FILE FOR A THESIS WITH THE ‘PITTETD’ CLASS TABLE OF CONTENTS
I. M. Student, PhD
This document is a sample file for the creation of ETD’s at Pitt through LATEX. 1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . 3
BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
APPENDIX. TITLE OF APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
iii 1
R¯
1.2 MATHEMATICS IN SECTION HEADS ®
LN TDT
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
X
∞ Lemma 1. Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+ . If f (z) admits the representation
ai (1.1)
µ ¶
i=1 a1 1
f (z) = a0 + +o ,
z z
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non- for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ " = {z ∈ C + : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
expansive self map of C . Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and ° n =
P∞ P∞ k
a1 = − lim z 2 f 0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k ) → 0. Then for each x in C, A n x = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly to
+
a fixed point of T . Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C − : z ∈ Γ" } and
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in f (1=z) = a0 + a1z + o (z) . (1.3)
2 3
408 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
d
f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1 , as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ "=2,
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
Following is a short bibliography. It has no relationship to the previous text, but can be
BIBLIOGRAPHY
used to show sample citations such as [4] and [6]. This typesetting style places each citation
inside square brackets. If you want multiple citations to appear in a single set of square
brackets you must type all of the citation keys inside a single citation, separating each with [1] American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edition,
a comma. Here is an example: [2, 3, 4]. 1992
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for fluid-
phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
4 5
APPENDIX
TITLE OF APPENDIX
6
University of Washington 409
University of Washington
Doctor of Philosophy
Name of Chairperson
etc
University of Washington
Abstract
Thesis Title
by A. U. Thor
Extensive copying of this demonstration thesis, including its input files and macro package, Chair of Supervisory Committee:
is allowable for scholarly purposes, consistent with “fair use” as prescribed in the U.S. Professor Name of Chairperson
Copyright Law. Requests for copying or reproduction of this thesis may be avoided by a Chair’s department
ARGUMENT: replacement text which customizes a LATEX macro for each particular usage.
List of Figures ii
BACK-UP: a copy of a file to be used when catastrophe strikes the original. People who
List of Tables iii
make no back-ups deserve no sympathy.
Glossary iv
CONTROL SEQUENCE: the normal form of a command to LATEX.
Chapter 1: Sample Mathematics and Text 1
DELIMITER: something, often a character, that indicates the beginning and ending of
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
R an argument. More generally, a delimiter is a field separator.
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ®¯ lntdt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Theorems, Lemmata, and Other Theorem-like Environments . . . . . . . . . 2 DOCUMENT CLASS: a file of macros that tailors LATEX for a particular document. The
macros described by this thesis constitute a document class.
Appendix A: Proving E = MC2 3
Appendix B: Derivation of A = ¼r2 4 DOCUMENT OPTION: a macro or file of macros that further modifies LATEX for a partic-
ular document. The option [chapternotes] constitutes a document option.
Bibliography 6
FIGURE: illustrated material, including graphs, diagrams, drawings and photographs.
FONT: a character set (the alphabet plus digits and special symbols) of a particular size
and style. A couple of fonts used in this thesis are twelve point roman and twelve
point roman slanted.
FOOTNOTE: a note placed at the bottom of a page, end of a chapter, or end of a thesis
that comments on or cites a reference for a designated part of the text.
i iv
University of Washington 411
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS DEDICATION
The author wishes to express sincere appreciation to University Computing Services, To Mother
where he has had the opportunity to work with the TEX formatting system, and to the
author of TEX, Donald Knuth, il miglior fabbro.
The fake author wishes to express sincere appreciation to University Computing Services,
where he has had the opportunity to work with the TEX formatting system, and to the
author of TEX, Donald Knuth, il miglior fabbro.
vi vii
1 2
R¯
1.2 Mathematics in Section Heads ® ln tdt
Mathematics can appear in section heads. Note that mathematics in section heads may
Chapter 1
cause difficulties in typesetting styles with running headers or table of contents entries.
1.1 In-line and Displayed Mathematics A number of theorem-like environments is available. The following lemma is a well-known
P∞ fact on differentiation of asymptotic expansions of analytic functions.
The expression i=1 ai is in-line mathematics, while the numbered equation
∞
X Lemma 1 Let f (z) be an analytic function in C+. If f (z) admits the representation
ai (1.1) µ ¶
i=1 a1 1
f (z) = a0 + + o ,
z z
is displayed and automatically numbered as equation 1.1.
for z → ∞ inside a cone Γ" = {z ∈ C+ : 0 < " ≤ arg z ≤ ¼ − "} then
Let H be a Hilbert space, C be a closed bounded convex subset of H, T a non-
expansive self map of C. Suppose that as n → ∞, an;k → 0 for each k, and °n = a1 = − limz2 f0 (z) , z → ∞, z ∈ Γ". (1.2)
P∞ P∞ k
k=0 (an;k+1 − an;k) → 0. Then for each x in C, Anx = k=0 an;k T x converges weakly
+
Proof. Change z for 1=z. Then Γ" → Γ" = {z ∈ C− : z ∈ Γ"} and
to a fixed point of T .
Two sets of LATEX parameters govern mathematical displays.1 The spacing above and f (1=z) = a0 + a1z +o (z) . (1.3)
below a display depends on whether the lines above or below are short or long, as shown in
Fix z ∈ Γ", and let Cr (z) = {¸ ∈ C− : |¸ −z| = r} be a circle with radius r = |z| sin"=2.
the following examples.
It follows from (1.3) that
A short line above: Z Z
(¸ − z0)m d¸
1
1 f (¸) d¸ X 1
x2 + y2 = z2 = am + R(z), (1.4)
2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2 m=0 2¼i CH (z) (¸ − z)2
and a short line below. where for the remainder R(z) we have
A long line above may depend on your margins
|R(z)| ≤ r−1 max o(|z|) = r−1 max |¸| · O(|z| + r)
¸∈CH (z) ¸∈CH (z)
sin2 µ + cos2 µ = 1 |z| + r 1 + sin"
= · O(|z| +r) = · O (|z|) .
r sin "
as will a long line below. This line is long enough to illustrate the spacing for mathematical
Therefore R(z) → 0 as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2, and hence by the Cauchy theorem (1.4) implies
displays, regardless of the margins.
d
1 A
LTEX automatically selects the spacing depending on the surrounding line lengths. f (1=z) = a1 + R(z) → a1, as z → ∞, z ∈ Γ"=2,
dz
that implies (1.2) by substituting 1=z back for z.
412 Chapter 9 Thesis Shells
3 5
Appendix A VITA
PROVING E = MC2
Arthor U. Thor was born in an insignificant town whose only claim to fame is that it
produced such a fine specimen of a researcher.
I refer the reader to many of grandpa’s famous books on this subject.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
[1] American Petroleum Institute, Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, 5th edition,
1992
[2] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “Isolated fluid oxygen drop behavior in fluid hydrogen at
rocket chamber pressures”, Int. J. Heat Mass Transfer, 1998a, 41, 3537-3550
[3] Harstad, K. and Bellan, J., “The Lewis number under supercritical conditions”, Int. J.
Heat Mass Transfer, in print
[4] Hirshfelder, J. O., Curtis, C. F. and Bird, R. B., Molecular Theory of Gases and Liquids,
John Wiley and Sons, Inc., 1964
[5] Prausnitz, J., Lichtenthaler, R. and de Azevedo, E., Molecular thermodynamics for
fluid-phase equilibrium, Prentice -Hall, Inc., 1986
[6] Reid, R. C., Prausnitz, J. M. and Polling, B. E., The Properties of Gases and Liquids,
4th Edition, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1987
BibTEX
Using BibTEX with SWP or SW
If the shell for your SWP or SW document supports bibliographies, you can create au-
tomatic bibliographies with BibTEX, a public domain program created by Oren Patash-
nik. BibTEX uses the citations you insert into your document to extract bibliographic
information from established reference databases. When you compile your document,
BibTEX generates the bibliography, storing it in a file with the same name as your docu-
ment but with a .bbl extension. When you typeset, LATEX includes the .bbl file in your
document, formatting it and the citations according to the bibliography style you have
selected.
You must typeset your document to generate a BibTEX bibliography and the citations
that refer to it. If you don’t typeset, the bibliography and citation cross-references aren’t
generated. The bibliography doesn’t appear on the preview screen or in print, and the
citations appear in shaded boxes as they do in the document window.
Creating a BibTEX bibliography involves several steps:
• Creating or obtaining a BibTEX database.
• Specifying a BibTEX bibliography.
• Inserting an instruction to include the bibliography file, select the database, and spec-
ify the style.
• Creating citations in your document that refer to the entries in the selected database.
• Generating the bibliography.
Detailed instructions for creating a BibTEX bibliography appear in the online Help and
in Creating Documents with Scientific WorkPlace and Scientific Word. Additional infor-
mation about BibTEX is available if you typeset preview the btxdoc.dvi and btx-
hak.dvi files in the TCITeX\doc\BibTeX subdirectory of your program installa-
tion.
tem},
journal = {\mbox{G-Animal’s} Journal},
year = 1986,
}
Entries may also contain some optional information, as shown here:
@ARTICLE{article-full,
author = {L[eslie] A. Aamport},
title = {The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation Sys-
tem},
journal = {\mbox{G-Animal’s} Journal},
year = 1986,
volume = 41,
number = 7,
pages = "73+",
month = jul,
note = "This is a full ARTICLE entry",
}
The database information is stored in a logical format with no visual formatting infor-
mation. The bibliography style you choose determines which information to use when
you cite the publication and determines how to order, format, and punctuate it in the
citation itself and in the reference list of your document.
Although BibTEX databases are available from various sources, you can create your
own. One tool for creating, manipulating, and managing a bibliographic database is
the freely distributed program BibDB. Your program CD includes the Windows version
of BibDB in the WinBibDB subdirectory, and it is installed if you select the complete
installation type when SWP or SW was installed. The details of using BibDB to create
and edit BibTEX databases are outside the scope of this document, but more information
is available in the WinBibDB subdirectory and in many LATEX books.
appropriate for your work. If you are unsure of your requirements, we urge you to use
one of these standard BibTEX styles:
BibTEX Style Format
abbrv.bst Entries are labeled with numbers and sorted alphabetically,
with first names, months, and journal names abbreviated.
alpha.bst Entries are sorted alphabetically and labeled using an
abbreviation of the author’s name and the publication date.
plain.bst Entries are labeled with numbers and sorted alphabetically.
unsrt.bst Entries are labeled with numbers and appear in the order
of first citation.
b. On the Typeset Object toolbar, click the Bibliography button or, from the
Insert menu, choose Typeset Object, and then choose Bibliography.
c. From the BibTeX Bibliography dialog box, select the database files containing the
references you want to cite. More than one BibTEX database file can be selected.
3. In the Style area of the BibTeX Bibliography dialog box, select the BibTEX style
for formatting the references and citations.
4. Choose OK.
To help you select a suitable bibliography style, this chapter provides information
about many of the bibliography styles included with the program. The chapter indicates
how each style formats citations and the corresponding reference list labels and how
418 Chapter 10 Using BibTEX with SWP or SW
it organizes the reference list. For each style, the chapter notes the names of sample
databases provided and required programs, LATEX packages, or LATEX documentclasses,
if any. It also includes brief information about the origin and intended use of the style
and a sample typeset page showing a paragraph with citations and the corresponding
reference list formatted according to the style.
Unless otherwise noted, the sample pages were created with the Standard LATEX Ar-
ticle document shell. Therefore, the reference list carries the title References. With
the Standard LATEX Book or Report shells, the reference list carries the title Bibliogra-
phy. Also unless otherwise noted, the pages were created using the sample database
xampl.bib.
BibTEX Bibliography Styles
420 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
aaai-named.bst
Format of reference list label [Author, date]
[Author and Author date]
[Author et al., date]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [Author, date]
[Author and Author, date]
[Author et al., date]
Required files aaai-named.sty
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style supports short citations (year only) and requires certain redefinitions in the typesetting specifications
to work properly.
2. Save the file in the TCITeX/TeX/LaTeX/TCImisc directory of your program installation using the name
aaai-named.sty.
3. Open your document in SWP or SW and follow the standard procedure to add the package aaai-named.sty
to your document.
References
[Aamport, 1986] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, July 1986. This is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[Knuth, 1973c1981] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2
of The Art of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mas-
sachusetts, second edition, 10 January 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knvth, 1988] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art
Center, Stanford, California, February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. In David J. Lip-
coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, third edition, September 1977. This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis.
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Wizard V. Oz and
Mihalis Yannakakis, editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139,
Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Aca-
demic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fes-
tooning French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, June-August 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
422 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
aabbrv.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Required files LaTeX/contrib/other/BibTeX/apreambl.tex
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/abstyles
Sample BibTEX Database:
acompat.bib Contains compatibility definitions for use with standard styles;
does not contain any actual bibliography records.
The style is one of the BibTEX ‘adaptable’ family of styles derived by Hans-Hermann Bode. The program
automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears.
The style abbreviates first names, month names, and journal names in the entries. Otherwise, it is the same as
aplain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers.
References
[1] L. A. A ampo rt. The gnats and gnus d ocument preparation system.
G-Anim al’s Journal 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). This is a full ART ICL E entry.
[2] D. E. K nuth. “S em inu merical Algorith ms”, vol. 2 of “Th e Art of C om-
pu ter Programming”. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusetts, secon d ed.
(10 Jan . 1981) . T his is a full BOOK entry.
1
aalpha.bst 423
aalpha.bst
The style is one of the BibTEX ‘adaptable’ family of styles derived by Hans-Hermann Bode. The program
automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears.
The style uses source labels such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. Other-
wise, it is the same as aplain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically.
References
[Aam86] L[e slie] A . A amp ort. The gnats and gnu s document p reparation
syst em . G-An im al’s Journ al 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). This is a full
ARTIC LE entry.
[Knu 81] Don ald E. Knuth. “Seminumerical Algorith ms”, volume 2 of “Th e
Art of Comput er Programming”. Addison-Wesley, Readin g, Mas-
sachu setts, second edition (10 January 1981). T his is a full B OOK
entry.
[Knv88] Jill C . Knvth. The programming of comp uter art. Vernier Art Cen-
ter, Stan ford, C alifornia ( February 1988). T his is a fu ll B OOK LET
entry.
1
424 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
abbrv.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/base
One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, abbrv.bst creates compact entries by abbreviating first
names, month names, and journal names. Otherwise, it is the same as plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabeti-
cally and labels them with numbers.
References
[1] L. A. Aamp ort. The gn ats and gnus do cument preparation system.
G-Anim al’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. T he p rogramming of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, Feb. 1988. This is a full BO OKLET entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festooning Frenc h Phrase s.
PhD dissert ation, Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fr ench , Jun e-Aug.
1988. T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
achemso.bst 425
achemso.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/achemso
The style is provided with the achemso package, which produces bibliographies appropriate for use with the
American Chemical Society article shell. The style is similar to the LATEX standard bibliography style unsrt.bst,
with bibliography entries appearing in the order of their first citation.
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. S emigroup s of Recurren ces. In High Speed Computer and Algo-
rithm Organ ization, T hird ed .; Lipcoll, D. J.; Lawrie, D. H.; Sameh, A. H.,
Eds .; Fast C omp uters 23; Acad emic Press: New York, 1977 This is a full
INCO LLECT IO N entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V.; Ullman , J. D.; Yannakakis, M. On Notions of Information
Tran sfer in VL SI C ircu it s. In Proc. Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on
the Theory of Computing ; O z, W . V.; Yann akakis, M., Eds.; All AC M Con-
ferences 17; Acad emic Press: Boston, 1983 Th is is a fu ll INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A. G-An imal’s Journ al 1986, 41, 73+ Th is is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E. S eminumerical Algorithms; volu me 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Program ming Add ison-Wesley: Reading, Massachusetts, Second ed.; 1981
This is a full BO OK entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C. “Th e Programming of Compu ter Art”, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, 1988 T his is a fu ll BOOK LET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch Phrases,
PhD Dissertation thesis, Fanstord University, 1988 T his is a fu ll P HD THE-
SIS entry.
1
426 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
achemsol.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/achemso
The style is provided with the achemso package, which produces bibliographies appropriate for use with the
American Chemical Society article shell. The style is the same as achemso.bst, except that it includes the
annotate field. Bibliography entries appear in the order of their first citation.
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. S emigroup s of Recurren ces. In High Speed Computer and Algo-
rithm Organ ization, T hird ed .; Lipcoll, D. J.; Lawrie, D. H.; Sameh, A. H.,
Eds .; Fast C omp uters 23; Acad emic Press: New York, 1977 This is a full
INCO LLECT IO N entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V.; Ullman , J. D.; Yannakakis, M. On Notions of Information
Tran sfer in VL SI C ircu it s. In Proc. Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on
the Theory of Computing ; O z, W . V.; Yann akakis, M., Eds.; All AC M Con-
ferences 17; Acad emic Press: Boston, 1983 Th is is a fu ll INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A. G-An imal’s Journ al 1986, 41, 73+ Th is is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E. S eminumerical Algorithms; volu me 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Program ming Add ison-Wesley: Reading, Massachusetts, Second ed.; 1981
This is a full BO OK entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C. “Th e Programming of Compu ter Art”, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, 1988 T his is a fu ll BOOK LET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch Phrases,
PhD Dissertation thesis, Fanstord University, 1988 T his is a fu ll P HD THE-
SIS entry.
1
acm.bst 427
acm.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/base
Sample BibTEX Database:
pubform.bib
In entries for the ACM Transactions bibliography style (24-Jan.-88 version), the author’s name appears in small
capitals, with the last name followed by initials. Some dates appear in parentheses. Otherwise, the style is similar to
abbrv.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers and which abbreviates first names,
month names, and journal names. This BibTEX style is included in the bst\base directory of the TrueTEX
distribution, but does not appear on CTAN in the directory biblio/BibTeX/distribs/styles.
References
[1] Aampo rt, L. A. The gnats and gnu s d ocument prep aration system.
G-Anim al’s Journal 41, 7 (July 1986), 73+ . Th is is a full ARTICLE en-
try.
[2] Knu th , D. E. Semin umerical Algorithms, second ed., vol. 2 of The Art of
Com puter Programm ing. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, M assachuset ts, 10 Jan.
1981. T his is a full B OOK entry.
[6] Phon y-Balon ey, F. P. Fightin g Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phrases. Ph D dissert ation, Fanstord Un iversity, Department of French,
Jun e-Aug. 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
428 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
address.bst
Format of reference list label Name
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by person
Format of citation Name
Required files directory package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/directory
Sample BibTEX Databases:
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your own
address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it produces
contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You can also use
the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document; see letter.bst on
page 507.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} com-
mand. In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described
below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates an address book with no citations in the text.
The address.bst style produces a reference list containing full database information corresponding to the
cited keys. It prints the corresponding name at the citation point unless the \nodir{key} command is used.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. In the entry area, type \dir{key} where key is the key for the database entry you want to cite.
4. Choose OK.
The first sample shown below illustrates an address list created with \dir{key} commands in the text. The
second sample illustrates an address list created using a \nodir{*} command without any preceding text. The
sample documents were created with the sample databases business.bib and family.bib.
address.bst 429
Daffy Duck Knudson, Bugs Bunny and Pluto (aka gnat, gnu and pluto)
? 10/2, 5/11 and 1/1
p Haight Street 512, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-765.43.21
gsm: +01-(0)5-555.55.55
acc: 010-1234567-05
r Manor Lane 2, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-876.54.32
w University of Novosibirsk, Department of Octopus Parthenogenesis
Planck Institut (V1-V2, Park. U-67), Hessenberg Road, 80214 Novosi-
birsk, Gnuland
Microknud Corp.
Haight Street 513
80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-465.83.99
fax: 005.79.00
http://microknu.com/ass/bill.html
1
430 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
Daffy Duck Knudson, Bugs Bunny and Pluto (aka gnat, gnu and pluto)
? 10/2, 5/11 and 1/1
p Haight Street 512, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-765.43.21
gsm: +01-(0)5-555.55.55
acc: 010-1234567-05
r Manor Lane 2, 80214 Novosibirsk, Gnuland
phn: +01-(0)2-876.54.32
w University of Novosibirsk, Department of Octopus Parthenogenesis
Planck Institut (V1-V2, Park. U-67), Hessenberg Road, 80214 Novosi-
birsk, Gnuland
1
address-html.bst 431
address-html.bst
Format of reference list label Name
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by person
Format of citation Name or none
Required files directory package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/directory
Sample BibTEX Databases:
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your own
address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it produces
contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You can also use
the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document; see letter.bst on
page 507.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} command.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described on
page 428. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates an address book with no citations in the
text.
Similar to address.bst, address-html.bst produces an HTML file for a reference list containing full
database information corresponding to the cited keys or to the \nodir{key} command. The style supports URL
fields within the bibliographic information, so that entries in the list become links to the resources themselves. The
resulting HTML file can stand alone or be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and specify
and generate a BibTEX address list. Then, use the resulting HTML file as it stands or incorporate it into your
document, according to the instructions that follow.
The sample .htm file shown here was created in SWP according to these instructions. The .tex file includes a
\nodir{*} command that was deleted after the .htm file was created but before the document was exported to
HTML. The sample document was created with the sample databases business.bib and family.bib.
adfathesis.bst 433
adfathesis.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author date)
(Author date, Author date)
(Author et al. date)
Required files harvard package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/adfathesis
This style is designed for theses at the Australian Defence Force Academy. It is a modified version of the style
jphysicsB.bst, which is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles. To avoid LATEX
errors when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.
References
Aamport L A (1986). The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System,
G-Animal’s Journal 41(7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth D E (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, Vol. 2 of The Art of Computer
Programming, second edn, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts. This
is a full BOOK entry.
Knvth J C (1988). ‘The Programming of Computer Art’, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
Lincoll D D (1977). Semigroups of Recurrences, in D J Lipcoll, D H Lawrie &
A H Sameh, eds, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, third
edn, number 23 in ‘Fast Computers’, Academic Press, New York, part 3,
pp. 179—183. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
1
434 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
agsm.bst
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986), ‘Th e gnats and gnu s docum ent preparation system’,
G -Animal’s Journ al 41(7) , 73+. T his is a full ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , D. E. (1981), Seminum erical Algorithms, Vol. 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter
Prog ram min g, secon d edn, Ad dison-Wesley, Read in g, Massachusetts. Th is
is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, J. C. (1988) , ‘The program ming of comp uter art’, Vernier Art Center,
S tanford, C alifornia. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
1
alpha.bst 435
alpha.bst
The style uses source labels such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. Other-
wise, it is the same as plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically.
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aam port. The gnats an d gnu s d ocument preparation sys-
tem. G -Animal’s Journ al, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ARTI-
C LE entry.
[Knu 81] Donald E. K nuth . Se min um erical Algorithm s, volu me 2 of T he Art
of Computer Programmin g. Add ison -Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts,
second edition , 10 January 1981. Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C . K nvth. T he program min g of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford , Californ ia, Febru ar y 1988. This is a full B OOK LET entry.
[PB88] F. Ph id ias Phony-Balon ey. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g
French Phrases. P hD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Departm ent
of French, Jun e-August 1988. T his is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
436 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
alphahtml.bst
This style creates a reference list appropriate for use on websites. It produces the reference list as an HTML
file contained within the commands <dl> and </dl>. The style supports URL fields within the bibliographic
information, so that entries in the bibliography become links to the resources themselves. The resulting HTML file
can be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations. The symbols ~and – remain in
the output file, but can be changed with a post-processor to and &enspace; or ’ ’ and ’-’ as required.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references.
The style is based on plainhtml.bst and alpha.bst, which creates source labels such as Knu66, formed
from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style sorts entries alphabetically. The styles alphahtml-
date.bst and alphahtmldater.bst are related.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and
to specify and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document
according to the instructions that follow.
The sample .htm file shown on the next page was created according to these instructions and using a modification
of the database file bibrefs.bib.
alphahtml.bst 437
438 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
alphahtmldate.bst
This style creates a reference list appropriate for use on websites. It produces the reference list as an HTML
file contained within the commands <dl> and </dl>. The style supports URL fields within the bibliographic
information, so that entries in the bibliography become links to the resources themselves. The resulting HTML file
can be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations. The symbols ~and – remain in
the output file, but can be changed with a post-processor to and &enspace; or ’ ’ and ’-’ as required.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references.
The style is based on alphahtml.bst, which creates source labels such as Knu66, formed from the author’s
name and the year of publication. The style sorts entries chronologically. It is related to alphahtmldater.bst.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and specify
and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document as described
for alphahtml.bst on page 436. The sample .htm file below was created according to those instructions and
using a modification of the database file bibrefs.bib.
alphahtmldater.bst 439
alphahtmldater.bst
This style creates a reference list appropriate for use on websites. It produces the reference list as an HTML
file contained within the commands <dl> and </dl>. The style supports URL fields within the bibliographic
information, so that entries in the bibliography become links to the resources themselves. The resulting HTML file
can be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations. The symbols ~and – remain in
the output file, but can be changed with a post-processor to and &enspace; or ’ ’ and ’-’ as required.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on alphahtml.bst,
but lists references in reverse chronological order.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and
to specify and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document
as described for alphahtml.bst on page 436. The sample .htm file below was created according to those
instructions and using a modification of the database file bibrefs.bib.
440 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
amsalpha.bst
AMS-LATEX is a required component of the standard LATEX distribution. The style constructs source labels such
as Knu66, from the author’s name and the year of publication.
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aamp ort , The gnats and gnu s docu me nt preparation sys-
tem, G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), n o. 7, 73+ , This is a full ARTI-
C LE entry.
[Knu 81] Donald E. K nuth , S em inu merical algorithm s, s econd ed ., The Art
of Compu ter Progr amming, vol. 2, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mas-
sachu setts, 10 January 1981, T his is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C. K nvth, The programm in g of com puter art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford , Californ ia, Febru ar y 1988, Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
[OUY83] Alfred V. O ah o, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mih alis Yan nakakis, On no-
tion s of inform ation tran sfer in VL SI circuits, Proc. Fifteen th Annual
ACM Symp osium on the Th eory of C om putin g (Boston) (W izard V.
Oz and Mihalis Yann akakis, eds.), All AC M C on ferences, no. 17, Th e
OX Associat ion for Comp uting Mach in ery, Acad emic Press, March
1983, Th is is a full INPROC EDINGS entry, p p. 133—139.
[PB88] F. Phidias Phony-Balon ey, Fighting fire with fire : Festoonin g Fren ch
phrases, PhD dissertation, Fan stord University, D ep artment of
French, Jun e-August 1988, This is a full PHDT HESIS ent ry.
1
amsplain.bst 441
amsplain.bst
AMS-LATEX is a required component of the standard LATEX distribution. The style sorts entries alphabetically
and labels them with numbers.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport, The gnats and gnus document preparation system,
G-Animal’s Jou rnal 41 (1986), no. 7, 73+, This is a full ARTIC LE entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth, The program ming of compu ter art, Vernier Art Cent er, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, February 1988, T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll, S emigroups of recurrences, High S peed Compu ter and
Algorithm Organization (David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh,
eds.), Fast Comp uters, no. 23, Acad emic P ress, New York, t hird ed ., S eptem-
b er 1977, T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry, p p. 179—183.
1
442 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
annotate.bst
Format of reference list label [Source label]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [Source label]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
This style is based on the standard BibTEX style alpha.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and forms
entry labels, such as Knu66, from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style adds the annote keyword.
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aam port. The gnats an d gnu s d ocument preparation sys-
tem. G -Animal’s Journ al, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ARTI-
C LE entry.
[Knu 81] Donald E. K nuth . Se min um erical Algorithm s, volu me 2 of T he Art
of Computer Programmin g. Add ison -Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts,
second edition , 10 January 1981. Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C . K nvth. T he program min g of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford , Californ ia, Febru ar y 1988. This is a full B OOK LET entry.
[PB88] F. Ph id ias Phony-Balon ey. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g
French Phrases. P hD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Departm ent
of French, Jun e-August 1988. T his is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
annotation.bst 443
annotation.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
This style is based on the standard BibTEX style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels
them with numbers. The style adds the annote keyword, which appears in the reference list.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamp ort. Th e gnats and gnus d ocument preparat ion system.
G-Anim al’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
Ke y: article-full
[2] Donald E. Knuth . Seminum erical Alg orithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm in g. Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BO OK entry.
Ke y: b ook-fu ll
[3] Jill C . Knvth . The programming of comp uter art . Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
Ke y: b ooklet-full
[4] Daniel D. Lin coll. Semigrou ps of recu rrences. In David J. Lip coll, D. H.
Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh, editors, High S peed Compute r an d Algorithm Or-
ganization, nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition , Sept emb er 1977. This is a fu ll INC OLL EC-
TIO N entry.
Ke y: incollection-fu ll
[5] Alfred V. O ah o, Jeffrey D. Ullman, an d Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circu its. In W izard V. O z and Mihalis
Yannakakis, ed itors, Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Symposium on the The-
ory of Computin g, numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, pages 133—139,
Boston, M arch 1983. Th e OX Association for Comp uting Mach in ery, Aca-
demic Press. Th is is a full INPROC EDINGS entry.
Ke y: inproceedings-fu ll
[6] F. Phid ias Ph ony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing French
Phrases. Ph D dissert ation, Fanstord Un iversity, Department of French,
Jun e-August 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
Ke y: p hdt hesis-full
1
444 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
anotit.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Required files LaTeX/contrib/other/BibTeX/apreambl.tex
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/abstyles
Sample BibTEX Database:
acompat.bib Contains compatibility definitions for use with standard styles;
does not contain any actual bibliography records.
The style is one of the BibTEX ‘adaptable’ family of styles derived by Hans-Hermann Bode. The program
automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears.
The style excludes the titles of articles. Otherwise, it is the same as aabbrv.bst, which abbreviates first
names, month names, and journal names in the entries. The style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers.
References
[1] L. A. Aamport. G -Animal’s Jou rn al 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). T his is a
full ARTICLE entry.
[2] D. E. K nuth. “S em inu merical Algorith ms”, vol. 2 of “Th e Art of C om-
pu ter Programming”. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusetts, secon d ed.
(10 Jan . 1981) . T his is a full BOOK entry.
1
apa.bst 445
apa.bst
The style has been adapted from alpha.bst. It supports a short citation form and must be used with the
astron package.
References
Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion. This is a full BOOK entry.
Knvth, J. C. (1988). The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In Lipcoll, D. J., Lawrie,
D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Or-
ganization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notions of infor-
mation transfer in VLSI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yannakakis, M., editors,
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, num-
ber 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Boston. The OX Association
for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French. This
is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
446 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
apacite.bst
This BibTEX bibliography style for the American Psychological Association must be used with the apacite
package.
References
Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41 (7), 73+. (This is a full ARTICLE entry)
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical algorithms (Vol. 2, Second ed.). Reading,
Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley. (This is a full BOOK entry)
Knvth, J. C. (1988, February). The programming of computer art. Vernier Art
Center. Stanford, California. (This is a full BOOKLET entry)
Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences [Part]. In D. J. Lipcoll,
D. H. Lawrie, & A. H. Sameh (Eds.), High speed computer and algorithm
organization (Third ed., pp. 179—183). New York: Academic Press. (This
is a full INCOLLECTION entry)
1
apalike.bst 447
apalike.bst
This standard BibTEX style requires the apalike package. The style formats bibliography entries alphabetically
by author, last name first. Citations in the text can include single and multiple author-date references.
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[Knuth, 1981] Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The
Art of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
second edition. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knvth, 1988] Knvth, J. C. (1988). The programming of computer art. Vernier
Art Center, Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In Lipcoll,
D. J., Lawrie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M. (1983).
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yan-
nakakis, M., editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Boston.
The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fire:
Festooning French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Depart-
ment of French. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
448 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
apalike2.bst
The style is a variant of apalike.bst. It requires the apalike package. The style formats bibliography entries
alphabetically by author. At the beginning of the entry, authors’ names are presented last name first. Within the
entry, authors’ names are presented last name last. Citations in the text can include single and multiple author-date
references.
References
Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, second edi-
tion. This is a full BOOK entry.
Knvth, J. C. (1988). The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
& A. H. Sameh (Eds.), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
number 23 in Fast Computers part 3, (pp. 179—183). New York: Academic
Press, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., & Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits. In W. V. Oz & M. Yannakakis (Eds.), Proc.
Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17
in All ACM Conferences (pp. 133—139). Boston: The OX Association for
Computing Machinery Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French.
This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
aplain.bst 449
aplain.bst
The style is one of the BibTEX ‘adaptable’ family of styles derived by Hans-Hermann Bode. The program
automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears. The
style is similar to the standard BibTEX style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers. Authors’ names appear in small capitals in the reference list.
References
[1] L[e slie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Anim al’s Journal 41(7), 73+ (July 1986). This is a full ART ICL E entry.
[2] Don ald E. Knuth. “S eminu merical Algorit hms”, volume 2 of “The Art of
Comp uter Programming”. Add ison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusett s, second
edition (10 January 1981). Th is is a fu ll BOO K ent ry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth. Th e programmin g of comp uter art. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia (Feb ruary 1988). Th is is a full BO OKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Pho ny-Ba loney. “Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phr ases”. PhD d is sertation , Fanstord University, Department of Fren ch
(Jun e-August 1988). Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
450 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
apsr.bst
References
Aamp ort, L [eslie] A. 1986. “T he Gnat s an d Gnu s Document Preparation Sys-
t em .” G -Animal’s Jou rn al 41(7) :73+. This is a fu ll ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , Don ald E. 1981. Semin um erical Algorithms. Vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm ing secon d ed . Read in g, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley.
This is a fu ll B OOK entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias. 1988. Fight in g Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch
Ph rases Ph D d issertation Fan stord Univers ity Department of Fren ch: .
This is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
asaetr.bst 451
asaetr.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Required documentclass asaetr
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/asaetr
Sample BibTEX Database:
asaetr.bib Contains two entries.
This style supports the bibliography requirements of the Transactions of the ASAE (American Society for Agricul-
tural Engineers). The ASAE Transactions shell document was created with the asaetr document class, a requirement
for asaetr.bst.
References
Aam port, L. A. 1986. The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal 41(7):73+.
Knuth, D. E. 1981. Seminumerical Algorithms volume 2
of The Art of Computer Programming. Reading, Mas-
sachusetts : Addison-Wesley second edition.
Knvth, J. C. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art
Center Stanford, California 1988.
Lincoll, D. D. 1977. Semigroups of recurrences. In High
Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, ed. Lip-
coll, D. J., D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, numb er 23
in Fast Computers part 3, 179—183. Academic Press New
York third edition.
Oaho, A. V., J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannakakis 1983.
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, ed. Oz, W. V. and M. Yannakakis, num-
ber 17 in All ACM Conferences 133—139 Boston. The
OX Association for Computing Machinery : Academic
Press.
Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning
French Phrases. PhD dissertation Fanstord University
Department of French 1988.
452 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
astron.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author and Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files astron package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style is the BibTEX bibliography style for astronomical journals. It requires the astron package.
References
Aamp ort, L. A.: 1986, G-An imal’s Journal 41(7), 73+ , Th is is a full ARTICL E
entry
K nuth , D. E.: 1981, S em inumerical Algorithms , Vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Program ming, Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachus etts, second ed i-
tion , T his is a fu ll BOOK entry
K nvth, J. C.: 1988, The Prog ramm in g of C omputer Art, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia, Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry
L in coll, D. D.: 1977, in D. J. Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh (eds.), High
Speed Com puter an d Algorithm Organization, No. 23 in Fast C omput ers,
part 3, pp 179—183, Academic Press, New York, th ird ed ition, T his is a full
INCO LLEC TIO N entry
O ah o, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M.: 1983, in W. V. Oz and M.
Yan nakakis (eds.), Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Symposium on the T heory
of Com putin g, No. 17 in All AC M Conferences, pp 133—139, T he OX As-
sociat ion for Compu tin g Machinery, Academic P ress, Boston, T his is a full
INPROCEDINGS entr y
Phony-Balon ey, F. P.: 1988, PhD dissert ation, Fan stord Un iversity, Departm ent
of French, Th is is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry
1
aunsnot.bst 453
aunsnot.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Required files LaTeX/contrib/other/BibTeX/apreambl.tex
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/abstyles
Sample BibTEX Database:
acompat.bib Contains compatibility definitions for use with standard styles;
does not contain any actual bibliography records.
The style is one of the BibTEX ‘adaptable’ family of styles derived by Hans-Hermann Bode. The program
automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears.
In this style, entries appear in the order of their first citation. Otherwise, the style is the same as the style
anotit.bst, which excludes the titles of articles and abbreviates first names, month names, and journal names in
the entries. Authors’ names appear in small capitals in the reference list.
References
[1] D. D. Linco ll. In D. J. Lipco ll, D. H. Law rie, and A. H . Same h,
editors, “High S peed Comp uter an d Algorit hm O rgan ization ”, no. 23 in Fast
Comp uters, part 3, pp . 179—183. Academic Pres s, New York, third ed . (Sep t.
1977). This is a fu ll INC OLL ECT ION entry.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. U llma n, and M. Ya nnaka kis. In W . V. Oz and
M. Yanna kakis, editors, “Proc. Fifteenth Annual AC M S ymposium on
th e Th eory of C omp uting”, no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139,
Boston (Mar. 1983). Th e OX Ass ociation for Comput in g Machiner y, Aca-
demic Press. Th is is a full INPROC EDINGS entry.
[4] D. E. K nuth. “S em inu merical Algorith ms”, vol. 2 of “Th e Art of C om-
pu ter Programming”. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusetts, secon d ed.
(10 Jan . 1981) . T his is a full BOOK entry.
1
454 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
aunsrt.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Required files LaTeX/contrib/other/BibTeX/apreambl.tex
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/abstyles
Sample BibTEX Database:
acompat.bib Contains compatibility definitions for use with standard styles;
does not contain any actual bibliography records.
The style is one of the BibTEX ‘adaptable’ family of styles derived by Hans-Hermann Bode. The program
automatically inputs the file apreambl.tex to the document before the bibliography command appears.
In this style, entries appear in the order of their first citation. Otherwise, the style is the same as the style
aplain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers. Authors’ names appear in small
capitals in the reference list.
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigrou ps of recurrences. In Dav id J. Lipco ll,
D. H. Lawrie, and A. H . Sameh, editors, “High Sp eed C omput er and
Algorithm O rgan ization”, number 23 in Fast C ompu ters, part 3, pages 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, th ird edition (S eptember 1977). This is a
full INC OLL ECT ION entry.
[4] Don ald E. Knuth. “S eminu merical Algorit hms”, volume 2 of “The Art of
Comp uter Programming”. Add ison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusett s, second
edition (10 January 1981). Th is is a fu ll BOO K ent ry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth. Th e programmin g of comp uter art. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia (Feb ruary 1988). Th is is a full BO OKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Pho ny-Ba loney. “Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phr ases”. PhD d is sertation , Fanstord University, Department of Fren ch
(Jun e-August 1988). Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
authordate1.bst 455
authordate1.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author & Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files authordate1-4 package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
This style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommendations of British Standard 1629
(1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and the Chicago Manual of Style (1982
edition). Uppercase letters in article, journal, and book titles are left as given in the .bib file. The style must be used
in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography and \cite, which are provided in the required
LATEX package authordate1-4.
References
Aamp ort, L[eslie] A. 1986. T he G nats and G nus Document Preparation S ystem.
G-An imal’s Journal, 41(7), 73+ . This is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth , Donald E. 1981. Semin um erical Algorithm s. Second edn. The Art of
Comp uter Pr ogrammin g, vol. 2. Reading, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley.
This is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, Jill C. 1988 (Feb .) . T he Program ming of Computer Art. Vernier Art
Cent er, Stanford , Californ ia. Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
L in coll, Dan iel D. 1977. Semigroups of Recu rren ces. Part 3, pag es 179—183
of: Lipcoll, David J., Law rie, D . H., & Sameh, A. H. (eds), Hig h S peed
Compute r and Algorithm Organiz ation, th ird ed n. Fast Comp uters , no.
23. New York: Acad emic Press. This is a full INCO LLECT IO N entry.
O ah o, Alfred V., Ullman , Jeffrey D., & Yann akakis, Mih alis. 1983. O n Notion s of
Information Transfer in VLS I Circuits. Pag es 133—139 of: Oz, W izard V., &
Yan nakakis, Mihalis ( eds), Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Sympos ium on the
Theory of Com puting. All ACM C onferen ces, n o. 17. B ost on : Academic
Press, for The OX Association for C omp uting Mach in ery. This is a full
INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias. 1988 (Jun e-Aug.). Fightin g Fire with Fire: Festoon -
ing Frenc h Phrases. Ph D Dissertat ion, Fanst ord Un iversity, Departm ent
of French. Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
456 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
authordate2.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author & Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files authordate1-4 package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
As does authordate1.bst, this style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommenda-
tions of British Standard 1629 (1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and the
Chicago Manual of Style (1982 edition). The style differs from authordate1.bst in that it uses downstyle titles;
that is, titles that are lowercase except for the first letter, any letter following a colon, and letters protected by open-
ing and closing braces. The style must be used in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography
and \cite, which are provided in the required LATEX package authordate1-4.
References
Aamp ort, L [eslie] A. 1986. T he gnats an d gnus docu ment p reparation system.
G-An imal’s journal, 41(7), 73+ . T his is a full ARTIC LE entry.
K nuth , Donald E. 1981. Sem in umerical algorithms. Secon d edn. The Art of
Comp uter Pr ogrammin g, vol. 2. Reading, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley.
This is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, Jill C . 1988 (Feb.). The programm ing of computer art . Vernier Art
Cent er, Stanford , Californ ia. Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
O ah o, Alfr ed V., Ullman , Jeffr ey D., & Yannakakis, Mihalis. 1983. O n notions
of in formation transfer in VLSI circu its. Pages 133—139 of: Oz, W izard V.,
& Yann akakis, Mihalis ( eds), Proc. fifteenth an nual acm symposium on the
theory of computin g. All AC M C onferences, no. 17. Boston: Academic
Press, for The OX Association for C omp uting Mach in ery. This is a full
INPROCEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias. 1988 ( Ju ne-Aug.). Fighting fire with fire: Festoon -
ing Frenc h phrases. PhD dissertation, Fan stord University, Departm ent of
French. This is a fu ll P HD THES IS entry.
1
authordate3.bst 457
authordate3.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author & Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files authordate1-4 package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
As does authordate1.bst, this style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommen-
dations of British Standard 1629 (1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and
the Chicago Manual of Style (1982 edition). Uppercase letters in article, journal, and book titles are left as given in
the .bib file. The style differs from authordate1.bst in that author’s names are given in small capitals in the
list of references. The style must be used in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography and
\cite, which are provided in the required LATEX package authordate1-4.
References
Aamport, L[eslie ] A. 1986. The G nats and Gnu s Docum ent Preparation
System. G -Animal’s Jou rn al, 41(7), 73+. This is a fu ll ART ICLE entry.
K nuth, Dona ld E. 1981. Sem in umerical Algorithms . Secon d edn . Th e Art of
Comp uter Pr ogrammin g, vol. 2. Reading, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley.
This is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, Ji ll C. 1988 (Feb.) . The Program ming of Computer Art . Vernier Art
Cent er, Stanford , Californ ia. Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
Lin coll, Dan iel D. 1977. Semigr ou ps of Recurrences. Part 3, pages 179—183
of: Lipco ll, David J., Lawrie, D. H ., & Sa meh, A . H. ( eds), High
Speed Computer an d Alg orithm Organ ization, th ird edn. Fast C omput ers,
no. 23. New York: Academic Press. T his is a fu ll INC OLLE CT ION entry.
Oaho , A lfre d V ., Ullman, Je ffrey D., & Yannak akis, M ihalis. 1983.
On Not ions of In formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits. Pages 133—139 of:
Oz, W izard V., & Yann akak is, Mihalis ( ed s), Proc. Fifteenth An nual
ACM S ym posium on the Theory of Com puting. All ACM Conferences,
no. 17. Boston: Academic Press, for T he OX Associat ion for Compu ting
Mach in ery. This is a fu ll INPROCED ING S entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. Phid ias. 1988 (Jun e-Aug.). Fighting Fire with Fi re :
Festooning Fren ch Phrases. PhD Dissertation, Fanstord University, De-
partment of French. This is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry.
1
458 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
authordate4.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author & Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files authordate1-4 package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
As does authordate3.bst, this style produces author-date reference lists based loosely on the recommen-
dations of British Standard 1629 (1976 edition), Butcher’s Copy-editing (Cambridge University Press, 1981), and
the Chicago Manual of Style (1982 edition). Author’s names are given in small capitals in the list of references.
The style differs from authordate3.bst in that it uses downstyle titles—titles that are lowercase except for the
first letter, any letter following a colon, and letters protected by opening and closing braces. The style must be used
in conjunction with certain re-definitions of thebibliography and \cite, which are provided in the required
LATEX package authordate1-4.
References
Aamport, L[esli e] A. 1986. T he gn ats an d gnu s docu ment preparation sys-
tem. G-Animal’s journal, 41(7) , 73+. This is a full ARTIC LE entry.
K nuth, Don ald E. 1981. Se mi numerical algorithm s. S econd edn . The Art of
Comp uter Pr ogrammin g, vol. 2. Reading, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley.
This is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, Jill C . 1988 ( Feb.). T he programm in g of com puter art. Vern ier Art
Cent er, Stanford , Californ ia. Th is is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
Oaho , A lfre d V ., Ullman, Je ffrey D., & Yannak akis, M ihalis. 1983.
On n otions of information transfer in VLSI circu it s. Pages 133—139 of: Oz,
W izard V., & Yannak akis, Miha lis ( ed s), Proc. fi fteenth annu al acm
sym posium on the theory of computin g. All AC M Conferences, no. 17.
Boston: Academic P ress, for The OX Association for Computing M achin-
ery. This is a fu ll INPROC EDINGS entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. Ph idias. 1988 ( June-Au g.). Fighting fire with fire: Fes-
toon ing Fren ch phrases. PhD d issertation , Fanst ord University, Departm ent
of French. Th is is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
bbs.bst 459
bbs.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author and Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files astron package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The file produces bibliographies approximately in the format of Behavioral and Brain Sciences. It was adapted
from apalike.bst, incorporating features of astron.bst. The style requires the astron package.
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). Th e gn at s and gnus docu ment prep aration system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. Th is is a full ARTICL E entry.
K nuth , D. E. ( 1981). S em inu me rical Algorithm s, (second ed.), volum e 2 of The
Art of Compute r Prog ramm in g. Ad dison-Wesley. T his is a full BOO K entry.
K nvth, J. C. (1988). The programm ing of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia. Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry.
L in coll, D . D. (1977). Semigrou ps of recurrences. In: High Speed Com puter and
Algorithm Organ ization , D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, & A. H. Sameh , ed.,
(third ed.), nu mb er 23 in Fast Comp uters , part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press . T his is a full INCOLLECT IO N entry.
O ah o, A. V., Ullman, J. D., & Yannakakis, M. (1983). On notion s of information
transfer in VLS I circu it s. In: Proc. Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Sympos ium on
the Theory of Computin g, W . V. O z & M. Yan nakakis, ed., nu mber 17 in
All AC M Conferences, pages 133—139. T he OX Asso ciation for Compu ting
Machin ery, Acad emic Press. T his is a full INPRO CEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P. (1988) . Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch
Phrases. P hD dissertation, Fanst ord Un iversity. Th is is a full P HD THE-
SIS entry.
1
460 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
bibtoref.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation None
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
This bibliography style translates BibTEX bibliography entries into the UNIX refer format. The style converts
\cite{key} entries or the \nocite{*} command to UNIX and places the resulting bibliography in the corre-
sponding .bbl file. The illustration below shows the .bbl file generated for a sample file.
%T Semigroups of Recurrences
%B High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization
%A Daniel˜D. Lincoll
%E David J. Lipcoll and D. H. Lawrie and A. H. Sameh
%L incollection-full
%D 1977
%P 179—183
%O This is a full INCOLLECTION entry
%N 23
%S Fast Computers
%C New York
%T Seminumerical Algorithms
%A Donald˜E. Knuth
%L book-full
%V 2
%D 10˜{\noopsort{1973c}}1981
%O This is a full BOOK entry
%S The Art of Computer Programming
%C Reading, Massachusetts
1
birthday.bst 461
birthday.bst
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your own
address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it produces
contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You can also use
the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document; see letter.bst on
page 507.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} command.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described
below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates a list with no citations in the text. With the
\nodir{key} command, the birthday.bst style produces a reference list containing full birthdate information
for all entries in the referenced database, as shown in the illustration that follows.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. In the entry area, type \nodir{key} where key is the key for the database entry you want to cite.
4. Choose OK.
462 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
? 10/2, 5/11 and 1/1 Daffy Duck Knudson, Bugs Bunny and Pluto
1
cbe.bst 463
cbe.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author and Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files astron package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The file produces bibliographies approximately in the Council of Biology Editors format, which is used by
Evolution, American Naturalist, and many other journals. It was adapted from apalike.bst, incorporating
features of astron.bst. In the reference list, authors’ names are printed in small capitals. The style requires the
astron package.
References
Aamport, L. A . 1986. T he gnats and gnus d ocu ment preparat ion system.
G-Animal’s Journal 41:73+ . T his is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth, D. E. 1981. S eminu merical Algorithms , volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Program ming. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachus etts, second ed i-
tion . T his is a fu ll BOOK entry.
K nvth, J. C . 1988. The programming of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia. Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry.
Lin coll, D. D. 1977. S emigroup s of recurrences, pp. 179—183. I n D. J. L ip coll,
D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. S ameh ( eds.), High Speed C omp uter and Algorith m
Organizat ion, numb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3. Academic Press, New
York, third edition. This is a fu ll INC OLL ECT ION ent ry.
Oaho , A . V ., Ullman, J. D., a nd Yan nakak is, M. 1983. On n ot ions of in-
formation transfer in VLS I circuit s. In W. V. O z an d M . Yann akakis ( ed s.),
Proc. Fift eent h Annu al ACM Symp osium on t he T heory of Compu ting, num-
b er 17 in All AC M Conferences, p p. 133—139, Boston. The OX Association
for C omp uting Machinery, Academic Press. Th is is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. P. 1988. Fighting Fire w it h Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phrases. PhD d issertation , Fan stord University, Department of French. Th is
is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entr y.
1
464 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
cea.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author and Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files cea package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style is the BibTEX style for Computers and Electronics in Agriculture. The reference list is double-spaced.
For every entry, the style requires a ‘year’ field, and either an author (in some cases, an editor) field or a key field.
The command \cite results in (Jones, 1986) in the text. The reference list has no labels but includes a date
immediately after the author’s name. Author (and editor) names appear last name first. The style is adapted from
the bibliography style apalike.bst (24-Jan.-88 version). It requires the cea package.
BibTeX has been selected for the bibliography choice in this shell document.
One of the sample BibTeX databases included with SW has been selected and
some citations added in the next sentence. This sentence refers to the article
the article (Aamport, 1986), the book (Knuth, 1981), the booklet (Knvth, 1988),
and to the thesis (Phony-Baloney, 1988). Combined citations like (Lincoll, 1977;
Aamport, 1986) may have special appearance. The bibliography section for
References
PHDTHESIS entry.
466 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
cell.bst
Format of reference list label [Author, date]
[Author and Author, date]
[Author et al., date]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [Author, date]
[Author and Author, date]
[Author et al., date]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style is a modification of the bibliography style jmb.bst, which was designed to approximate the bib-
liography style of the Journal of Molecular Biology and Journal of Theoretical Biology. Bibliography entries for
articles, books, and items in proceedings are formatted carefully. You can toggle between styles appropriate for the
two journals by toggling the titles on and off. The Journal of Theoretical Biology requires titles; the Journal of
Molecular Biology doesn’t.
1. Choose or, from the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. Make sure the bibliography database contains a bibliography article with the same citation key.
cell.bst 467
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). G-Animal’s Jou rnal 41 (7), 73+. Th is
is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
[Knu th, 1981] K nuth , D. E. (1981) . Seminum erical Algorithms, volume 2 of Th e
Art of Compu ter Programming. Reading, Massachusett s: Addison-Wesley,
second edition. Th is is a full BOO K ent ry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C. (1988). Vernier Art Center Stan ford , California.
This is a fu ll B OOK LET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] L in coll, D. D. (1977). In : High S peed Compu ter and Algorith m
O rganization , (Lip coll, D. J., Law rie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., eds) num-
b er 23 in Fast C omp uters p art 3, pp . 179—183. Academic Press New York
t hird edition. This is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yann akakis, M. (1983). In:
Pr oc. Fifteenth An nual AC M Sym posium on the Theory of Compu ting, (Oz,
W . V. an d Yannakakis, M., ed s) nu mb er 17 in All AC M C on ferences p p.
133—139, Th e OX Association for C omp uting Mach in ery Boston: Academic
Pr ess. Th is is a fu ll INPROC EDINGS entry.
1
468 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
chicago.bst
This BibTEX bibliography style follows the ‘B’ reference style of the 13th Edition of The Chicago Manual of
Style. The style, which must be used with the chicago package, supports a variety of citation formats.
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986, July). The gnats and gnus d ocument p reparation sys-
tem. G-An imal’s Journ al 41 (7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth , D. E. (1981, 10 January). Sem inu me rical Algorithm s ( Secon d ed.),
Volu me 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter Programmin g. Reading, M assachuset ts:
Ad dison-Wesley. Th is is a full BOO K ent ry.
K nvth, J. C. (1988, Febru ary). T he p rogramming of compu ter art. Vern ier
Art C enter, St an ford , Californ ia. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
Lin coll, D. D. (1977, Sep temb er). Semigrou ps of recurrences. In D. J. L ip coll,
D. H. Law rie, and A. H. Sameh (E ds.), High Speed C omputer and Algo-
rithm Organ ization (Third ed.)., Number 23 in Fast C omput ers, Part 3,
p p. 179—183. New York: Academic Press. T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N
entry.
O ah o, A. V., J. D. Ullm an , an d M . Yann akakis (1983, M arch) . On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In W . V. Oz and M. Yan nakakis
(E ds.), Proc. Fiftee nth Ann ual ACM S ymposiu m on the T heory of Com-
puting, Numb er 17 in All AC M Conferen ces, Bost on , pp. 133—139. Th e
OX Association for Compu ting M achinery: Acad emic Press. T his is a full
INPROCED ING S entry.
Ph ony-Balon ey, F. P. (1988, June-August ). Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon -
in g French Phrases. PhD d issertation , Fan stord Un iversity, Departm ent
of French. This is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry.
1
dtk.bst 469
dtk.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/dtk
Sample BibTEX Databases
beispiel.bib
dtk.bib
This bibliography style is intended for texts in German, particularly for use in Die TeXnische Komoedie, the
communications of Dante e.V.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport: The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System ;
G-Animal’s Journal ; 41(7), S. 73+; Juli 1986; This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth: Seminumerical Algorithms ; Bd. 2 von The Art of Com-
puter Programming ; Addison-Wesley; Reading, Massachusetts; 2. Aufl.;
10 Jan. 1981; This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth: The Programming of Computer Art ; Vernier Art Center;
Stanford, California; Febr. 1988; This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll: Semigroups of Recurrences ; in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization (Hg. David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie und A. H.
Sameh); Nr. 23 in Fast Computers; part 3, S. 179—183; Academic Press;
New York; 3. Aufl.; Sept. 1977; This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman und Mihalis Yannakakis: On Notions
of Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits ; in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM
Symposium on the Theory of Computing (Hg. Wizard V. Oz und Mihalis
Yannakakis); Nr. 17 in All ACM Conferences; S. 133—139; Boston; März
1983; The OX Association for Computing Machinery; Academic Press; This
is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney: Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases ; PhD dissertation; Fanstord University; Department of French;
Juni-Aug. 1988; This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
470 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
econometrica.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author date)
(Author and Author date)
(Author, Author, and Author date)
Required files harvard package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
This BibTEX bibliography style was created for Econometrica. Authors’ names in the reference list are produced
in small capitals. The style must be used with the harvard package.
References
Aamport, L . A. (1986): “The G nats and G nus D ocument Preparat ion Sys-
t em ,” G -Animal’s Jou rn al, 41(7), 73+, This is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
K nuth, D. E. (1981): Semin umerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm ing. Addison-Wesley, Reading, M assachus et ts, second edn.,
This is a fu ll B OOK entry.
Pho ny-Balo ney, F. P. (1988): “Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Ph rases,” Ph D d issertation , Fanstord University, Department of French, Th is
is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
email.bst 471
email.bst
Format of reference list label None or abbreviated name
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by person
Format of citation [—]
Required files directory package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/directory
Sample BibTEX Databases:
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your own
address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it produces
contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You can also use
the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document; see letter.bst on
page 507.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} com-
mand. In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as de-
scribed below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates a list with no citations in the text.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. In the entry area, type \dir{key} where key is the key for the database entry you want to cite.
4. Choose OK.
The email.bst style produces a reference list containing the email addresses corresponding to the cited keys.
It prints a name at the citation point unless the \nodir{key} command is used. The first sample shown below
illustrates an email address list created with \dir{key} commands in the text. The second sample illustrates an
email address list created using a \nodir{*} command without any preceding text. The samples were created
using the databases business.bib and family.bib.
472 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
email-html.bst
Format of reference list label None or abbreviated name
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by person
Format of citation [—]
Required files directory package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/directory
Sample BibTEX Databases:
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your own
address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it produces
contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You can also use
the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document; see letter.bst on
page 507.
Similar to email.bst, email-html.bst produces an HTML file for a reference list containing full database
information corresponding to the cited keys or to the \nodir{key} command. The style supports URL fields
within the bibliographic information, so that entries in the list become links to the resources themselves. The re-
sulting HTML file can stand alone or be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} command.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described for
email.bst on page 471. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates an address book with no
citations in the text.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and specify
and generate a BibTEX address list. Then, use the resulting HTML file as it stands or incorporate it into your
document, according to the instructions that follow.
The sample .htm file shown here was created in SWP according to these instructions. the .tex file contains a
\nodir{*} command that was deleted after the .htm file was created but before the document was exported to
HTML. The sample was created using the databases business.bib and family.bib.
finplain.bst 475
finplain.bst
This style is a translation into Finnish of the BibTEX standard bibliography style plain.bst, which sorts
entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, heinäkuu 1986. This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, sarjan The Art of Computer
Programming osa 2. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, toinen laitos,
10 tammikuu 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, helmikuu 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. Kirjassa David J. Lipcoll,
D. H. Lawrie, ja A. H. Sameh, toim., High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization, sarjassa Fast Computers, Fast Computers 23, part 3, ss. 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, kolmas laitos, syyskuu 1977. This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, ja Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits. Kirjassa Wizard V. Oz ja Mihalis
Yannakakis, toim., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, sarjassa All ACM Conferences, All ACM Conferences 17,
ss. 133—139, Boston, maaliskuu 1983. The OX Association for Computing
Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
kesäkuu-elokuu 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
476 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
gerabbrv.bst
For use with either German or English, the styles in the germbib directory require the bibgerm package and
either the german or ngerman package. The packages are available from CTAN at http://www.ctan.org. The
style prints the authors’ names in small capitals in the reference list. The sample was created using the database
gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.
References
[1] Aamport, L. A.: Das System für die Vorbereitung von Dokumentationen
über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift, 41(7):73 ff., . 1986. Dies ist
ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
[2] Knuth, D. E.: Seminumerische Algorithmen, . 2 . Die Kunst der Comput-
erprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, Zweite ., 10. .
1981. Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOK-Eintrag.
[3] Knvth, J. C.: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst . Kunstverein
Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, . 1988. Dies ist ein vollständiger
BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[4] Lincoll, D. D.: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. . Lipcoll, D. J.,
D. H. Lawrie . A. H. Sameh (.): High Speed Computer und Algorith-
mus Organisation, . 23 . Schnelle Computer, Teil 3, . 179—183. Univer-
sitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am Bodensee, Dritte ., . 1977. Dies ist ein
vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[5] Oaho, A. V., J. D. Ullman . M. Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die
Informationsübertragung in VLSI-Schaltkreisen. . Oz, W. V. . M. Yan-
nakakis (.): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über die Theorie des Computing, . 17
. Alle Konferenzen der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, . 133—
139, München, . 1983. OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, Univer-
sitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P.: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen: Gewandte
Französische Redewendungen. Dissertation, Universität Würzburg,
Abteilung für Französisch, .—. 1988. Dies ist ein vollständiger PHDTHESIS-
Eintrag.
1
geralpha.bst 477
geralpha.bst
For use with either German or English, the styles in the germbib directory require the bibgerm package and
either the german or ngerman package. The packages are available from CTAN at http://www.ctan.org. The
style prints the authors’ names in small capitals in the reference list. The geralpha.bst style uses source labels
such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. The sample was created using the
database gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.
Literatur
[Aam86] Aamport, Leslie Andrew: Das System für die Vorbereitung von
Dokumentationen über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift,
41(7):73 ff., Juli 1986. Dies ist ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
[Knu81] Knuth, Donald Edward: Seminumerische Algorithmen, Band 2
der Reihe Die Kunst der Computerprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley,
Reading, Massachusetts, Zweite Auflage, 10. Januar 1981. Dies ist ein
vollständiger BOOK-Eintrag.
[Knv88] Knvth, Jill Clown: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, Februar
1988. Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[Lin77] Lincoll, Daniel David: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen.
In: Lipcoll, David Johannes, Dirk Herwig Lawrie und
Abraham Hans Sameh (Herausgeber): High Speed Computer
und Algorithmus Organisation, Nummer 23 in Schnelle Computer,
Teil 3, Seiten 179—183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am
Bodensee, Dritte Auflage, September 1977. Dies ist ein vollständiger
INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[OUY83] Oaho, Alfred Veit, Jeffrey Dieter Ullman und Mihalis
Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in
VLSI-Schaltkreisen. In: Oz, Wizard Veit und Mihalis
Yannakakis (Herausgeber): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag
der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über
die Theorie des Computing, Nummer 17 in Alle Konferenzen
der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, Seiten 133—139,
München, März 1983. OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie,
Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger INPROCEDINGS-
Eintrag.
[PB88] Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Gewandte Französische Redewendungen. Dissertation, Universität
1
478 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
gerapali.bst
References
Aamport, Leslie Andrew (1986). Das System für die Vorbereitung
von Dokumentationen über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift,
41(7):73 ff. Dies ist ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
Knuth, Donald Edward (1981). Seminumerische Algorithmen, Bd. 2 d.
Reihe Die Kunst der Computerprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley, Reading,
Massachusetts, Zweite Aufl. Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOK-Eintrag.
Knvth, Jill Clown (1988). Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen. Dies ist ein
vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
Lincoll, Daniel David (1977). Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. In:
Lipcoll, David Johannes, D. H. Lawrie und A. H. Sameh, Hrsg.:
High Speed Computer und Algorithmus Organisation, Nr. 23 in Schnelle
Computer, Teil 3, S. 179—183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am
Bodensee, Dritte Aufl. Dies ist ein vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
Oaho, Alfred Veit, J. D. Ullman und M. Yannakakis (1983).
Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in VLSI-Schaltkreisen. In:
Oz, Wizard Veit und M. Yannakakis, Hrsg.: Konferenz zum fünften
Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium
über die Theorie des Computing, Nr. 17 in Alle Konferenzen der OX-
Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, S. 133—139, München. OX-
Vereinigung für Computing-Maschinerie, Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein
vollständiger INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias (1988). Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Gewandte Französische Redewendungen. Dissertation, Universität
Würzburg, Abteilung für Französisch. Dies ist ein vollständiger
PHDTHESIS-Eintrag.
1
gerplain.bst 479
gerplain.bst
For use with either German or English, the styles in the germbib directory require the bibgerm package and
either the german or ngerman package. The packages are available from CTAN at http://www.ctan.org. The
gerplain.bst style formats bibliography entries alphabetically by author, last name first. Like plain.bst,
the style gerplain.bst prints the authors’ names in small capitals in the reference list. The sample was created
using the database gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.
Literatur
[1] Aamport, Leslie Andrew: Das System für die Vorbereitung von
Dokumentationen über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift,
41(7):73 ff., Juli 1986. Dies ist ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
[2] Knuth, Donald Edward: Seminumerische Algorithmen, Band 2 der
Reihe Die Kunst der Computerprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley, Reading,
Massachusetts, Zweite Auflage, 10. Januar 1981. Dies ist ein vollständiger
BOOK-Eintrag.
[3] Knvth, Jill Clown: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, Februar 1988.
Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[4] Lincoll, Daniel David: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. In: Lipcoll,
David Johannes, Dirk Herwig Lawrie und Abraham Hans
Sameh (Herausgeber): High Speed Computer und Algorithmus
Organisation, Nummer 23 in Schnelle Computer, Teil 3, Seiten 179—
183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am Bodensee, Dritte Auflage,
September 1977. Dies ist ein vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[5] Oaho, Alfred Veit, Jeffrey Dieter Ullman und Mihalis
Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in VLSI-
Schaltkreisen. In: Oz, Wizard Veit und Mihalis Yannakakis
(Herausgeber): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über die Theorie des Computing,
Nummer 17 in Alle Konferenzen der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-
Maschinerie, Seiten 133—139, München, März 1983. OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie, Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger
INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
[6] Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Gewandte Französische Redewendungen. Dissertation, Universität
Würzburg, Abteilung für Französisch, Juni—August 1988. Dies ist ein
vollständiger PHDTHESIS-Eintrag.
1
480 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
gerunsrt.bst
For use with either German or English, the styles in the germbib directory require the bibgerm package and
either the german or ngerman package. The packages are available from CTAN at http://www.ctan.org. Like
unsrt.bst, the style gerunsrt.bst lists bibliography entries in the order of their first citation. The sample
was created using the database gerbibtx.bib and gerxampl.bib.
Literatur
[1] Lincoll, Daniel David: Semigruppen von Wiederholungen. In: Lipcoll,
David Johannes, Dirk Herwig Lawrie und Abraham Hans
Sameh (Herausgeber): High Speed Computer und Algorithmus
Organisation, Nummer 23 in Schnelle Computer, Teil 3, Seiten 179—
183. Universitätsdruckerei, Hintertupfingen am Bodensee, Dritte Auflage,
September 1977. Dies ist ein vollständiger INCOLLECTION-Eintrag.
[2] Oaho, Alfred Veit, Jeffrey Dieter Ullman und Mihalis
Yannakakis: Vorstellungen über die Informationsübertragung in VLSI-
Schaltkreisen. In: Oz, Wizard Veit und Mihalis Yannakakis
(Herausgeber): Konferenz zum fünften Jahrestag der OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie: Symposium über die Theorie des Computing,
Nummer 17 in Alle Konferenzen der OX-Vereinigung für Computing-
Maschinerie, Seiten 133—139, München, März 1983. OX-Vereinigung für
Computing-Maschinerie, Universitätsdruckerei. Dies ist ein vollständiger
INPROCEDINGS-Eintrag.
[3] Aamport, Leslie Andrew: Das System für die Vorbereitung von
Dokumentationen über Gnats und Gnus. Die Haustier-Zeitschrift,
41(7):73 ff., Juli 1986. Dies ist ein vollständiger ARTICLE-Eintrag.
[4] Knuth, Donald Edward: Seminumerische Algorithmen, Band 2 der
Reihe Die Kunst der Computerprogrammierung. Addison-Wesley, Reading,
Massachusetts, Zweite Auflage, 10. Januar 1981. Dies ist ein vollständiger
BOOK-Eintrag.
[5] Knvth, Jill Clown: Die Programmierung von Computerkunst.
Kunstverein Düsseldorf, Düsseldorf, Nordrheinwestfalen, Februar 1988.
Dies ist ein vollständiger BOOKLET-Eintrag.
[6] Phony-Baloney, Friedrich Phidias: Feuer mit Feuer bekämpfen:
Gewandte Französische Redewendungen. Dissertation, Universität
Würzburg, Abteilung für Französisch, Juni—August 1988. Dies ist ein
vollständiger PHDTHESIS-Eintrag.
1
humanbio.bst 481
humanbio.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author and Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files astron package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style produces bibliographies with a format similar to that used in Human Biology. The style was adapted
from apalike.bst, incorporating features of astron.bst style. It must be used with the astron package.
References
Aamp ort, L. A. 1986. Th e gn ats an d gnus d ocument preparat ion system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. Th is is a full ARTICL E entry.
K nuth , D. E . 1981. S eminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Program ming. Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachus etts, second ed i-
tion . T his is a fu ll BOOK entry.
K nvth, J. C. 1988. Th e programming of comput er art . Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia. Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry.
L in coll, D . D. 1977. Semigroups of recurrences. In Lip coll, D. J., Law rie, D. H.,
and S ameh , A. H., editors, High Speed C ompu ter and Algorithm Organiza-
tion , number 23 in Fast C omputers, p art 3, p ages 179—183. Acad emic Press,
New Yor k, third edition . T his is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
O ah o, A. V., Ullm an, J. D ., and Yan nakakis, M. 1983. On notion s of information
transfer in VL SI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yan nakakis, M., ed itors, Proc .
Fifteenth Annual ACM S ymposiu m on the Theory of Com pu ting , nu mb er 17
in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Bost on . Th e OX Associat ion for
C omp uting Mach inery, Academic Press . Th is is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P. 1988. Fightin g Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch Phrase s.
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Department of Fren ch . T his is a full
PHDTHESIS entry.
1
482 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
humannat.bst
Format of reference list label Author
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author, date)
(Author and Author, date)
(Author et al., date)
Required files astron package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style produces bibliographies with a format similar to that used in Human Nature and American Anthropol-
ogist. The style was adapted from apalike.bst, incorporating features of astron.bst style. It must be used
with the astron package.
References
Aamp ort, L. A.
1986. The gnats and gnu s do cu ment p reparation syst em . G-Anim al’s Jour-
nal, 41(7):73+. Th is is a full ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , D. E.
1981. S em inumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com pute r Pro-
gram ming, second edition. Read ing, M assachuset ts: Add ison -Wesley. Th is
is a fu ll BOO K ent ry.
K nvth, J. C .
1988. T he programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center, St anford,
C aliforn ia. Th is is a full BO OKLE T ent ry.
L in coll, D. D.
1977. S emigroup s of r ecu rrences. In High Speed C omputer an d Algorithm
Organization, D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. L awrie, an d A. H. Sameh, eds., number 23
in Fast Compu ters, p art 3, Pp. 179—183. New York: Academic Press. Th is
is a fu ll INCOL LEC TION entry.
O ah o, A. V., J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannakakis
1983. On not ions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Proc. Fif-
teenth An nual AC M Sym posium on the T heory of Com putin g, W. V. O z and
M. Yannakakis, eds., nu mb er 17 in All AC M Conferences, Pp . 133—139,
Boston. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press.
T his is a full INPROC EDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P.
1988. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing Fren ch Phrases. Ph D dissertation,
Fan stord University, Department of Fren ch . This is a fu ll PHDTHESIS entry.
1
ieee.bst 483
ieee.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/ieeetran
The style is a modification of unsrt.bst, which lists bibliography entries in the order of their first citation
and labels entries with numbers.
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll, “Semigroups of recurrences,” in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh,
Eds., number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, third edition, Sept. 1977, This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis, “On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits,” in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM
Symposium on the Theory of Computing, Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yan-
nakakis, Eds., Boston, Mar. 1983, The OX Association for Computing Ma-
chinery, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Academic Press,
This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system,”
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, pp. 73+, July 1986, This is a full AR-
TICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion, 10 Jan. 1981, This is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art,” Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Feb. 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
June-Aug. 1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
484 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
ieeepes.bst
This style supports reference lists for articles according to IEEE instructions. It has been modified from BibTEX
bibliography style unsrt.bst, which lists bibliography entries in the order of their first citation and labels entries
with numbers. The style spells out the names of months in the reference list.
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll, “Semigroups of recurrences”, in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh,
Eds., number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, third edition, September 1977, This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis, “On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits”, in Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sym-
posium on the Theory of Computing, Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis,
Eds., Boston, March 1983, The OX Association for Computing Machinery,
number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Academic Press, This is
a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”,
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, pp. 73+, July 1986, This is a full AR-
TICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion, 10 January 1981, This is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art”, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, February 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
June-August 1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
ieeetr.bst 485
ieeetr.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/base
The IEEE Transactions bibliography style (29-Jan-88 version) produces bibliographies with numeric labels,
IEEE abbreviations, quotation marks around article titles, and commas that separate all fields except after book
titles and before notes. The reference list is presented in order of first citation. Otherwise, the style is much like the
plain family of styles, from which it is adapted.
References
[1] D. D. L in coll, “S emigroup s of recu rrences,” in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organ ization (D. J. L ipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh,
eds.), no. 23 in Fast C omput ers, part 3, pp . 179—183, New York: Academic
Press, third ed., Sept. 1977. T his is a full INCOLLE CT ION entry.
[2] A. V. O ah o, J. D . Ullman, and M. Yann akakis, “On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits,” in Proc. Fifteenth Annu al ACM Sympos ium on
the Theory of Com puting (W. V. Oz and M. Yannakakis, ed s.), n o. 17 in All
ACM Con ferences, (Boston), pp . 133—139, The OX Association for C omp ut-
ing Mach in ery, Academic Press, Mar. 1983. T his is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] L. A. Aamport, “Th e gnats an d gnus d ocument p reparation system,”
G-Anim al’s Journal, vol. 41, pp . 73+, July 1986. T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] D. E. Knuth, Semin umerical Algorithms, vol. 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Program ming. Reading, Massachu setts: Addison-Wesley, second ed., 10 Jan.
1981. T his is a full B OOK entry.
[5] J. C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art.” Vern ier Art Center, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, Feb. 1988. This is a full BO OKLET entry.
1
486 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
imac.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/imac
Sample BibTEX Database:
imac.bib
This style supports the citation of chapters within reference list entries. Authors’ names are printed in bold in
the reference list.
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D., Semigroups of Recurrences, High Speed Computer and Al-
gorithm Organization, edited by Lipcoll, D. J., Lawrie, D. H. and Sameh,
A. H., No. 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic Press, New
York, 3rd edn., Sep. 1977, this is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D. and Yannakakis, M., On Notions of In-
formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sympo-
sium on the Theory of Computing, edited by Oz, W. V. and Yannakakis,
M., No. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, The OX Association for
Computing Machinery, Academic Press, Boston, Mar. 1983, this is a full
INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A., The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System,
G-Animal’s Journal, Vol. 41, No. 7, pp. 73+, Jul. 1986, this is a full ARTI-
CLE entry.
[4] Knuth, D. E., Seminumerical Algorithms, Vol. 2 of The Art of Computer
Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 2nd edn., 10 Jan.
1981, this is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Knvth, J. C., The Programming of Computer Art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Feb. 1988, this is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, Jun.-
Aug. 1988, this is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
inlinebib.bst 487
inlinebib.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of footnote label Subscripted number
Format of citation Subscripted number in text; full reference in numbered footnote
Required files inlinebib package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/inlinebib
The style produces footnoted references in books and reports; that is, it creates superscripted numbers in the text
that refer to footnotes containing the reference information. The style produces complete information the first time
the reference is cited and abbreviated information thereafter. The style requires the inlinebib package. Instructions
for creating footnoted references with inlinebib.bst appear on the next page.
The sample that follows was created with the Standard LATEX Book shell. The reference list carries the title
Bibliography and begins on a separate page.
A. H. Sameh, (eds.), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, number 23 in Fast
Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press, New York, third edition, September 1977
2 Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis, On Notions of Information
Transfer in VLSI Circuits, in: Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis, (eds.), Proc. Fifteenth
Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences,
pp. 133—139, Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic
Press
3 L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”, G-Animal’s
gramming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition,
10 January 1973
v
488 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
4. With the insertion point n the entry area, choose or, from the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and
then choose Citation.
Bibliography
L[eslie] A. Aamport, “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”, G-Animal’s
Journal, 41(7):73+, July 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Donald E. Knuth, Fundamental Algorithms, volume 1 by The Art of Computer Pro-
gramming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second
edition, 10 January 1973. This is a full INBOOK entry.
Donald E. Knuth, Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 by The Art of Computer
Programming, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edition, 10 January
1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
Jill C. Knvth, “The programming of computer art”, Vernier Art Center, Stanford,
California, February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
Daniel D. Lincoll, Semigroups of Recurrences, in: David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie and
A. H. Sameh, (eds.), High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, number 23
in Fast Computers, part 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press, New York, third edition,
September 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman and Mihalis Yannakakis, On Notions of Informa-
tion Transfer in VLSI Circuits, in: Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis Yannakakis, (eds.),
Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17
in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for
Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
F. Phidias Phony-Baloney, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases, PhD
dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, June-August 1988. This is a
full PHDTHESIS entry.
vii
is-abbrv.bst 489
is-abbrv.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style abbrv.bst, which creates compact entries by abbre-
viating first names, month names, and journal names. The style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers. It also contains optional added support for CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, and PRICE fields; extended
PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended citation label suffixing.
References
[1] L. A. Aamp ort. The gn ats and gnus do cument preparation system.
G-Anim al’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. T he p rogramming of compu ter art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, Feb. 1988. This is a full BO OKLET entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festooning Frenc h Phrase s.
PhD dissert ation, Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fr ench , Jun e-Aug.
1988. T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
490 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
is-alpha.bst
The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style alpha.bst, which creates source labels such as
Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style contains optional added support for
CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, and PRICE fields; extended PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended
citation label suffixing.
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aam port. The gnats an d gnu s d ocument preparation sys-
tem. G -Animal’s Journ al, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ARTI-
C LE entry.
[Knu 81] Donald E. K nuth . Se min um erical Algorithm s, volu me 2 of T he Art
of Computer Programmin g. Add ison -Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts,
second edition , 10 January 1981. Th is is a full BO OK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C . K nvth. T he program min g of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford , Californ ia, Febru ar y 1988. This is a full B OOK LET entry.
[PB88] F. Ph id ias Phony-Balon ey. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g
French Phrases. P hD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Departm ent
of French, Jun e-August 1988. T his is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
is-plain.bst 491
is-plain.bst
The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and
labels them with numbers. The style contains optional added support for CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN, and PRICE
fields; extended PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended citation label suffixing.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamp ort. Th e gnats and gnus d ocument preparat ion system.
G-Anim al’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth . Seminum erical Alg orithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm in g. Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BO OK entry.
[3] Jill C . Knvth . The programming of comp uter art . Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lin coll. Semigrou ps of recu rrences. In David J. Lip coll, D. H.
Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh, editors, High S peed Compute r an d Algorithm Or-
ganization, nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition , Sept emb er 1977. This is a fu ll INC OLL EC-
TIO N entry.
[5] Alfred V. O ah o, Jeffrey D. Ullman, an d Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circu its. In W izard V. O z and Mihalis
Yannakakis, ed itors, Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Symposium on the The-
ory of Computin g, numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, pages 133—139,
Boston, M arch 1983. Th e OX Association for Comp uting Mach in ery, Aca-
demic Press. Th is is a full INPROC EDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phid ias Ph ony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing French
Phrases. Ph D dissert ation, Fanstord Un iversity, Department of French,
Jun e-August 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
492 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
is-unsrt.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style is a modification of the standard BibTEX style unsrt.bst, which labels entries with numbers and
lists them in order of their first citation. The style contains optional added support for CODEN, ISBN, ISSN, LCCN,
and PRICE fields; extended PAGES fields; the PERIODICAL entry; and extended citation label suffixing.
References
[1] Daniel D. Lin coll. Semigrou ps of recu rrences. In David J. Lip coll, D. H.
Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh, editors, High S peed Compute r an d Algorithm Or-
ganization, nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition , Sept emb er 1977. This is a fu ll INC OLL EC-
TIO N entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth . Seminum erical Alg orithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm in g. Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BO OK entry.
[5] Jill C . Knvth . The programming of comp uter art . Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
[6] F. Phid ias Ph ony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing French
Phrases. Ph D dissert ation, Fanstord Un iversity, Department of French,
Jun e-August 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
jas99.bst 493
jas99.bst
This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Atmospheric Science and the Journal of Applied Meteo-
rology Monthly Weather Review. The style is based on newapa.bst and requires the newapa package.
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L . A., 1986: Th e gnats and gnus d ocu ment prep a-
ration syst em. G -Ani mal’s Journal, 41(7) , 73+. This is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[Knu th, 1981] K nuth , D. E., 1981: Seminum erical Algorithms, volume 2 of The
Art of Compu ter Program ming. Add is on -Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts,
second edition. Th is is a full BOO K ent ry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C ., 1988: Th e programming of compu ter art . Vern ier
Art C enter, St an ford, California. This is a full BO OKLET en try.
[Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis, 1983] Oaho, A. V., J. D. Ullman , and M. Yan-
n akakis, 1983: On notion s of in format ion transfer in VLSI circu it s. In Proc .
Fifteen th An nual AC M Sym posium on the Theory of Com puting, O z, W . V.
and Yan nakakis, M., editors, number 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, The OX As-
sociation for Compu ting Mach in ery, Academic Press, Boston, 133—139. Th is
is a full INPRO CEDING S entry.
1
494 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
jbact.bst
This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Bacteriology. Authors’ names appear in bold in the
reference list.
References
[1] A am p or t, L . A. 1986. G -Animal’s Journal 41 (7):73+. Th is is a full
ART ICLE entry.
[3] Knvth, J. C. 1988. Vernier Art C enter Stanford, C alifornia. T his is a full
BOOK LET entry.
[6] Ph ony-Baloney, F. P. 1988. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fe stoon ing Fren ch
Phrases. PhD dissertation Fan stord University Dep ar tment of French. Th is
is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
jcc.bst 495
jcc.bst
This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Computational Chemistry. The style omits the title of
entries classified as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries
except those classified as ‘unpublished’.
References
[1] D. D . Lincoll In High Speed Com puter and Alg orithm Organiz ation, D. J.
Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, Eds., nu mb er 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press, New York, t hird ed., 1977; part 3, p ages 179—183.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D . Ullman, and M. Yann akakis In W . V. O z and M. Yan-
nakakis, Eds., Proc. Fi ftee nth Ann ual ACM Symposium on the Theory of
Com puting, nu mb er 17 in All ACM C on ferences, p ages 133—139, B oston,
1983. Th e OX Association for Computing Mach in ery, Acad emic Press.
[5] J. C. K nvth T he p rogramming of comput er art; Vern ier Art Center, Feb ru-
ary , ( 1988).
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooni ng French Phrases
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Ju ne-August , (1988).
1
496 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
jkthesis.bst
The style is intended for texts in German and supports the abbreviation of numerous journal names.
References
[1] L. A. Aamport, G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth: Seminumerical Algorithms, Band 2 von The Art of Computer
Programming. Second. Auflage. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
10 Januar 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. The Programming of Computer Art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California (Februar 1988). This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll. In High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization, her-
ausgegeben von D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie und A. H. Sameh, Nummer 23
in Fast Computers, third. Auflage. Academic Press, New York (September
1977), Seiten 179—183. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman und M. Yannakakis: On Notions of Informa-
tion Transfer in VLSI Circuits. On Notions of Information Transfer in
VLSI Circuits, In Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, herausgegeben von W. V. Oz und M. YannakakisNummer 17
in All ACM Conferences. The OX Association for Computing Machinery,
Academic Press, Boston (März 1983) Seiten 133—139. This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases.
Department of French, Fanstord University, PhD dissertation, Juni-August
1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
jmb.bst 497
jmb.bst
1. Choose or, from the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. Make sure the bibliography database contains a bibliography article with the same citation key.
498 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). G-An imal’s Journal, 41 (7) , 73+.
This is a fu ll ARTIC LE entry.
[Knu th, 1981] K nuth , D. E. (1981). S em inu me rical Alg orithm s, volume 2 of The
Art of Com pute r Programming. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley,
second edition. Th is is a full BOO K ent ry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C. (1988). Vernier Art Center Stan ford , California.
This is a fu ll B OOK LET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] L in coll, D. D. (1977) . In: High S peed Compu ter and Algorithm
O rg an ization , (Lipcoll, D. J., Lawrie, D. H., & Sameh, A. H., eds) number 23
in Fast Computers p art 3, pp. 179—183. Academic Press New York third
ed it ion. Th is is a full INCOL LEC TION entry.
[Oaho e t al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D ., & Yannakakis, M. (1983) . In:
Proc . Fifteen th Ann ual AC M Symposium on the Theory of Com puting, (Oz,
W . V. & Yann akakis, M ., ed s) numb er 17 in All AC M Conferences pp . 133—
139, Th e OX Associat ion for C ompu tin g Machin ery Boston: Academic Press.
This is a fu ll INPROCEDING S entry.
1
jmr.bst 499
jmr.bst
References
Aamp ort, L[eslie] A. (1986), ‘T he gnats an d gnus document p reparation system’,
G -Animal’s Journ al 41(7) , 73+. T his is a full ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , Donald E. (1981), Seminum erical Alg orithms, Vol. 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programmin g, secon d edn , Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, M assachuset ts.
This is a fu ll B OOK entry.
K nvth, Jill C . (1988), ‘Th e programm in g of computer art’, Vernier Art Center,
S tanford, C alifornia. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
O ah o, Alfred V., Jeffrey D. Ullman & Mih alis Yannakakis (1983), On notions
of information t ransfer in VLS I circuits, in W. V.Oz & M.Yan nakakis, ed s,
‘Proc. Fift eenth Annu al ACM S ymposium on t he T heory of C omput ing’,
nu mb er 17 in ‘All ACM Conferen ces’, T he OX Associat ion for Compu ting
M achinery, Academic Press, Boston, pp . 133—139. Th is is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. Phidias ( 1988), Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Ph rases, PhD dissertation, Fanstord Un iversity, D ep artment of French.
This is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
500 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
jpc.bst
This is a BibTEX bibliography style for the Journal of Physical Chemistry. The style omits the title of entries
classified as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries except
those classified as ‘unpublished’.
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D . In High Speed Com puter an d Alg orithm Organ ization ; L ip coll,
D. J., L awrie, D. H., Sameh , A. H., Eds., nu mber 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press: New York, third ed., 1977; p art 3, pages 179—183.
[2] Oaho, A. V.; Ullman, J. D.; Yannakakis, M. In Oz, W. V., Yann akakis, M.,
Eds ., Proc. Fifteenth Ann ual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computin g,
numb er 17 in All AC M C on ferences, p ages 133—139, Bost on , 1983. T he OX
Association for C omput in g Machin ery, Acad em ic Press.
[5] Knvt h, J. C . The programmin g of comp uter art; Vernier Art Center, Feb ru-
ary , 1988.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch Phrases
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Ju ne-August , 1988.
1
jphysicsB.bst 501
jphysicsB.bst
References
Aamp ort L A 1986 G-An imal’s Journ al 41(7) , 73+. T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
K nuth D E 1981 Semin umerical Algorithms Vol. 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Prog ram min g secon d edn Addison-Wesley Reading, M assachuset ts. Th is is
a full BOO K ent ry.
K nvth J C 1988 ‘Th e p rogramming of comp uter art’ Vern ier Art C enter Stan-
ford , Californ ia. Th is is a full BOO KLET entry.
1
502 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
jtb.bst
This style produces bibliographies based loosely on the format used in the Journal of Theoretical Biology. The
style supports short citations in the form of (date). It requires the astron package.
References
Aamp ort, L. A. (1986) , G-An imal’s Journal 41(7), 73+, T his is a full ARTI-
C LE entry
K nuth , D. E. ( 1981) , Se min umerical Algorithm s, Vol. 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter
Program ming, Read in g, Massachusett s: Add ison-Wesley, second edition,
T his is a full BO OK entry
K nvth, J. C . (1988) , The Program ming of Com puter Art, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford , Californ ia, Th is is a full BOO KLET ent ry
L in coll, D. D. (1977) , In High S peed C omputer and Algorithm O rgan ization .
(D. J. Lipcoll, D . H. Lawrie, and A. H. S ameh eds.), No. 23 in Fas t C om-
pu ters, part 3, pp. 179—183, New York: Acad emic Press, t hird ed it ion, Th is
is a fu ll INCOL LEC TION entry
O ah o, A. V., Ullm an, J. D., and Yann akakis, M. (1983) , In Proc. Fifteenth
An nual ACM S ymposiu m on the Theory of C omputing. (W . V. Oz and M.
Yan nakakis ed s.), No. 17 in All ACM C onferences, pp. 133—139, The OX
Association for Compu ting Machin ery, Boston: Academic Press, Th is is a
full INPRO CED ING S ent ry
Phony-Balon ey, F. P. (1988) , PhD d issertation, Fanstord University, Depart-
ment of Fren ch , This is a full PHDT HESIS entry
1
jthcarsu.bst 503
jthcarsu.bst
This style is a modification of the BibTEX standard bibliography style unsrt.bst, which lists bibliography
entries in the order of their first citation and labels entries with numbers. It is named for the Journal of Thoracic and
Cardiovascular Surgery.
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. In David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie, A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organi-
zation number 23 in Fast Computers part 3, pages 179—183. Academic Press
New York third edition September 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of in-
formation transfer in VLSI circuits. In Wizard V. Oz Mihalis Yannakakis,
editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Comput-
ing number 17 in All ACM Conferences pages 133—139 Boston March 1983.
The OX Association for Computing Machinery Academic Press. This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal July 1986 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley Reading, Massachusetts second edition
10 January 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center
Stanford, California February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation Fanstord University Department of French June-
August 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
504 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
jurabib.bst
The jurabib package supports automated BibTEX citations for legal studies and the humanities. It provides
simplified formatting of both the citation and the bibliography entry and supports short titles in citations and ref-
erence lists. The style produces the authors’ names in bold in the reference list. The bibliography style jura-
bib.bst requires files from the jurabib package, available from http://www.ctan.org. The sample document
was created with the sample databases jbtest.bib and jbtesthu.bib.
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A.: The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System.
G-Animal’s Journal 41 July 1986, Nr. 7, 73+, This is a full ARTICLE
entry
Knuth, Donald E.: The Art of Computer Programming. Volume 2: Seminu-
merical Algorithms. 2nd edition. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-
Wesley, 10 January 1981, This is a full BOOK entry
Knvth, Jill C.: The Programming of Computer Art. Stanford, California:
Vernier Art Center, February 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry
Lincoll, Daniel D.: Semigroups of Recurrences. in: Lipcoll, David J./
Lawrie, D. H./Sameh, A. H., editors: High Speed Computer and Al-
gorithm Organization. 3rd edition. New York: Academic Press, September
1977, Fast Computers 23. — Part 3, 179—183, This is a full INCOLLEC-
TION entry
Oaho, Alfred V./Ullman, Jeffrey D./Yannakakis, Mihalis: On No-
tions of Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits. in: Oz, Wizard V./
Yannakakis, Mihalis, editors: Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sympo-
sium on the Theory of Computing. Boston: Academic Press, March 1983,
All ACM Conferences 17, This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry, 133—139
Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias: Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD Dissertation Fanstord University, 1988, This is a full
PHDTHESIS entry
1
jureco.bst 505
jureco.bst
The jurabib package supports automated BibTEX citations for legal studies and the humanities. It provides
simplified formatting of both the citation and the bibliography entry and supports short titles in citations and refer-
ence lists. The style produces the authors’ names in bold in the reference list. The bibliography style jureco.bst
requires files from the jurabib package, available from http://www.ctan.org.
References
Alexy, Robert (1984): Theorie der Grundrechte. Habil. Göttingen
Bergmeier, Roland (1980): Beiträge zur Wissenschaft vom Alten und Neuen
Testament. Volume 112: Glaube als Gabe nach Johannes: Religions- und
Theologiegeschichtliche Studien zum prädestinatianischen Dualismus im
vierten Evangelium. Stuttgart etc.: W. Kohlhammer
Helm, Paul (1972): Revealed Propositions and Timeless Truths. Religious
Studies 8, 127—136
Helm, Paul (1982): The Role of Logic in Biblical Interpretation. in: Rad-
macher, E./Preus, R., editors: Hermeneutics, Inerrancy, & the Bible.
Grand Rapids, 841—858
Knvth, Jill C. (1988): The Programming of Computer Art. Stanford, Cali-
fornia: Vernier Art Center, This is a full BOOKLET entry
Lundin, Roger: Interpreting Orphans: Hermeneutics in the Cartesian Tradi-
tion. in: The Promise of Hermeneutics., 1—64
1
506 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
kluwer.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author date)
(Author date, Author date)
(Author, Author and Author date)
Required files harvard package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/harvard
Sample BibTEX Database:
harvard.bib Contains five entries.
The kluwer.bst style is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles, which can also
be used with manual bibliographies. The style requires the harvard package. The style attempts to conform to the
requirements of Kluwer Academic Publishers. Complete citations are in standard parenthetical form. Incomplete
citations can be used as nouns, as in Medd (1999) claims . . . or The key result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in
Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid LATEX errors when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the
bst\beebe directory.
References
Aamp ort, L. A.: 1986, The gnats and gnus document p reparation system,
G -Animal’s Journ al 41(7) , 73+. T his is a full ARTICLE entry.
K nuth , D. E.: 1981, Sem in umerical Algorithms , Vol. 2 of The Art of Com pu ter
Prog ram min g, secon d edn, Ad dison-Wesley, Read in g, Massachusetts. Th is
is a full BO OK entry.
K nvth, J. C.: 1988, Th e progr amming of comp uter art, Vernier Art Center,
S tanford, C alifornia. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
Phony-Balon ey, F. P.: 1988, Fightin g Fire with Fire: Fe stoon ing Fren ch
Phrases, PhD dissertat ion, Fan stord University, D ep artment of French.
This is a fu ll PHD THES IS entry.
1
letter.bst 507
letter.bst
Format of reference list label No list generated
Organization of reference list No list generated
Format of citation [name] or [name with address]
Required files directory package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/directory
Sample BibTEX Databases:
business.bib
family.bib
test.bib
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your
own address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it
produces contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You
can also use the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} command.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described
below.
The letter.bst style, which operates differently from other styles in the package, doesn’t produce a directory
list. Instead, it prints the name or name and address corresponding to the cited key at the point of the citation.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. In the entry area, type \dir{key} where key is the key for the database entry you want to cite.
4. Choose OK.
The sample was created using the databases business.bib and family.bib.
508 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
.
mbplain.bst 509
mbplain.bst
The BibTEX bibliography style mbplain.bst allows references to multiple bibliographies within a single
document. It is a modification of the style plain.bst, which sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, July 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second edi-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, February 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. In David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Or-
ganization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition, September 1977. This is a full INCOLLEC-
TION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, and Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Wizard V. Oz and Mihalis
Yannakakis, editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the The-
ory of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139,
Boston, March 1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Aca-
demic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
June-August 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
510 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
mslapa.bst
References
Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7), 73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms (Second Ed.), Volume 2 of The
Art of Computer Programming. Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley.
This is a full BOOK entry.
1
named.bst 511
named.bst
Format of reference list label [Author, date]
[Author et al., date]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [Author, date] or [date]
[Author and Author, date] or [date]
[Author et al., date] or [date]
Required files named package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style supports year-only citations. The style orders the reference list alphabetically by author or by whatever
passes for author in the absence of an author. The style must be used with the named package.
References
[Aamport, 1986] L [eslie] A. Aamp ort . Th e gnats and gnu s docu ment prep a-
ration system. G -Anim al’ s Journal, 41( 7):73+ , July 1986. T his is a full
ART ICLE entry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Jill C. K nvth. T he programming of comp uter art. Vernier Art
Center, S tan for d, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. Th is is a full BOOK LET entry.
1
512 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
nar.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
The style supports bibliographies for the journal Nucleic Acid Research. It was adapted from the standard
BibTEX style unsrt.bst, which organizes the reference list in order of first citation.
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. Sept emb er 1977 Semigroups of recurr ences In David J. L ip coll,
D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, (ed.), High Speed C omp uter and Algorith m
Organizat ion, number 23 in Fast C omp uters part 3, pp. 179—183 Academic
Press New York th ird ed ition Th is is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman , J. D., and Yannakakis, M. March 1983 In W izard V.
Oz an d Mihalis Yan nakakis, (ed .), Proc. Fifteenth Annual AC M S ymposiu m
on the Th eory of Comput in g, nu mber 17 in All AC M C on ferences Bos ton Th e
OX Association for C omp uting Machinery: Academic Press. Th is is a full
INPRO CEDING S entry pp. 133—139.
[3] Aamport, L. A. July 1986 G-An imal’s Jou rn al 41(7), 73+ This is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C. The p rogramming of comput er art Vern ier Art Center St anford,
California Feb ruary 1988 This is a fu ll B OOK LET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fest oon ing Fr en ch Phrases
PhD d is sertation Fanstord Un iversity Department of French Jun e-August
1988 T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
nature.bst 513
nature.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/beebe
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D. In High Speed Com pute r and Algorithm Organization, L ip coll,
D. J., Law rie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, nu mb er 23 in Fas t Com-
pu ters, p art 3, 179—183. Academic Press, New Yorkth ir d edition Septemb er
(1977). T his is a fu ll INC OLL ECT ION ent ry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., an d Yann akakis, M. In Proc. Fifteen th An nual
ACM Symposium on the T heory of Computin g, Oz, W . V. an d Yannakakis,
M., editors, nu mber 17 in All AC M Conferen ces, 133—139 (The OX Associa-
tion for Comp uting Mach ineryAcademic P ress, Boston, 1983). T his is a full
INPRO CEDING S entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A. G-An imal’s Journal 41(7), 73+ July ( 1986). T his is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E. S em inu me rical Algorithms, volume 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm in g. Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 10 January (1981). T his is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C. Vernier Art Center, S tan ford, California, Feb ruary (1988).
This is a full BO OKL ET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P. Fig hting Fire with Fire : Festooning Frenc h Phrase s.
PhD dissertat ion, Fan stord Univers ity, Dep art ment of French, Jun e-August
(1988). T his is a fu ll PHDTHES IS entry.
1
514 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
nederlands.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Author date)
(Author and Author date)
(Author et al. date)
Required files harvard package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/harvard
Sample BibTEX Database:
harvard.bib Contains five entries.
The nederlands.bst style is provided as part of the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles, which
can also be used with manual bibliographies. The style, which requires the harvard package, conforms to Dutch
conventions. Complete citations are in standard parenthetical form. Incomplete citations can be used as nouns, as in
Medd (1999) claims . . . or The key result (Medd) . . ., or as possessives, as in Medd’s (1999) proof . . . . To avoid
LATEX errors when using the harvard styles, delete the BibTEX style files in the bst\beebe directory.
References
L [eslie] A. Aamp ort, juli 1986. The Gn at s an d Gnus D ocu ment Preparation
S ystem. G-An im al’s Jou rn al, 41-7 (1986), 73+. This is a full ARTICL E
entry.
Jill C. Knvth, febru ari 1988. The Programming of Compu ter Art. Vernier Art
Center, S tan ford, C alifornia. This is a full BO OKL ET entry.
D an iel D. L in coll, sep tember 1977. Semigrou ps of Recu rrences. In High S peed
Com puter and Algorithm Organiz ation, David J. Lip coll, D. H. Law rie, en
A. H. Sameh, red actie, Fast Compu ters 23, part 3, p. 179—183. Academic
Pr ess, New York, third e d ruk. T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
F. Ph id ias Phony-Balon ey, ju ni-augustu s 1988. Fighting Fire with Fire: Fes-
tooning Fren ch Phrases. Ph D d issertation , Fanstord Un iversity, Departm ent
of Fren ch. T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
newapa.bst 515
newapa.bst
This BibTEX bibliography style was adapted from plain.bst, named.bst, and apalike.bst. It approx-
imates APA style. It requires the newapa package.
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamp ort, L. A. (1986). T he gnats an d gnus document prep a-
ration syst em. G -Ani mal’s Journal, 41 (7) , 73+. This is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[Knvt h, 1988] Knvth , J. C. (1988) . T he p rogramming of comp uter art . Vern ier
Art C enter, St an ford, California. This is a full BO OKLET en try.
[Oaho, Ullman & Yan nakakis, 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman , J. D., & Yannakakis,
M . (1983). On notions of in formation tran sfer in VLS I circuits. In Oz, W. V.
& Yann akakis, M. (Ed s.), Proc . Fifteen th An nual ACM S ym posium on the
Theory of Com putin g, nu mb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, (pp. 133—139).,
Bos ton . Th e OX Association for Compu ting Mach in ery, Acad emic Press. Th is
is a full INPRO CEDING S entry.
1
516 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
oxford-en.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Full reference at first citation; abbreviated thereafter)
Required files oxford package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/oxford
The style is one of several styles based on the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles. The first time a
reference is cited, the style produces a full reference in the text at the point of the citation. Subsequent citations for
that reference are abbreviated. The in-text citation ibid is used when the current citation is the same as the last. The
style oxford-en.bst is for entries in English. It requires the oxford package. The sample below was created
using a modification of the xampl.bib database.
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A., ’The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System’,
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, 73+ (1986), This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
Knuth, Donald E., Fundamental Algorithms, vol. 1 of The Art of Computer
Programming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, 2nd edn., This is a full INBOOK
entry (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1973).
Knvth, Jill C., ’The Programming of Computer Art’, Vernier Art Center, This
is a full BOOKLET entry (Stanford, California, 1988).
Lincoll, Daniel D., ’Semigroups of Recurrences’, in Lipcoll, David J., Lawrie,
D. H. & Sameh, A. H. eds., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organiza-
tion, no. 23 in Fast Computers, 3rd edn., part 3, pp. 179—183, This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry (New York: Academic Press, 1977).
1
oxford-en.bst 517
Oaho, Alfred V., Ullman, Jeffrey D. & Yannakakis, Mihalis, ’On Notions of In-
formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits’, in Oz, Wizard V. & Yannakakis, Mi-
halis eds., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting, no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry, The OX Association for Computing Machinery (Boston:
Academic Press, 1983).
Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases,
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry
(Department of French, 1988).
2
518 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
oxford-in.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Full reference at first citation; abbreviated thereafter)
Required files oxford package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/oxford
The style is one of several styles based on the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles. The first time a
reference is cited, the style produces a full reference in the text at the point of the citation. Subsequent citations for
that reference are abbreviated. The in-text citation ibid is used when the current citation is the same as the last. The
style oxford-in.bst is for entries in English. It requires the oxford package. The sample below was created
using a modification of the xampl.bib database.
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A., ’The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System’,
G-Animal’s Journal, vol. 41, no. 7, 73+ (1986), This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
Knuth, Donald E., Fundamental Algorithms, vol. 1 of The Art of Computer
Programming, section 1.2, pp. 10—119, 2nd edn., This is a full INBOOK
entry (Reading, Massachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1973).
Knvth, Jill C., ’The Programming of Computer Art’, Vernier Art Center, This
is a full BOOKLET entry (Stanford, California, 1988).
Lincoll, Daniel D., ’Semigroups of Recurrences’, in Lipcoll, David J., Lawrie,
D. H. & Sameh, A. H. eds., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organiza-
tion, no. 23 in Fast Computers, 3rd edn., part 3, pp. 179—183, This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry (New York: Academic Press, 1977).
1
oxford-in.bst 519
Oaho, Alfred V., Ullman, Jeffrey D. & Yannakakis, Mihalis, ’On Notions of In-
formation Transfer in VLSI Circuits’, in Oz, Wizard V. & Yannakakis, Mi-
halis eds., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting, no. 17 in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry, The OX Association for Computing Machinery (Boston:
Academic Press, 1983).
Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases,
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry
(Department of French, 1988).
2
520 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
oxford-se.bst
Format of reference list label None
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation (Full reference at first citation; abbreviated thereafter)
Required files oxford package
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/oxford
The style is one of several styles based on the harvard family of BibTEX bibliography styles. The first time a
reference is cited, the style produces a full reference in the text at the point of the citation. Subsequent citations
for that reference are abbreviated. The in-text citation ibid is used when the current citation is the same as the last.
The style oxford-se.bst is for entries in Swedish, with English words such as editor translated to Swedish by
the bibliography style. It requires the oxford package. The sample below was created using a modification of the
xampl.bib database.
References
Aamport, L[eslie] A., ”The Gnats and Gnus Document Preparation System”,
G-Animal’s Journal , vol. 41, nr. 7, 73+ (1986), This is a full ARTICLE
entry.
Knuth, Donald E., Seminumerical Algorithms, vol. 2 av The Art of Computer
Programming, andra uppl., This is a full BOOK entry (Reading, Mas-
sachusetts: Addison-Wesley, 1981).
Knvth, Jill C., ”The Programming of Computer Art”, Vernier Art Center, This
is a full BOOKLET entry (Stanford, California, 1988).
Lincoll, Daniel D., ”Semigroups of Recurrences”, i Lipcoll, David J., Lawrie,
D. H. & Sameh, A. H. red., High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organiza-
tion, nr. 23 i Fast Computers, tredje uppl., part 3, ss. 179—183, This is a full
INCOLLECTION entry (New York: Academic Press, 1977).
1
oxford-se.bst 521
Oaho, Alfred V., Ullman, Jeffrey D. & Yannakakis, Mihalis, ”On Notions of
Information Transfer in VLSI Circuits”, i Oz, Wizard V. & Yannakakis, Mi-
halis red., Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting, nr. 17 i All ACM Conferences, ss. 133—139, This is a full INPRO-
CEDINGS entry, The OX Association for Computing Machinery (Boston:
Academic Press, 1983).
Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias, Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases,
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry
(Department of French, 1988).
2
522 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
pccp.bst
This is a BibTEX bibliography style for Physical Chemistry Chemical Physics. The style omits the title of entries
classified as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries except
those classified as ‘unpublished’.
References
[1] D. D. Lincoll in High Speed Compute r and Algorithm Organization, ed. D. J.
Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, number 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press, New York, t hird ed., 1977; part 3, p p. 179—183.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis In ed. W. V. O z and M. Yan-
nakakis, Proc. Fifteenth Ann ual AC M S ymposiu m on the Theory of Com-
puting, number 17 in All AC M Conferen ces, p p. 133—139, Boston, 1983. Th e
OX Association for Compu ting Mach in ery, Academic Press.
[5] J. C. K nvth T he p rogramming of comput er art; Vern ier Art Center, Feb ru-
ary , 1988.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooni ng French Phrases
PhD dissertat ion, Fanstord University, Ju ne-August , 1988.
1
phaip.bst 523
phaip.bst
This BibTEX bibliography style supports the requirements of the American Institute of Physics journals.
References
[1] D. D. Lincoll, Semigrou ps of recu rrences, in High S peed Compute r and
Algorithm Organ ization, edited by D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Law rie, and A. H.
Sameh, number 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183, Academic
Press, New York, t hird ed ition, 1977, Th is is a fu ll INCO LLEC T IO N entry.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis, On notion s of information
transfer in VLS I circuits, in Proc . Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Com putin g, ed it ed by W. V. O z and M. Yannakakis, number 17
in All ACM C onferen ces, p ages 133—139, Bost on , 1983, The OX Association
for Comp uting Mach inery, Academic Press, T his is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] L. A. Aamp ort, G-Animal’s Journ al 41, 73+ (1986), T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney, Fig hting Fire with Fire : Festooning Frenc h Phrase s,
PhD dissert ation, Fan stord University, Department of French, 1988, Th is is
a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
524 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
phapalik.bst
The style supports bibliographies in the style of the American Psychological Association for various physics
journals. It requires the apalike package.
References
[Aamport, 1986] Aamport, L. A. (1986). The gnats and gnus document prepa-
ration system. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[Knuth, 1981] Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminumerical Algorithms, volume 2 of The
Art of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
second edition. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knvth, 1988] Knvth, J. C. (1988). The programming of computer art. Vernier
Art Center, Stanford, California. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lincoll, 1977] Lincoll, D. D. (1977). Semigroups of recurrences. In Lipcoll,
D. J., Lawrie, D. H., and Sameh, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, number 23 in Fast Computers, part 3, pages 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, third edition. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D., and Yannakakis, M. (1983).
On notions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. In Oz, W. V. and Yan-
nakakis, M., editors, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, number 17 in All ACM Conferences, pages 133—139, Boston.
The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[Phony-Baloney, 1988] Phony-Baloney, F. P. (1988). Fighting Fire with Fire:
Festooning French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Depart-
ment of French. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
phcpc.bst 525
phcpc.bst
The style supports bibliographies for the Computer Physics Communications. It is similar to the style used in
American Institute of Physics journals.
References
[1] Lincoll, D. D., Semigroups of r ecu rrences, in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, edited by L ip coll, D. J., Lawrie, D. H., and Sameh,
A. H., number 23 in Fast Comp uters, part 3, p ages 179—183, Acad em ic Press,
New York, third edition, 1977, This is a full INCO LLECT IO N entry.
[2] Oaho, A. V., Ullman, J. D ., and Yannakakis, M., On n ot ions of information
transfer in VLS I circuits, in Proc . Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Com pu ting, edited by O z, W. V. and Yannakakis, M ., nu mb er 17
in All ACM C onferen ces, p ages 133—139, Bost on , 1983, The OX Association
for Comp uting Mach inery, Academic Press, T his is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] Aamport, L. A., G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986) 73+, T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[4] Knu th, D. E., Se min umerical Algorithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Prog ramm in g, Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 1981, This is a full B OOK entry.
[5] Knvt h, J. C., The program min g of comput er art, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, 1988, T his is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch Phrase s,
PhD dissert ation, Fan stord University, Department of French, 1988, Th is is
a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
526 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
phiaea.bst
The style supports bibliographies for physics conferences. In the reference list, authors’ names are printed in
capital letters.
References
[1] LINC OLL , D. D., Semigrou ps of recu rrences, in High S peed Com pu ter and
Algorithm Organization, edited by L IPCOLL, D. J. et al., number 23 in
Fast Compu ters, p art 3, pages 179—183, Academic Press, New York, third
edition , 1977, T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N entry.
[2] OAHO, A. V. et al., On n otions of in formation t ransfer in VLS I circu its,
in Proc. Fifteen th An nual ACM Sym posium on the Theory of Computin g,
edited by OZ, W . V. et al., nu mber 17 in All ACM C onferences, pages 133—
139, Bost on , 1983, The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic
Press, This is a full INPRO CED ING S ent ry.
[5] KNVT H, J. C., The programmin g of compu ter art, Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, 1988, T his is a fu ll BOO KLET entry.
[6] PHONY-BALO NEY, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch
Phrases, PhD d issertation , Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fren ch, 1988,
This is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
phjcp.bst 527
phjcp.bst
References
[1] D. D. Lin co ll, Semigroups of Recu rren ces , in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organ ization, ed it ed by D. J. Lip coll, D. H . Lawrie , and
A. H. Sameh , numb er 23 in Fas t C omp uters, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic
Press, New York, t hird ed ition, 1977, Th is is a fu ll INCO LLEC T IO N entry.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannak akis, O n Notions of In forma-
tion Tran sfer in VLSI Circuits, in Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM S ymposium
on the Theory of C omputing, ed ited by W. V . O z an d M. Yan nakakis,
numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, p p. 133—139, B oston , 1983, The OX
Association for C omp uting Machinery, Academic Press, T his is a fu ll IN-
PRO CED ING S ent ry.
[3] L. A . A ampo rt, G-Animal’s Journ al 41, 73+ (1986), T his is a fu ll ARTI-
CLE entry.
[6] F. P. Ph ony-B alone y, Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phrases, PhD d issertation , Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fren ch, 1988,
This is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
528 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
phnf.bst
The style is for Nuclear Fusion. In the reference list, the style prints authors’ names in capital letters. The style
restricts the number of authors that can be listed for multiauthor publications.
References
[1] LINC OLL , D. D., S emigroup s of recurren ces, in LIPCO LL, D. J., LAWRIE,
D. H., and S AM EH, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization , nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic
Press, New York, t hird ed ition, 1977, Th is is a fu ll INCO LLEC T IO N entry.
[2] OAHO, A. V., ULL MAN, J. D., an d YANNAKAK IS , M., O n n otions of in-
formation transfer in VL SI circuits, in OZ, W . V. and YANNAK AKIS, M.,
editors, Proc. Fifteen th Annu al ACM S ymposium on the Theory of Com put-
in g, numb er 17 in All ACM Con ferences, p p. 133—139, Bost on, 1983, Th e
OX Association for C omp uting Machinery, Academic Press, Th is is a full
INPRO CEDING S entry.
[3] AAMPORT, L. A., G-Animal’s Jou rnal 41 (1986) 73+, Th is is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[6] PHONY-BALO NEY, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch
Phrases, PhD d issertation , Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fren ch, 1988,
This is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
phnflet.bst 529
phnflet.bst
The style is for Nuclear Fusion Letters. In the reference list, the style prints authors’ names in capital letters.
References
[1] LINC OLL , D. D., S emigroup s of recurren ces, in LIPCO LL, D. J., LAWRIE,
D. H., and S AM EH, A. H., editors, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization , nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pp. 179—183, Academic
Press, New York, t hird ed ition, 1977, Th is is a fu ll INCO LLEC T IO N entry.
[2] OAHO, A. V., ULL MAN, J. D., an d YANNAKAK IS , M., O n n otions of in-
formation transfer in VL SI circuits, in OZ, W . V. and YANNAK AKIS, M.,
editors, Proc. Fifteen th Annu al ACM S ymposium on the Theory of Com put-
in g, numb er 17 in All ACM Con ferences, p p. 133—139, Bost on, 1983, Th e
OX Association for C omp uting Machinery, Academic Press, Th is is a full
INPRO CEDING S entry.
[3] AAMPORT, L. A., G-Animal’s Jou rnal 41 (1986) 73+, Th is is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[6] PHONY-BALO NEY, F. P., Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch
Phrases, PhD d issertation , Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fren ch, 1988,
This is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
530 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
phone.bst
The style is part of directory, a macro package for LATEX and BibTEX that facilitates the construction,
maintenance, and use of a database that is similar to an address book. You can use the package to construct your own
address book; in this way, the package operates like ordinary BibTEX styles except that the reference list it produces
contains information about companies, people, and places instead of published articles and books. You can also use
the package to include information about companies, people, and places in your document; see letter.bst on
page 507.
All styles associated with directory require the LATEX directory package, which is available on the pro-
gram CD in the directory CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory. Follow the standard procedure for
adding the package to your program installation. Modifications are required to use entries derived from both di-
rectory operations and standard bibliography operations in the same document. For more information, see the
file directory.tex in CTAN/biblio/bibtex/contrib/directory on the program CD.
The directory styles also require the use of the \dir{key} command instead of the \cite{key} command.
In your document, use TEX fields containing \dir{key} commands instead of standard citations, as described
below. The styles support a \nodir{key} command, which creates a phone book with no citations in the text.
The phone.bst style produces a reference list containing the name, phone, and fax fields that correspond to
the cited keys. It prints an abbreviated name at the citation point unless the \nodir{key} command is used.
2. From the Insert menu, choose Typeset Object and then choose TeX Field.
3. In the entry area, type \dir{key} where key is the key for the database entry you want to cite.
4. Choose OK.
The first sample shown below illustrates a phone list created with \dir{key} commands in the text. The second
sample illustrates a phone list created using a \nodir{*} command without any preceding text. The samples were
created using the sample databases business.bib and family.bib.
phone.bst 531
phpf.bst
The style is for Physics of Fluids. It is similar to the style used in American Institute of Physics journals, but
lists any number of authors for multiauthor publications.
References
[1] D. D . Lincoll, in Hig h S peed Computer and Algorithm O rgan ization, ed ited
by D . J. Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, an d A. H. S ameh , Acad emic Press, New York,
th ird ed it ion, 1977, numb er 23 in Fast C omput ers, p art 3, pp. 179—183, Th is
is a f ull INCOLLECTION entry.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, an d M. Yann akakis, On notion s of information
transfer in VLS I circuits, in Proc . Fifteen th Ann ual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Com putin g, ed it ed by W. V. O z and M. Yannakakis, number 17
in All ACM Conferences, pp. 133—139, Boston, 1983, Th e OX Association
for Comp uting Mach inery, Academic Press, T his is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[3] L. A. Aamp ort, G-Animal’s Journ al 41, 73+ (1986), T his is a full ARTICL E
entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney, Fig hting Fire with Fire : Festooning Frenc h Phrase s,
PhD dissert ation, Fan stord University, Department of French, 1988, Th is is
a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
phppcf.bst 533
phppcf.bst
The style is a physics version of apalike.bst (see page 447), which formats bibliography entries alphabet-
ically by author, last name first. Citations in the text can include single and multiple author-date references. In
citations and in the reference list, the style prints authors’ names in small capitals.
References
[A ampo rt, 1986] Aamport, L. A . (1986) . G-Animal’s Journal 41, 73+. Th is
is a full ARTICLE ent ry.
[Knu th , 1981] Knuth, D. E. (1981). Seminum erical Algorithm s, volume 2
of T he Art of Computer Programm ing . Add ison-Wesley, Read in g, Mas-
sachusett s, second edition . T his is a fu ll B OOK entry.
[Linco ll, 1977] Linco ll, D. D. (1977) . S em igroups of Recurren ces. In Lip -
coll, D. J., L aw rie, D. H., and Same h, A . H ., editors, High Speed Com-
puter and Algorithm Organization, numb er 23 in Fast C omp uters, part 3,
p ages 179—183. Academic Press, New York, th ird edition. T his is a full IN-
COL LEC TION entry.
[Oaho et al., 1983] Oa ho, A . V., U llma n, J. D., and Yan nakakis, M.
( 1983). On Notions of Information Tran sfer in VLSI Circuits. In Oz, W . V.
and Yanna kak is, M. , editors, Proc . Fifteen th Annual ACM S ymposium on
the T heory of C omputing, number 17 in All AC M C onferen ces, pages 133—
139, Boston. The OX Association for Compu ting Machinery, Academic Press.
This is a fu ll INPROCEDING S entry.
1
534 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
phreport.bst
References
[1] D. D. L in coll, Semigroups of Recurren ces, in High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organ ization, edited by D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Law rie, and A. H.
Sameh, number 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183, Academic
Press, New York, th ird ed it ion, Sept. 1977, T his is a full INCO LLEC TIO N
entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney, Fig hting Fire with Fire : Festooning Frenc h Phrase s,
PhD dissert ation, Fanstord University, Dep artment of Fr ench , Jun e-Aug.
1988, T his is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
phrmp.bst 535
phrmp.bst
The style is for Reviews of Modern Physics. Reference list entries are indented far enough to accommodate the
widest entry label.
References
[Aamport 1986] L. A. Aam port, G-Animal’s Journal, 41:73+, Ju ly 1986,
Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
[Knu th 1981] D. E. Knu th, Semin umerical Algorithms, volum e 2 of
The Art of Computer Programming, Addison-Wesley,
Reading, Massachusetts , second ed it ion, 10 Jan . 1981,
Th is is a full BOO K entry.
[Knvt h 1988] J. C. Knvth , T he programmin g of computer art, Vern ier
Art Center, S tanford, Californ ia, Feb . 1988, Th is is a
full BO OKL ET ent ry.
1
536 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
plabbrv.bst
The style is for text in Polish. Like abbrv.bst, this style creates compact entries by abbreviating first names,
month names, and journal names. It sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with numbers.
References
[1] L. A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lip. 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, wydanie sec-
ond, 10 Sty. 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, California, Luty 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
A. H. Sameh, redaktorzy, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
number 23 serii Fast Computers, part 3, strony 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, wydanie third, Wrze. 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, M. Yannakakis. On notions of information transfer
in VLSI circuits. W. V. Oz, M. Yannakakis, redaktorzy, Proc. Fifteenth
Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, number 17 serii All
ACM Conferences, strony 133—139, Boston, Mar. 1983. The OX Association
for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases.
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, Czerw.-Sier.
1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
plain.bst 537
plain.bst
One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, plain.bst creates bibliographies formatted more or less as
suggested by van Leunen in A Handbook for Scholars. The style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers. The style is the basis for many other bibliography styles.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamp ort. Th e gnats and gnus d ocument preparat ion system.
G-Anim al’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Ju ly 1986. Th is is a full ART ICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth . Seminum erical Alg orithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm in g. Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BO OK entry.
[3] Jill C . Knvth . The programming of comp uter art . Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lin coll. Semigrou ps of recu rrences. In David J. Lip coll, D. H.
Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh, editors, High S peed Compute r an d Algorithm Or-
ganization, nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition , Sept emb er 1977. This is a fu ll INC OLL EC-
TIO N entry.
[5] Alfred V. O ah o, Jeffrey D. Ullman, an d Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circu its. In W izard V. O z and Mihalis
Yannakakis, ed itors, Proc. Fifteenth An nual ACM Symposium on the The-
ory of Computin g, numb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, pages 133—139,
Boston, M arch 1983. Th e OX Association for Comp uting Mach in ery, Aca-
demic Press. Th is is a full INPROC EDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phid ias Ph ony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing French
Phrases. Ph D dissert ation, Fanstord Un iversity, Department of French,
Jun e-August 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
538 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
plainhtml.bst
This style creates a reference list appropriate for use on websites. It produces the reference list as an HTML
file contained within the commands <dl> and </dl>. The style supports URL fields within the bibliographic
information, so that entries in the bibliography become links to the resources themselves. The resulting HTML file
can be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations. The symbols ~and – remain in
the output file, but can be changed with a post-processor to and &enspace; or ’ ’ and ’-’ as required.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on plain.bst, which
sorts references alphabetically. The styles plainhtmldate.bst and plainhtmldater.bst are related.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and
to specify and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document
according to the instructions that follow.
The sample .htm file shown on the next page was created according to these instructions and using a modification
of the sample bibliography bibrefs.bib.
plainhtml.bst 539
540 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
plainhtmldate.bst
This style creates a reference list appropriate for use on websites. It produces the reference list as an HTML
file contained within the commands <dl> and </dl>. The style supports URL fields within the bibliographic
information, so that entries in the bibliography become links to the resources themselves. The resulting HTML file
can be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations. The symbols ~and – remain in
the output file, but can be changed with a post-processor to and &enspace; or ’ ’ and ’-’ as required.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on plainhtml.bst,
but lists references in chronological order. It is related to plainhtmldater.bst.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and
to specify and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document
as described for plainhtml.bst on page 538. The sample .htm file below was created according to those
instructions and using a modification of the sample bibliography bibrefs.bib.
plainhtmldater.bst 541
plainhtmldater.bst
This style creates a reference list appropriate for use on websites. It produces the reference list as an HTML
file contained within the commands <dl> and </dl>. The style supports URL fields within the bibliographic
information, so that entries in the bibliography become links to the resources themselves. The resulting HTML file
can be incorporated into the HTML file for the document containing the citations. The symbols ~and – remain in
the output file, but can be changed with a post-processor to and &enspace; or ’ ’ and ’-’ as required.
The style doesn’t produce an automatic heading for the list of references. The style is based on plainhtml.bst,
but lists references in reverse chronological order. It is related to plainhtmldate.bst.
To use the style in SWP and SW, follow the standard procedure to insert citations in your document and
to specify and generate a BibTEX bibliography. Then, incorporate the resulting HTML file into your document
as described for plainhtml.bst on page 538. The sample .htm file below was created according to those
instructions and using a modification of the sample bibliography bibrefs.bib.
542 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
plalpha.bst
The style is for text in Polish. Like alpha.bst, this style uses source labels such as Knu66, formed from the
author’s name and the year of publication.
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation sys-
tem. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lipiec 1986. This is a full AR-
TICLE entry.
[Knu81] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art
of Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
wydanie second, 10 Stycze/n 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Luty 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lin77] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie, A. H. Sameh, redaktorzy, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization, number 23 serii Fast Computers, part 3, strony 179—183.
Academic Press, New York, wydanie third, Wrzesie/n 1977. This is a
full INCOLLECTION entry.
[OUY83] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions
of information transfer in VLSI circuits. Wizard V. Oz, Mihalis Yan-
nakakis, redaktorzy, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the
Theory of Computing, number 17 serii All ACM Conferences, strony
133—139, Boston, Marzec 1983. The OX Association for Computing
Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[PB88] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning
French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, Czerwiec-Sierpie/n 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
plplain.bst 543
plplain.bst
The style is for text in Polish. Like plain.bst, this style sorts entries alphabetically and labels them with
numbers.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lipiec 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art of
Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, wydanie
second, 10 Stycze/n 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Luty 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
A. H. Sameh, redaktorzy, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
number 23 serii Fast Computers, part 3, strony 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, wydanie third, Wrzesie/n 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of infor-
mation transfer in VLSI circuits. Wizard V. Oz, Mihalis Yannakakis, redak-
torzy, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing,
number 17 serii All ACM Conferences, strony 133—139, Boston, Marzec 1983.
The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
Czerwiec-Sierpie/n 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
544 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
plunsrt.bst
The bibliography style is for text in Polish. Like unsrt.bst, this style lists bibliography entries in the order
of their first citation and labels them with numbers.
References
[1] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. David J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie,
A. H. Sameh, redaktorzy, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
number 23 serii Fast Computers, part 3, strony 179—183. Academic Press,
New York, wydanie third, Wrzesie/n 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION
entry.
[2] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman, Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of infor-
mation transfer in VLSI circuits. Wizard V. Oz, Mihalis Yannakakis, redak-
torzy, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing,
number 17 serii All ACM Conferences, strony 133—139, Boston, Marzec 1983.
The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[3] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, Lipiec 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, wolumen 2 serii The Art of
Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, wydanie
second, 10 Stycze/n 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[5] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, Luty 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French,
Czerwiec-Sierpie/n 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
revcompchem.bst 545
revcompchem.bst
This bibliography style is for Reviews in Computational Chemistry. The style omits the title of entries classified
as ‘article’, ‘book’, ‘inbook’, and ‘incollection’ and omits information coded as ‘note’ in all entries except those
classified as ‘unpublished’.
References
[1] D. D . Lincoll in Hig h S peed Computer and Algorithm Organiz ation, D. J.
Lip coll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, Eds., nu mb er 23 in Fast C omput ers;
Academic Press, New York, t hird ed., 1977; part 3, p ages 179—183.
[2] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman, and M. Yannakakis in W. V. Oz and M. Yan-
nakakis, Eds., Proc. Fi ftee nth Ann ual ACM Symposium on the Theory of
Com puting, nu mb er 17 in All ACM C on ferences, p ages 133—139, B oston,
1983. Th e OX Association for Computing Mach in ery, Acad emic Press.
[3] L. A. Aamport, G-Animal’s Jou rn al, July ( 1986). The gn at s and gnus doc-
ument prep aration system.
[4] D. E. Knut h, S em inu merical Alg orithm s, Vol. 2 of T he Art of Com pu ter
Program ming, Ad dison-Wesley, Readin g, Massachusett s, second ed., 1981.
[5] J. C. K nvth T he p rogramming of comput er art; Vern ier Art Center, Feb ru-
ary , ( 1988).
1
546 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
siam.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/base
One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, siam.bst (24-Jan-88 version) uses the abbreviations of the
Mathematical Reviews. The style prints authors’ names in the reference list in small capitals. It prints titles in italics,
with article titles in lowercase and book titles in mixed upper- and lower-case letters. Commas separate all fields
except before notes.
References
[1] L. A . Aampo rt, The gnats and gn us docum en t preparation system,
G-Animal’s Jou rnal, 41 (1986), pp. 73+ . T his is a fu ll ART IC LE entry.
[4] D. D. Lin co ll, Semigroups of rec urren ces, in High Sp eed Compu ter and
Algorithm Organization, D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, eds.,
no. 23 in Fast Comp uters, Academic Press, New York, third ed., Sep t. 1977,
part 3, pp. 179—183. Th is is a fu ll INC OL LECT ION en try.
[6] F. P. Pho ny-Ba lo ney , Fi ghting Fire with Fire: Festooning Fren ch
Phrases, PhD dissert ation, Fan stord University, D epartment of French,
Jun e-Aug. 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
siamproc.bst 547
siamproc.bst
The style is a BibTEX bibliography styles for SIAM journals. It uses the abbreviations of the Mathematical
Reviews. The style prints titles in italics, with article titles in lowercase and book titles in mixed upper- and lower-
case letters.
References
[1] L. A. Aamp ort, T he gnats and g nus docum ent preparation system,
G-Animal’s Jou rnal, 41 (1986), pp. 73+ . T his is a fu ll ART IC LE entry.
[3] J. C. K nvth, The programming of com pute r art. Vernier Art C enter, Stan-
ford, C alifornia, Feb. 1988. This is a full BO OKLET entry.
[4] D. D . Lincoll, S em igroups of recurren ces, in High Sp eed Compu ter an d Al-
gorith m Organ ization, D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie, and A. H. Sameh, eds.,
no. 23 in Fast Comp uters, Academic Press, New York, third ed., Sep t. 1977,
part 3, pp. 179—183. Th is is a fu ll INC OL LECT ION en try.
1
548 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
smfalpha.bst
The style was designed for the Société Mathématique de France. It uses source labels such as Knu66, formed
from the author’s name and the year of publication. The style sorts entries alphabetically and prints authors’ names
in small capitals in the reference list.
References
[Aam86] L. A. Aamport — “The gnats and gnus document preparation sys-
tem”, G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), no. 7, p. 73+, This is a full
ARTICLE entry.
[Knu81] D. E. Knuth — Seminumerical algorithms, second éd., The Art
of Computer Programming, vol. 2, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Mas-
sachusetts, 10 1981, This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] J. C. Knvth — The programming of computer art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lin77] D. D. Lincoll — “Semigroups of recurrences”, High Speed Computer
and Algorithm Organization (D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie et A. H.
Sameh, éds.), Fast Computers, no. 23, Academic Press, New York,
third éd., 1977, This is a full INCOLLECTION entry, p. 179—183.
[OUY83] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman et M. Yannakakis — “On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits”, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM
Symposium on the Theory of Computing (Boston) (W. V. Oz et
M. Yannakakis, éds.), All ACM Conferences, no. 17, The OX As-
sociation for Computing Machinery, Academic Press, 1983, This is a
full INPROCEDINGS entry, p. 133—139.
[PB88] F. P. Phony-Baloney — “Fighting fire with fire: Festooning
French phrases”, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, - 1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
smfplain.bst 549
smfplain.bst
The style was designed for the Société Mathématique de France. The style prints authors’ names in small capitals
in the reference list.
References
[1] L. A. Aamport — “The gnats and gnus document preparation system”,
G-Animal’s Journal 41 (1986), no. 7, p. 73+, This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth — Seminumerical algorithms, second éd., The Art of Computer
Programming, vol. 2, Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, 10 1981,
This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth — The programming of computer art, Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, 1988, This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll — “Semigroups of recurrences”, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization (D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie et A. H. Sameh, éds.),
Fast Computers, no. 23, Academic Press, New York, third éd., 1977, This is
a full INCOLLECTION entry, p. 179—183.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman et M. Yannakakis — “On notions of informa-
tion transfer in VLSI circuits”, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on
the Theory of Computing (Boston) (W. V. Oz et M. Yannakakis, éds.), All
ACM Conferences, no. 17, The OX Association for Computing Machinery,
Academic Press, 1983, This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry, p. 133—139.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney — “Fighting fire with fire: Festooning French
phrases”, PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, -
1988, This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
550 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
sweabbrv.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/swebib
The style is the Swedish version of BibTEX standard bibliography style abbrv.bst, which creates compact
entries by abbreviating first names, month names, and journal names.
References
[1] L. A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, juli 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] D. E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, band 2 av The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ut-
gva, 10 jan. 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] J. C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center, Stan-
ford, California, febr. 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] D. D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. I D. J. Lipcoll, D. H. Lawrie och
A. H. Sameh, redaktrer, High Speed Computer and Algorithm Organization,
nummer 23 i Fast Computers, part 3, ss 179—183. Academic Press, New
York, third utgva, sept. 1977. This is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] A. V. Oaho, J. D. Ullman och M. Yannakakis. On notions of information
transfer in VLSI circuits. I W. V. Oz och M. Yannakakis, redaktrer, Proc.
Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory of Computing, nummer 17
i All ACM Conferences, ss 133—139, Boston, mars 1983. The OX Association
for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS
entry.
[6] F. P. Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French Phrases.
PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, juni-aug.
1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
swealpha.bst 551
swealpha.bst
The style is the Swedish version of BibTEX standard bibliography style alpha.bst, which uses source labels
such as Knu66, formed from the author’s name and the year of publication, and sorts entries alphabetically.
References
[Aam86] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation sys-
tem. G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, juli 1986. This is a full ARTI-
CLE entry.
[Knu81] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, band 2 av The Art of
Computer Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts,
second utgva, 10 januari 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[Knv88] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, februari 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[Lin77] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. I David J. Lipcoll,
D. H. Lawrie och A. H. Sameh, redaktrer, High Speed Computer and
Algorithm Organization, nummer 23 i Fast Computers, part 3, ss 179—
183. Academic Press, New York, third utgva, september 1977. This
is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[OUY83] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman och Mihalis Yannakakis. On no-
tions of information transfer in VLSI circuits. I Wizard V. Oz och
Mihalis Yannakakis, redaktrer, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Sympo-
sium on the Theory of Computing, nummer 17 i All ACM Conferences,
ss 133—139, Boston, mars 1983. The OX Association for Computing
Machinery, Academic Press. This is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[PB88] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning
French Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department
of French, juni-augusti 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
552 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
sweplain.bst
The style is the Swedish version of BibTEX standard bibliography style plain.bst, which sorts entries alpha-
betically and labels them with numbers.
References
[1] L[eslie] A. Aamport. The gnats and gnus document preparation system.
G-Animal’s Journal, 41(7):73+, juli 1986. This is a full ARTICLE entry.
[2] Donald E. Knuth. Seminumerical Algorithms, band 2 av The Art of Com-
puter Programming. Addison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second utgva,
10 januari 1981. This is a full BOOK entry.
[3] Jill C. Knvth. The programming of computer art. Vernier Art Center,
Stanford, California, februari 1988. This is a full BOOKLET entry.
[4] Daniel D. Lincoll. Semigroups of recurrences. I David J. Lipcoll, D. H.
Lawrie och A. H. Sameh, redaktrer, High Speed Computer and Algorithm
Organization, nummer 23 i Fast Computers, part 3, ss 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third utgva, september 1977. This is a full INCOLLEC-
TION entry.
[5] Alfred V. Oaho, Jeffrey D. Ullman och Mihalis Yannakakis. On notions of
information transfer in VLSI circuits. I Wizard V. Oz och Mihalis Yan-
nakakis, redaktrer, Proc. Fifteenth Annual ACM Symposium on the Theory
of Computing, nummer 17 i All ACM Conferences, ss 133—139, Boston, mars
1983. The OX Association for Computing Machinery, Academic Press. This
is a full INPROCEDINGS entry.
[6] F. Phidias Phony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festooning French
Phrases. PhD dissertation, Fanstord University, Department of French, juni-
augusti 1988. This is a full PHDTHESIS entry.
1
thesnumb.bst 553
thesnumb.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list Alphabetical by author
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/afthesis
The style is included on CTAN as part of the afthesis package. It supports the standard Air Force Institute
of Technology bibliography style as shown in the AFIT Style Guide for Theses and Dissertations.
References
[1] Aamport, L[eslie] A. “The Gnat s and Gnu s Document Pr ep aration System,”
G-Anim al’s Journal , 41 (7):73+ ( Ju ly 1986). This is a full ART ICL E entry.
[3] Knvt h, Jill C. “The Programmin g of C omp uter Art,”. Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
[4] Lincoll, Dan iel D . “Semigroups of Recurrences.” High Speed Com puter and
Algorithm Organ ization , (T hird Edition ) Nu mb er 23 in Fast C omput ers,
edited by David J. Lip coll, et al., p art 3, 179—183, New York: Academic
Press, Sept emb er 1977. Th is is a full INCOLLECTION entry.
[5] Oaho, Alfred V., et al. “On Not ions of Inf ormation Tran sfer in VLSI Cir-
cuits.” Proc. Fifteenth An nu al ACM Symposium on the Theory of Com-
puting , nu mb er 17 in All ACM Conferen ces, edited by W izard V. Oz and
Mihalis Yann akakis. 133—139. B ost on : Academic Pr ess, March 1983. Th is
is a f ull INPROC EDINGS entry.
[6] Phony-Baloney, F. Phidias. Fig hting Fire with Fire: Festoonin g Fren ch
Phrases . Ph D Dissertat ion, Fan stord University, Department of French,
Jun e-August 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
554 Chapter 11 BibTEX Bibliography Styles
unsrt.bst
Format of reference list label [number]
Organization of reference list In order of first citation
Format of citation [number]
Directory TCITeX/BibTeX/bst/base
One of the BibTEX standard bibliography styles, unsrt.bst lists bibliography entries in the order of their first
citation. Otherwise, the style is the same as plain.bst, which labels entries with numbers.
References
[1] Daniel D. Lin coll. Semigrou ps of recu rrences. In David J. Lip coll, D. H.
Lawrie, an d A. H. Sameh, editors, High S peed Compute r an d Algorithm Or-
ganization, nu mb er 23 in Fast Compu ters, part 3, pages 179—183. Academic
Press, New York, third edition , Sept emb er 1977. This is a fu ll INC OLL EC-
TIO N entry.
[4] Donald E. Knuth . Seminum erical Alg orithms, volu me 2 of The Art of Com-
puter Programm in g. Ad dison-Wesley, Reading, Massachusetts, second ed i-
tion, 10 January 1981. This is a full BO OK entry.
[5] Jill C . Knvth . The programming of comp uter art . Vernier Art Center,
St an ford, C alifornia, Febru ary 1988. T his is a full BOOK LET entry.
[6] F. Phid ias Ph ony-Baloney. Fighting Fire with Fire: Festoon ing French
Phrases. Ph D dissert ation, Fanstord Un iversity, Department of French,
Jun e-August 1988. T his is a full PHDT HESIS entry.
1
Index
Article (SE), 280 Texts, 80
aaai-named.bst, 420 ASAE Transactions, 32 Monthly Notices of the
aabbrv.bst, 422 ASME Meeting, 34 Royal Astronomical So-
aalpha.bst, 423 Astronomy & Astro- ciety, 82
abbrv.bst, 424 physics, 36 REVTEX 4, 84
achemso.bst, 425 Balkema, 37 Sans serif Article (SE), 284
achemsol.bst, 426 DECUS Proceedings, 39 Science Magazine, 86
acm.bst, 427 Elbert Walker’s Article, 41 SIAM Journal, 88
additional information Elsevier CRC One-column, SIAM Proceedings in Ap-
technical support, xxiii 43 plied Mathematics, 90
address-html.bst, 431 Elsevier CRC Two-column, SIAM-ACM Preprint, 92
address.bst, 428 45 Similar to AIP, 94
adfathesis.bst, 433 Elsevier IFAC Proceedings, Similar to AIP - Modified,
agsm.bst, 434 47 96
alpha.bst, 435 Elsevier Preprint, 49 Similar to Bulletin of the
alphahtml.bst, 436 Geophysics Journal, 51 American Mathematical
alphahtmldate.bst, 438 Harold O. Fried’s Article, Society, 98
alphahtmldater.bst, 439 53 Similar to MAA Monthly
amsalpha.bst, 440 IEEE Transactions for Con- before 1992, 100
amsplain.bst, 441 ferences, 55 Similar to North-Holland
annotate.bst, 442 IEEE Transactions for Jour- Journals, 102
annotation.bst, 443 nals, 56 Similar to Sequential Anal-
anotit.bst, 444 IEICE Transactions, 57 ysis Journal, 104
apa.bst, 445 International Journal of Simple MIT Press Article,
apacite.bst, 446 Forecasting - Draft, 58 12
apalike.bst, 447 Japanese Journal of Ap- Society for Computer Sim-
apalike2.bst, 448 plied Physics, 60 ulation, 106
aplain.bst, 449 JEEP - A General Purpose SPIE Proceedings, 108
apsr.bst, 450 Vehicle, 62 SPIE Proceedings (new),
Article shells JEEP - Double-spaced Ex- 112
AASTeX Journal, 14 cept for Quotes, 64 SPIE Proceedings - Modi-
about, 11 Journal of International fied, 110
Academic Press Journals, Economics North Hol- Springer-Verlag Heidelberg
16 land, 66 Journal, 114
Academic Press Journals - Journal of Low Tempera- Squeezed States and Uncer-
Modified, 18 ture Physics, 68 tainty Relations, 116
American Chemical Soci- Journal of Progress in Sur- Standard LATEX Article, 268
ety, 20 face Science, 70 Standard LATEX Article
American Statistical Asso- Kluwer Journal, 72 (Blank), 268
ciation Proceedings, 22 LATEX-like Article (SE), 282 Standard LATEX Article
AMS Journal Article, 24 Linear Algebra and its Ap- (Chicago), 118
AMS Proceedings Article, plications, 74 Standard LATEX Article
26 Mathematical Reviews (Harvard), 120
An Astronomy- Template, 76 Standard LATEX Article
Astrophysics Journal, 28 Mathematics Magazine Ar- (hyperref), 122
Annals of Statistics-Draft, ticle, 78 Statistics and Decisions,
30 Modified Article for Short 123
556 Index